3. 《大般涅槃经》的注释巴利
3. Mahāparinibbānasuttavaṇṇanā
131 “如是我闻”这句,就是《大般涅槃经》。下面按顺序解释其中的词句。“灵鹫山”:秃鹫曾住在这座山的峰顶,或者这座山的峰顶形状像秃鹫,所以叫灵鹫山;也就是在那座灵鹫山中。“想要攻打”:为了征服而想出兵。“跋耆族”:指跋耆族的诸王。“具有如此大神力”:具备如此大的王权威势,这是说明他们团结和合。“具有如此大威力”:具备如此大的威势力量,这是说明他们在象术、箭术等方面训练有素。关于这一点,经中说:“这些离车族青年王子确实训练有素,确实训练精良,他们竟能在细小的钥匙孔中连续射箭,箭箭相随,毫不偏差。”(《相应部》5.1115)
“我将铲除”:我将彻底消灭。“我将毁灭”:我将使其灭亡,令其不复存在。“衰败与灭亡”:这里,“非兴盛”就是衰败,指不再增长;“灭亡”指利益与安乐被离散、摧毁,这是亲族衰败等情况的名称。“我将使其陷入”:我将使他们落到那种境地。巴利
131.Evaṃme sutanti mahāparinibbānasuttaṃ. Tatrāyamanupubbapadavaṇṇanā – gijjhakūṭeti gijjhā tassa kūṭesu vasiṃsu, gijjhasadisaṃ vā tassa kūṭaṃ atthīti gijjhakūṭo, tasmiṃ gijjhakūṭe. Abhiyātukāmoti abhibhavanatthāya yātukāmo. Vajjīti vajjirājāno. Evaṃmahiddhiketi evaṃ mahatiyā rājiddhiyā samannāgate, etena nesaṃ samaggabhāvaṃ kathesi. Evaṃmahānubhāveti evaṃ mahantena ānubhāvena samannāgate, etena nesaṃ hatthisippādīsu katasikkhataṃ kathesi, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘sikkhitā vatime licchavikumārakā, susikkhitā vatime licchavikumārakā, yatra hi nāma sukhumena tāḷacchiggalena asanaṃ atipātayissanti poṅkhānupoṅkhaṃ avirādhita’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1115). Ucchecchāmīti ucchindissāmi. Vināsessāmīti nāsessāmi, adassanaṃ pāpessāmi. Anayabyasananti ettha na ayoti anayo, avaḍḍhiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Hitañca sukhañca viyassati vikkhipatīti byasanaṃ, ñātipārijuññādīnaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ. Āpādessāmīti pāpayissāmi.
据说,他在行、住、坐等场合,谈的都是这场战争,并命令军队:“你们要做好出发的准备!”为什么呢?因为据说在恒河边有一个渡口村,半由旬的范围归阿阇世王管辖,半由旬归离车族管辖。这里指的是管辖权实际行使的地方。而且在那里,有值钱的货物从山脚下运下来。离车族的国王们听说后,正当阿阇世王还在说着“今天去、明天去”而筹划准备时,他们就团结一致、和睦相处,总是抢先赶到,把货物全部拿走。阿阇世王随后才到,知道情况后,愤怒地离开。他们年年都这样做。于是,他生起了强烈的嗔恨,当时就做了这件事。巴利
Iti kira so ṭhānanisajjādīsu imaṃ yuddhakathameva katheti, gamanasajjā hothāti evaṃ balakāyaṃ āṇāpeti. Kasmā? Gaṅgāyaṃ kira ekaṃ paṭṭanagāmaṃ nissāya aḍḍhayojanaṃ ajātasattuno āṇā, aḍḍhayojanaṃ licchavīnaṃ. Ettha pana āṇāpavattiṭṭhānaṃ hotīti attho. Tatrāpi ca pabbatapādato mahagghabhaṇḍaṃ otarati. Taṃ sutvā – ‘‘ajja yāmi, sve yāmī’’ti ajātasattuno saṃvidahantasseva licchavirājāno samaggā sammodamānā puretaraṃ gantvā sabbaṃ gaṇhanti. Ajātasattu pacchā āgantvā taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā kujjhitvā gacchati. Te punasaṃvaccharepi tatheva karonti. Atha so balavāghātajāto tadā evamakāsi.
他于是想:“带着一群人打仗,那可是件麻烦事,连一次徒劳的打击都没有。不过,要是先跟一位智者商量好了再行动,就不会出错。可智者当中,没有谁能跟导师相比,而导师就住在不远处的寺院里。这样吧,我派人去请教他。如果我派人去问,这事有好处,导师就会保持沉默;要是没好处,他就会说:‘那国王亲自跑一趟又有什么用?’”于是他就派了瓦沙卡拉婆罗门去。婆罗门到了之后,把这件事禀告了世尊。因此经文里说:“那时,国王……中略……我要让他陷入。”巴利
Tato cintesi – ‘‘gaṇena saddhiṃ yuddhaṃ nāma bhāriyaṃ, ekopi moghappahāro nāma natthi, ekena kho pana paṇḍitena saddhiṃ mantetvā karonto nipparādho hoti, paṇḍito ca satthārā sadiso natthi, satthā ca avidūre dhuravihāre vasati, handāhaṃ pesetvā pucchāmi . Sace me gatena koci attho bhavissati, satthā tuṇhī bhavissati, anatthe pana sati kiṃ rañño tattha gamanenāti vakkhatī’’ti. So vassakārabrāhmaṇaṃ pesesi. Brāhmaṇo gantvā bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho rājā…pe… āpādessāmī’’ti.
国王不退失法的注释巴利
Rājaaparihāniyadhammavaṇṇanā
134 长老站在侍者的位置上为世尊扇风,这就是“为世尊扇风”的意思。不过世尊其实没有冷或热。世尊听了那个婆罗门的话之后,没有跟他交谈,而是想跟长老商量,于是说:“阿难,你听到了什么?”等等。“经常集会”:一天集会三次也好,时不时集会也好,都叫经常集会。“勤于集会”:不会因为“昨天也集会了,前天也集会了,今天为什么又要集会”而不能坚持到底,这样才叫勤于集会。“只要”:指在那段时间里。“阿难,跋耆族只应增长,不应衰损”:因为不经常集会的人,在各方各地传来的消息听不到,因此不知道“某某村界或镇界混乱,某某地方有盗贼或已被占据”,盗贼也知道“国王们放逸”,于是攻打村庄、城镇等,破坏国土。这样国王们就衰损。而经常集会的人则能听到种种消息,于是派遣军队,打败敌人;盗贼也知道“国王们不放逸,我们无法结党横行”,于是分裂逃散。这样国王们就增长。因此说:“阿难,跋耆族只应增长,不应衰损。”其中,“可期”:应当希求,即必当如此,应作如是观。巴利
134.Bhagavantaṃ bījayamānoti thero vattasīse ṭhatvā bhagavantaṃ bījati, bhagavato pana sītaṃ vā uṇhaṃ vā natthi. Bhagavā brāhmaṇassa vacanaṃ sutvā tena saddhiṃ amantetvā therena saddhiṃ mantetukāmo kinti te, ānanda, sutantiādimāha. Abhiṇhaṃ sannipātāti divasassa tikkhattuṃ sannipatantāpi antarantarā sannipatantāpi abhiṇhaṃ sannipātāva. Sannipātabahulāti hiyyopi sannipatimhā, purimadivasampi sannipatimhā, puna ajja kimatthaṃ sannipatitā homāti vosānaṃ anāpajjantā sannipātabahulā nāma honti. Yāvakīvañcāti yattakaṃ kālaṃ. Vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānīti – abhiṇhaṃ asannipatantā hi disāvidisāsu āgataṃ sāsanaṃ na suṇanti, tato – ‘‘asukagāmasīmā vā nigamasīmā vā ākulā, asukaṭṭhāne corā vā pariyuṭṭhitā’’ti na jānanti, corāpi ‘‘pamattā rājāno’’ti ñatvā gāmanigamādīni paharantā janapadaṃ nāsenti. Evaṃ rājūnaṃ parihāni hoti. Abhiṇhaṃ sannipatantā pana taṃ taṃ pavattiṃ suṇanti, tato balaṃ pesetvā amittamaddanaṃ karonti, corāpi – ‘‘appamattā rājāno, na sakkā amhehi vaggabandhehi vicaritu’’nti bhijjitvā palāyanti. Evaṃ rājūnaṃ vuddhi hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā no parihānī’’ti. Tattha pāṭikaṅkhāti icchitabbā, avassaṃ bhavissatīti evaṃ daṭṭhabbāti attho.
在讲到“和合”等词的地方:集会的鼓声响起时,如果有人心里想“我今天还有事要办,有吉祥事要做”,因此故意制造散乱,这就不叫和合集会。反过来,一听到鼓声,即使正在吃饭、正在打扮、正在穿衣服,或者饭吃到一半、打扮到一半、衣服正穿到一半,也赶来集会,这才叫和合集会。集会之后,大家共同商量、讨论,把该办的事办完,却各自起身离开,这就不叫和合散会。因为如果这样各自离开,先走的人会想:“我们听到的只是些无关紧要的话,现在才要开始真正裁决事情呢。”但如果大家是一起起身离开的,这才叫和合散会。再者,听到“某处的村界或镇界出了乱子,有盗贼横行”之后,有人问“谁愿意去消灭这股敌人?”大家纷纷说“我先去,我先去”,然后前往,这也叫和合散会。又比如,某一位国王的事业遇到困难,其余国王派自己的儿子、兄弟去支持他的事业;或者有外来的国王到来,大家不说“去某人家住,去某人家住”,而是所有人一起接待他;或者某人有吉祥事、生病,或遇到其他类似的苦乐之事,大家都去那里帮忙,这样做就是在履行跋耆族应做的事,这也叫和合。巴利
Samaggātiādīsu sannipātabheriyā niggatāya – ‘‘ajja me kiccaṃ atthi, maṅgalaṃ atthī’’ti vikkhepaṃ karontā na samaggā sannipatanti nāma. Bherisaddaṃ pana sutvāva bhuñjantāpi alaṅkariyamānāpi vatthāni nivāsentāpi aḍḍhabhuttā vā aḍḍhālaṅkatā vā vatthaṃ nivāsayamānā vā sannipatantā samaggā sannipatanti nāma. Sannipatitā pana cintetvā mantetvā kattabbaṃ katvā ekatova avuṭṭhahantā na samaggā vuṭṭhahanti nāma. Evaṃ vuṭṭhitesu hi ye paṭhamaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ evaṃ hoti – ‘‘amhehi bāhirakathāva sutā, idāni vinicchayakathā bhavissatī’’ti. Ekato vuṭṭhahantā pana samaggā vuṭṭhahanti nāma. Apica – ‘‘asukaṭṭhānesu gāmasīmā vā nigamasīmā vā ākulā, corā pariyuṭṭhitā’’ti sutvā – ‘‘ko gantvā imaṃ amittamaddanaṃ karissatī’’ti vutte – ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ, ahaṃ paṭhama’’nti vatvā gacchantāpi samaggā vuṭṭhahanti nāma. Ekassa pana kammante osīdamāne sesā rājāno puttabhātaro pesetvā tassa kammantaṃ upatthambhayamānāpi, āgantukarājānaṃ – ‘‘asukassa gehaṃ gacchatu, asukassa gehaṃ gacchatū’’ti avatvā sabbe ekato saṅgaṇhantāpi, ekassa maṅgale vā roge vā aññasmiṃ vā pana tādise sukhadukkhe uppanne sabbe tattha sahāyabhāvaṃ gacchantāpi samaggā vajjikaraṇīyāni karonti nāma.
在“未制立”等说法中:如果有人强行征收过去没有的关税、贡税或罚金,这就叫“把未制立的制立起来”。反过来,如果连自古以来沿袭下来的税都不再征收,这就叫“断绝已制立的”。如果抓到被指认为盗贼的人,不做审查就对他施加割截、肢解等刑罚,这就叫“不奉行古旧的跋耆法”。那些把未制立的制立起来的国王,百姓会被新增的关税等压得苦不堪言,心想:“我们被逼得太惨了,谁还愿意住在他们的地盘上?”于是逃到边境,要么自己当盗贼,要么给盗贼当帮手,到处劫掠地方。那些断绝已制立的国王,因为不再收取世代沿袭的关税等,国库就会亏空。这样一来,象兵、马兵、车兵、步兵以及后宫眷属等,都得不到按惯例应得的供给,体力就会衰退。他们既不能打仗,也不能服侍国王。那些不奉行古旧跋耆法的国王,治下百姓会愤怒地想:“他们把我的儿子、父亲、兄弟明明不是盗贼却当成盗贼,砍断他们的肢体、弄残他们的身体!”于是心怀怨恨逃到边境,要么自己当盗贼,要么给盗贼当帮手,劫掠地方。这样国王们就会衰败。而对于把已制立的继续制立的国王,百姓会想:“国王们只是照着世代沿袭的规矩做。”于是欢欢喜喜地努力从事农耕、经商等事业。对于那些不断绝已制立的国王,因为照旧收取世代沿袭的关税等,国库就会充实。这样一来,象兵、马兵、车兵、步兵以及后宫眷属等,都能得到按惯例应得的供给,体力充沛,既能打仗,也能服侍国王。巴利
Apaññattantiādīsu pubbe akataṃ suṅkaṃ vā baliṃ vā daṇḍaṃ vā āharāpentā apaññattaṃ paññapenti nāma. Porāṇapaveṇiyā āgatameva pana anāharāpentā paññattaṃ samucchindanti nāma. Coroti gahetvā dassite avicinitvāva chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsentā porāṇaṃ vajjidhammaṃ samādāya na vattanti nāma. Tesaṃ apaññattaṃ paññapentānaṃ abhinavasuṅkādīhi pīḷitā manussā – ‘‘atiupaddutamha, ko imesaṃ vijite vasissatī’’ti paccantaṃ pavisitvā corā vā corasahāyā vā hutvā janapadaṃ paharanti. Paññattaṃ samucchindantānaṃ paveṇīāgatāni suṅkādīni agaṇhantānaṃ koso parihāyati. Tato hatthiassabalakāyaorodhādayo yathānibaddhaṃ vaṭṭaṃ alabhamānā thāmena balena parihāyanti. Te neva yuddhakkhamā honti, na pāricariyakkhamā. Porāṇaṃ vajjidhammaṃ samādāya avattantānaṃ vijite manussā – ‘‘amhākaṃ puttaṃ pitaraṃ bhātaraṃ acoraṃyeva coroti katvā chindiṃsu bhindiṃsū’’ti kujjhitvā paccantaṃ pavisitvā corā vā corasahāyā vā hutvā janapadaṃ paharanti, evaṃ rājūnaṃ parihāni hoti, paññattaṃ paññapentānaṃ pana ‘‘paveṇīāgatameva rājāno karontī’’ti manussā haṭṭhatuṭṭhā kasivāṇijjādike kammante sampādenti. Paññattaṃ asamucchindantānaṃ paveṇīāgatāni suṅkādīni gaṇhantānaṃ koso vaḍḍhati, tato hatthiassabalakāyaorodhādayo yathānibaddhaṃ vaṭṭaṃ labhamānā thāmabalasampannā yuddhakkhamā ceva pāricariyakkhamā ca honti.
关于“古旧的跋耆法”这一句:据说从前跋耆国的国王们,当有人被带来并被告知“这是盗贼”时,他们不会直接说“抓住这个盗贼”,而是把人交给审判大臣。审判大臣审完之后,如果那人不是盗贼,就放了他;如果确实是盗贼,他们自己也不说什么,而是交给法律专家。法律专家审完之后,如果不是盗贼,就放了他;如果是盗贼,就交给持律者们。持律者们审完之后,如果不是盗贼,就放了他;如果是盗贼,就交给八家亲族。八家亲族也同样处理之后,交给将军;将军交给副王;副王交给国王。国王审完之后,如果不是盗贼,就放了他。但如果确实是盗贼,就让人诵读传统律典。那里面写着:“某人做了某事,应受某种惩罚。”国王把那人所做的事和律典对照核实后,施加与他罪行相应的惩罚。这样一来,那些遵循并奉行这古旧跋耆法的人,民众不会抱怨,他们会想:“国王们是依照古老传统办事,这不是国王们的错,是我们自己的错。”于是他们不放逸地做自己的工作。这样,国王们就得以增长。因此说:“阿难,跋耆族只应期待增长,不会衰损。”巴利
Porāṇaṃ vajjidhammanti ettha pubbe kira vajjirājāno ‘‘ayaṃ coro’’ti ānetvā dassite ‘‘gaṇhatha naṃ cora’’nti avatvā vinicchayamahāmattānaṃ denti. Te vinicchinitvā sace acoro hoti, vissajjenti. Sace coro, attanā kiñci avatvā vohārikānaṃ denti. Tepi acoro ce, vissajjenti. Coro ce, suttadharānaṃ denti. Tepi vinicchinitvā acoro ce, vissajjenti. Coro ce, aṭṭhakulikānaṃ denti. Tepi tatheva katvā senāpatissa, senāpati uparājassa, uparājā rañño, rājā vinicchinitvā acoro ce, vissajjeti. Sace pana coro hoti, paveṇīpotthakaṃ vācāpeti. Tattha – ‘‘yena idaṃ nāma kataṃ, tassa ayaṃ nāma daṇḍo’’ti likhitaṃ. Rājā tassa kiriyaṃ tena samānetvā tadanucchavikaṃ daṇḍaṃ karoti. Iti etaṃ porāṇaṃ vajjidhammaṃ samādāya vattantānaṃ manussā na ujjhāyanti, ‘‘rājāno porāṇapaveṇiyā kammaṃ karonti, etesaṃ doso natthi, amhākaṃyeva doso’’ti appamattā kammante karonti. Evaṃ rājūnaṃ vuddhi hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānī’’ti.
“恭敬”是指:他们无论对长老做什么恭敬的事,都只做美好的。“尊重”是指:先在心里确立敬重,然后才去做。“敬奉”是指:从心里喜爱他们。“供养”是指:表现出谦卑服侍的礼节。“认为应当听”是指:一天里去侍奉两三次,认为他们的话应当听、应当信。在这里,那些不对年长国王做恭敬等事、也不为了受教诫而去侍奉他们的年少国王,就会被那些长老撇开,没人教诫,沉迷于嬉戏,从而失去王位。而那些照这样去做的人,年长的国王们就会告诉他们古老的传统:“这件事该做,这件事不该做。”即使到了战场上,也会教他们方法:“应该这样进攻,应该这样撤退。”这些人受到教诫后,按照教导去做,就能够维持国王的传统。因此说:“阿难,跋耆族只会增长,不会衰损。”巴利
Sakkarontīti yaṃkiñci tesaṃ sakkāraṃ karontā sundarameva karonti. Garuṃ karontīti garubhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvāva karonti. Mānentīti manena piyāyanti. Pūjentīti nipaccakāraṃ dassenti. Sotabbaṃ maññantīti divasassa dve tayo vāre upaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā tesaṃ kathaṃ sotabbaṃ saddhātabbaṃ maññanti. Tattha ye evaṃ mahallakānaṃ rājūnaṃ sakkārādīni na karonti, ovādatthāya ca nesaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ na gacchanti, te tehi vissaṭṭhā anovadiyamānā kīḷāpasutā rajjato parihāyanti. Ye pana tathā paṭipajjanti, tesaṃ mahallakarājāno – ‘‘idaṃ kātabbaṃ, idaṃ na kātabba’’nti porāṇaṃ paveṇiṃ ācikkhanti. Saṅgāmaṃ patvāpi – ‘‘evaṃ pavisitabbaṃ, evaṃ nikkhamitabba’’nti upāyaṃ dassenti. Te tehi ovadiyamānā yathāovādaṃ paṭipajjantā sakkonti rājappaveṇiṃ sandhāretuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vuddhiyeva, ānanda, vajjīnaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānī’’ti.
良家妇女,就是指良家门户里的女人们。良家少女,就是指她们那些还没有出嫁的女儿。关于“拖拽与制服”这个词,这里不管是“拖拽”还是“制服”,其实都是对这种强行压制行为的称呼。也有人读作“ukkassā”。其中,“拖拽”的意思是拖拉、硬拽过来;“制服”的意思是压倒、强行制伏,这就是这个词的含义。因为对那些这样做的国王,其治下的百姓会愤怒地想:“我们家里的妻子儿女,还有那些我们替她擦去口水鼻涕、辛辛苦苦拉扯大的女儿,这些国王竟然用暴力把她们抢走,关在自己家里。”人们心生愤怒,便跑到边境地区,要么自己成了盗贼,要么与盗贼合伙,去劫掠地方。而那些不这样做的国王,其治下的百姓便无忧无虑,各自忙自己的生计,国王的财库反而越来越充实。因此,在这里应当知道兴衰损益的道理。巴利
Kulitthiyoti kulagharaṇiyo. Kulakumāriyoti anividdhā tāsaṃ dhītaro. Okkassa pasayhāti ettha ‘‘okkassā’’ti vā ‘‘pasayhā’’ti vā pasayhākārassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. ‘‘Ukkassā’’tipi paṭhanti. Tattha okkassāti avakassitvā ākaḍḍhitvā. Pasayhāti abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvāti ayaṃ vacanattho. Evañhi karontānaṃ vijite manussā – ‘‘amhākaṃ gehe puttamātaropi, kheḷasiṅghāṇikādīni mukhena apanetvā saṃvaḍḍhitadhītaropi ime rājāno balakkārena gahetvā attano ghare vāsentī’’ti kupitā paccantaṃ pavisitvā corā vā corasahāyā vā hutvā janapadaṃ paharanti. Evaṃ akarontānaṃ pana vijite manussā appossukkā sakāni kammāni karontā rājakosaṃ vaḍḍhenti. Evamettha vuddhihāniyo veditabbā.
跋耆人的跋耆塔庙,是指跋耆诸王在跋耆国中因受到恭敬而被称为塔庙的那些夜叉住所。内部的,指位于城内的;外部的,指位于城外的。先前所施的,指过去已经布施的;先前所作的,指过去已经做过的。不会令其废退,意思是不会让供养废退,而是让它照常继续下去。因为对于让如法供养废退的人,天神不会好好给予守护;天神虽然无法让尚未生起的苦生起,却会让已经生起的咳嗽、头痛等疾病加重;到了打仗的时候,也不会成为他们的盟友。而对于不让供养废退的人,天神会好好给予守护;虽然无法让尚未生起的乐产生,却能消除已经生起的咳嗽、头痛等疾病;在战场上会成为他们的盟友。应当如此理解这里面的兴衰得失。巴利
Vajjīnaṃ vajjicetiyānīti vajjirājūnaṃ vajjiraṭṭhe cittīkataṭṭhena cetiyānīti laddhanāmāni yakkhaṭṭhānāni. Abbhantarānīti antonagare ṭhitāni. Bāhirānīti bahinagare ṭhitāni . Dinnapubbanti pubbe dinnaṃ. Katapubbanti pubbe kataṃ. No parihāpessantīti aparihāpetvā yathāpavattameva karissanti dhammikaṃ baliṃ parihāpentānañhi devatā ārakkhaṃ susaṃvihitaṃ na karonti, anuppannaṃ dukkhaṃ janetuṃ asakkontāpi uppannaṃ kāsasīsarogādiṃ vaḍḍhenti, saṅgāme patte sahāyā na honti. Aparihāpentānaṃ pana ārakkhaṃ susaṃvihitaṃ karonti, anuppannaṃ sukhaṃ uppādetuṃ asakkontāpi uppannaṃ kāsasīsarogādiṃ hananti, saṅgāmasīse sahāyā hontīti evamettha vuddhihāniyo veditabbā.
“如法的守护、屏障、保护”中,守护本身就是指:以屏障的方式挡住不想要的东西,不让它靠近;以保护的方式守护想要的东西,不让它毁坏。在这里,出家人用军队围绕来守护,并不叫如法的守护、屏障、保护。但如果他们这样做:不砍伐寺院林园里的树木,不杀害鸟兽,不在池塘里捕鱼,这样做才叫如法的守护、屏障、保护。接着“乃至未来者如何?”这一句,是在问他们当下心念的运作状态,也就是问他们心的相续是怎样的。巴利
Dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇaguttīti ettha rakkhā eva yathā anicchitaṃ na gacchati, evaṃ āvaraṇato āvaraṇaṃ. Yathā icchitaṃ na vinassati, evaṃ gopāyanato gutti. Tattha balakāyena parivāretvā rakkhaṇaṃ pabbajitānaṃ dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇagutti nāma na hoti. Yathā pana vihārassa upavane rukkhe na chindanti, vājikā vajjhaṃ na karonti, pokkharaṇīsu macche na gaṇhanti, evaṃ karaṇaṃ dhammikā rakkhāvaraṇagutti nāma. Kinti anāgatā cāti iminā pana nesaṃ evaṃ paccupaṭṭhitacittasantānoti cittappavattiṃ pucchati.
在这里,那些不希望未来阿拉汉到来的人,就是没有信心、没有净信的人。出家人来了,他们不去迎接,不去探望,不做亲切接待,不请教问题,不听法,不布施,不听随喜,也不安排住处。于是他们的坏名声就传开了:“某某国王没有信心、没有净信,出家人来了,他不去迎接……乃至……不安排住处。”出家人听到这些,就不从他城门口经过,即使经过也不进他的城。这样一来,未来的阿拉汉就不会来。已经来了的人,如果住得不安适,即使有些人事先不知道情况而来了,也会想:“我们本来是打算住下来才来的,可是这些国王这样做,谁还住得下去?”于是就出城离开了。像这样,未来的不来,来了的又住得痛苦,那个地方就成了出家人无法安住的地方。因此,诸天神就不守护;诸天神不守护,非人就得便。非人多了,就会让还没生的病生起来,以拜见持戒者、问法等为因的福德也就不会到来。反过来,与上面所说的黑分相反的白分善行,则会自然出现。应当这样理解此处的兴衰。巴利
Tattha ye anāgatānaṃ arahantānaṃ āgamanaṃ na icchanti, te assaddhā honti appasannā. Pabbajite ca sampatte paccuggamanaṃ na karonti, gantvā na passanti, paṭisanthāraṃ na karonti, pañhaṃ na pucchanti, dhammaṃ na suṇanti, dānaṃ na denti, anumodanaṃ na suṇanti, nivāsanaṭṭhānaṃ na saṃvidahanti. Atha nesaṃ avaṇṇo abbhuggacchati – ‘‘asuko nāma rājā assaddho appasanno, pabbajite sampatte paccuggamanaṃ na karoti…pe… nivāsanaṭṭhānaṃ na saṃvidahatī’’ti. Taṃ sutvā pabbajitā tassa nagaradvārena na gacchanti, gacchantāpi nagaraṃ na pavisanti. Evaṃ anāgatānaṃ arahantānaṃ anāgamanameva hoti. Āgatānampi phāsuvihāre asati yepi ajānitvā āgatā, te – ‘‘vasissāmāti tāva cintetvā āgatamhā, imesaṃ pana rājūnaṃ iminā nīhārena ko vasissatī’’ti nikkhamitvā gacchanti. Evaṃ anāgatesu anāgacchantesu, āgatesu dukkhaṃ viharantesu so deso pabbajitānaṃ anāvāso hoti. Tato devatārakkhā na hoti, devatārakkhāya asati amanussā okāsaṃ labhanti. Amanussā ussannā anuppannaṃ byādhiṃ uppādenti, sīlavantānaṃ dassanapañhāpucchanādivatthukassa puññassa anāgamo hoti. Vipariyāyena pana yathāvuttakaṇhapakkhaviparītassa sukkapakkhassa sambhavo hotīti evamettha vuddhihāniyo veditabbā.
135 135.“一时”这一句,是世尊为了说明过去曾为跋耆人开示这个跋耆七法而说的。其中,“萨兰达达塔庙”,指的是同名的那座精舍。据说在佛陀还没出世的时候,那里是名叫萨兰达达的夜叉居住的地方,是一座塔庙。后来人们在那里为世尊建了精舍,因为建在萨兰达达塔庙的地址上,所以就一直被称为“萨兰达达塔庙”。巴利
135.Ekamidāhanti idaṃ bhagavā pubbe vajjīnaṃ imassa vajjisattakassa desitabhāvappakāsanatthamāha . Tattha sārandade cetiyeti evaṃnāmake vihāre. Anuppanne kira buddhe tattha sārandadassa yakkhassa nivāsanaṭṭhānaṃ cetiyaṃ ahosi. Athettha bhagavato vihāraṃ kārāpesuṃ, so sārandade cetiye katattā sārandadacetiyantveva saṅkhyaṃ gato.
不可夺取,意思是不能拿取、不能占有。“所谓”只是个虚词。“关于战斗”是表示方式的属格,意思是无法通过正面交战来拿下他们。“除了诱骗”就是除了用诱骗的办法。所谓诱骗,就是送去象、马、车乘、金银等财物,说“别再争了,我们现在和好吧”,用这种方式来笼络对方。这样笼络之后,单凭信任就能把他们拿下——这就是这句话的意思。“除了离间”就是除了分化他们。这句说明,让他们彼此分裂,也能把他们拿下。这位婆罗门听了世尊这番话,从中得到了启发,才说出这些话。巴利
Akaraṇīyāti akātabbā, aggahetabbāti attho. Yadidanti nipātamattaṃ. Yuddhassāti karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, abhimukhayuddhena gahetuṃ na sakkāti attho. Aññatra upalāpanāyāti ṭhapetvā upalāpanaṃ. Upalāpanā nāma – ‘‘alaṃ vivādena, idāni samaggā homā’’ti hatthiassarathahiraññasuvaṇṇādīni pesetvā saṅgahakaraṇaṃ. Evañhi saṅgahaṃ katvā kevalaṃ vissāsena sakkā gaṇhitunti attho. Aññatra mithubhedāyāti ṭhapetvā mithubhedaṃ. Iminā aññamaññabhedaṃ katvāpi sakkā ete gahetunti dasseti. Idaṃ brāhmaṇo bhagavato kathāya nayaṃ labhitvā āha.
世尊难道不知道这个婆罗门能从这番话里得到启发吗?不,他知道。既然知道,为什么还要说呢?是出于怜悯。据说他当时这样想:就算我不说,他过几天也会去把那些人全部拿下;可一旦我说了,他就得先分裂他们的团结,这样要花三年才能拿下。能多活这么一段时间,本身就已经很好了,因为在这段时间里活着,他们还能为自己修积功德,作为将来的依靠。巴利
Kiṃ pana bhagavā brāhmaṇassa imāya kathāya nayalābhaṃ na jānātīti? Āma, jānāti. Jānanto kasmā kathesīti? Anukampāya. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘mayā akathitepi katipāhena gantvā sabbe gaṇhissati, kathite pana samagge bhindanto tīhi saṃvaccharehi gaṇhissati, ettakampi jīvitameva varaṃ, ettakañhi jīvantā attano patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ puññaṃ karissantī’’ti.
他心中欢喜,口中随喜地说:“乔达摩尊者说得真是好啊!”这样用言语随喜之后,就离开了,去到国王那里。国王问他:“老师,世尊说了什么?”他回答说:“贤者,沙门乔达摩的话,谁也没法用任何手段拿下跋耆族,但可以用拉拢或离间的手段拿下。”国王又问:“如果用拉拢,我们的象、马等会损失掉;我就用离间来拿下他们。我该怎么做?”他说:“那么,大王,你们先在朝堂上挑起关于跋耆族的话题。然后我就说:‘大王,您管他们做什么?让这些国王靠自己的耕种、经商等过日子就好了。’说完我就离开。然后你们就说:‘咦,这位婆罗门怎么回事?为什么阻止讨论跋耆族的话题?’白天我会给他们送礼,等他们收下后,你们也把过错推到我身上,不用绑我、打我,只要把我剃成光头赶出城就行。那时我就会说:‘那座城的城墙和城壕是我主持修建的,薄弱的地方和浅深的地方我都知道,用不了多久,我就能把它摆平。’你们听了,就说:‘那你就去吧!’”国王就照他说的全做了。巴利
Abhinanditvāti cittena abhinanditvā. Anumoditvāti ‘‘yāva subhāsitañcidaṃ bhotā gotamenā’’ti vācāya anumoditvā. Pakkāmīti rañño santikaṃ gato. Tato naṃ rājā – ‘‘kiṃ ācariya, bhagavā avacā’’ti pucchi. So – ‘‘yathā bho samaṇassa gotamassa vacanaṃ na sakkā vajjī kenaci gahetuṃ, api ca upalāpanāya vā mithubhedena vā sakkā’’ti āha. Tato naṃ rājā – ‘‘upalāpanāya amhākaṃ hatthiassādayo nassissanti, bhedeneva te gahessāmi, kiṃ karomā’’ti pucchi. Tena hi, mahārāja, tumhe vajjiṃ ārabbha parisati kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpetha. Tato ahaṃ – ‘‘kiṃ te mahārāja tehi, attano santakehi kasivāṇijjādīni katvā jīvantu ete rājāno’’ti vatvā pakkamissāmi. Tato tumhe – ‘‘kinnu kho bho esa brāhmaṇo vajjiṃ ārabbha pavattaṃ kathaṃ paṭibāhatī’’ti vadeyyātha, divasabhāge cāhaṃ tesaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ pesessāmi, tampi gāhāpetvā tumhepi mama dosaṃ āropetvā bandhanatālanādīni akatvāva kevalaṃ khuramuṇḍaṃ maṃ katvā nagarā nīharāpetha. Athāhaṃ – ‘‘mayā te nagare pākāro parikhā ca kāritā, ahaṃ kira dubbalaṭṭhānañca uttānagambhīraṭṭhānañca jānāmi, na cirasseva dāni ujuṃ karissāmī’’ti vakkhāmi. Taṃ sutvā tumhe – ‘‘gacchatū’’ti vadeyyāthāti. Rājā sabbaṃ akāsi.
离车族人听说他出城了,就说:“那个婆罗门很狡猾,别让他渡过恒河。”这时有人提到:“听说是因为议论了我们,他才被弄成那样。”于是大家说:“既然这样,喂,那就让他来吧。”他去了以后,离车族人见到他就问:“你来干什么?”他把事情经过告诉了他们。离车族人说:“就为这么点小事,实在不该罚得这么重。”接着又问:“你在那边担任什么职位?”他说:“我是审判官。”离车族人说:“那你就继续担任这个职位吧。”从此他审理案件更加公正妥善,王族子弟们也都到他那里学习技艺。巴利
Licchavī tassa nikkhamanaṃ sutvā – ‘‘saṭho brāhmaṇo, mā tassa gaṅgaṃ uttarituṃ adatthā’’ti āhaṃsu. Tatra ekaccehi – ‘‘amhe ārabbha kathitattā kira so evaṃ kato’’ti vutte ‘‘tena hi, bhaṇe, etū’’ti bhaṇiṃsu. So gantvā licchavī disvā ‘‘kiṃ āgatatthā’’ti pucchito taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi, licchavino – ‘‘appamattakena nāma evaṃ garuṃ daṇḍaṃ kātuṃ na yutta’’nti vatvā – ‘‘kiṃ te tatra ṭhānantara’’nti pucchiṃsu. ‘‘Vinicchayāmaccohamasmī’’ti. Tadeva te ṭhānantaraṃ hotūti. So suṭṭhutaraṃ vinicchayaṃ karoti, rājakumārā tassa santike sippaṃ uggaṇhanti.
他站稳了脚跟、有了声望之后,有一天,把一个离车族人拉到一边,问:“孩子们在耕地吗?”那人说:“是的,在耕地。”又问:“是套了两头牛吗?”那人说:“是的,套了两头牛。”说完这些他就转身走了。后来另一个人问那人:“老师说了什么?”那人照实说了,可问的人不相信,心想:“他不会跟我说实话。”于是就跟那人闹翻了。婆罗门第二天又把另一个离车族人带到一边,问:“你用什么菜下饭?”问完就走。又有人去问那人,同样不信,也照样闹翻了。婆罗门再过一天又把一个离车族人带到一边,问:“听说你穷得不得了?”那人问:“这是谁说的?”他答:“某某离车族人。”他又把另一个人带到一边,问:“听说你天生胆小?”那人问:“谁说的?”
答:“某某离车族人。”就这样,他把别人根本没说过的话传到另一个人耳朵里,三年之内让那些王族互相闹翻,弄得两个人连同一条路都不肯一起走。事情办成之后,他让人敲响集合鼓。离车族人虽然喊着“领主们来集合,勇士们来集合”,却没有人来集合。巴利
So patiṭṭhitaguṇo hutvā ekadivasaṃ ekaṃ licchaviṃ gahetvā ekamantaṃ gantvā – dārakā kasantīti pucchi. Āma, kasanti. Dve goṇe yojetvāti? Āma, dve goṇe yojetvāti. Ettakaṃ vatvā nivatto. Tato taṃ añño – ‘‘kiṃ ācariyo āhā’’ti pucchitvā tena vuttaṃ asaddahanto ‘‘na me esa yathābhūtaṃ kathetī’’ti tena saddhiṃ bhijji. Brāhmaṇo aññasmiṃ divase ekaṃ licchaviṃ ekamantaṃ netvā – ‘‘kena byañjanena bhuttosī’’ti pucchitvā nivatto. Tampi añño pucchitvā asaddahanto tatheva bhijji. Brāhmaṇo aparampi divasaṃ ekaṃ licchaviṃ ekamantaṃ netvā – ‘‘atiduggatosi kirā’’ti pucchi. Ko evamāhāti pucchito asuko nāma licchavīti. Aparampi ekamantaṃ netvā – ‘‘tvaṃ kira bhīrukajātiko’’ti pucchi. Ko evamāhāti? Asuko nāma licchavīti. Evaṃ aññena akathitameva aññassa kathento tīhi saṃvaccharehi te rājāno aññamaññaṃ bhinditvā yathā dve ekamaggena na gacchanti, tathā katvā sannipātabheriṃ carāpesi. Licchavino – ‘‘issarā sannipatantu, sūrā sannipatantū’’ti vatvā na sannipatiṃsu.
婆罗门说:“现在正是时候,赶快来!”于是派人送信给国王。国王一听,立刻下令敲响战鼓,率军出发。毗舍离人听说后,也击鼓传令:“我们绝不让国王渡过恒河。”毗舍离人听到那鼓声后,虽然说了“让那些英勇的国王们去吧”之类的话,却没有人来集合。毗舍离人又击鼓宣告:“我们不会让他们进城,会关上城门坚守。”结果还是连一个人都没来集合。国王就从依然敞开的城门进去,把所有人害得家破人亡之后,才离开。巴利
Brāhmaṇo – ‘‘ayaṃ dāni kālo, sīghaṃ āgacchatū’’ti rañño sāsanaṃ pesesi. Rājā sutvāva balabheriṃ carāpetvā nikkhami. Vesālikā sutvā – ‘‘rañño gaṅgaṃ uttarituṃ na dassāmā’’ti bheriṃ carāpesuṃ. Tampi sutvā – ‘‘gacchantu sūrarājāno’’tiādīni vatvā na sannipatiṃsu. ‘‘Nagarappavesanaṃ na dassāma, dvārāni pidahitvā ṭhassāmā’’ti bheriṃ carāpesuṃ. Ekopi na sannipati. Yathāvivaṭeheva dvārehi pavisitvā sabbe anayabyasanaṃ pāpetvā gato.
比丘不退法注释巴利
Bhikkhuaparihāniyadhammavaṇṇanā
136 那时,世尊刚离开不久。说到“集会”,意思是:派遣有神通的人到远处的寺院去,自己又亲自到近处的寺院,说:“诸位尊者,请集合吧,世尊希望你们集会。”这样把大众召集起来。“不退”是指能使人不退转,也就是成为增长的原因。“我将说法”是指:就像同时升起一千个月亮、一千个太阳,又像在四角屋里点亮一千盏油灯那样,把法讲得清清楚楚、明明白白,即将开示。巴利
136.Athakho bhagavā acirapakkantetiādimhi sannipātetvāti dūravihāresu iddhimante pesetvā santikavihāresu sayaṃ gantvā – ‘‘sannipatatha, āyasmanto; bhagavā vo sannipātaṃ icchatī’’ti sannipātetvā. Aparihāniyeti aparihānikare, vuddhihetubhūteti attho. Dhamme desessāmīti candasahassaṃ sūriyasahassaṃ uṭṭhapento viya catukuṭṭake gehe anto teladīpasahassaṃ ujjālento viya pākaṭe katvā kathayissāmīti.
在这里,“经常集会”这一条和前面讲跋耆族时所说的是一样的。如果不经常集会,就听不到从各方传来的消息。因此,他们不知道“某处寺院的界场已经混乱,伍波萨他和自恣已经停滞,某处有比丘在做医生、当信使等事,他们靠种种暗示、花供之类的手段来谋生”等等情况。恶比丘也会知道“僧团放逸了”,于是结成团伙,让教法衰败。反过来,经常集会的人能听到各种消息,于是派遣僧团去把界场整顿好,让伍波萨他和自恣等活动正常进行;在邪命盛行的地方,就派持守圣种的人去讲说圣种;对恶比丘,则让持律者去处罚他们。恶比丘也会想:“僧团不放逸,我们没法结党横行。”于是分裂逃散。应当这样理解这里的衰败与增长。巴利
Tattha abhiṇhaṃ sannipātāti idaṃ vajjisattake vuttasadisameva. Idhāpi ca abhiṇhaṃ asannipatitā disāsu āgatasāsanaṃ na suṇanti. Tato – ‘‘asukavihārasīmā ākulā, uposathapavāraṇā ṭhitā, asukasmiṃ ṭhāne bhikkhū vejjakammadūtakammādīni karonti, viññattibahulā pupphadānādīhi jīvikaṃ kappentī’’tiādīni na jānanti, pāpabhikkhūpi ‘‘pamatto bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti ñatvā rāsibhūtā sāsanaṃ osakkāpenti. Abhiṇhaṃ sannipatitā pana taṃ taṃ pavattiṃ suṇanti, tato bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pesetvā sīmaṃ ujuṃ karonti, uposathapavāraṇādayo pavattāpenti, micchājīvānaṃ ussannaṭṭhāne ariyavaṃsake pesetvā ariyavaṃsaṃ kathāpenti, pāpabhikkhūnaṃ vinayadharehi niggahaṃ kārāpenti, pāpabhikkhūpi ‘‘appamatto bhikkhusaṅgho, na sakkā amhehi vaggabandhena vicaritu’’nti bhijjitvā palāyanti. Evamettha hānivuddhiyo veditabbā.
关于“和合”等说法:为了照料塔庙,或者为了覆盖菩提树屋和伍波萨他堂的屋顶,或者为了制定规约,或者为了给予教诫,想要说“僧团应当集会”,于是敲鼓或敲钟;但这时候如果有人找借口说“我要做衣服”“我的钵要修理”“我有新建工程要做”,因此分心走开,这就不叫“和合集会”。相反,把所有这些事情都放下,大家一齐立刻赶来集会,这才叫“和合集会”。集会之后,大家商议、讨论,把事情办完,如果零零散散地各自起身离开,这就不叫“和合起座”。因为如果零零散散地起座,那些先走的人会想:“我们刚才听到的只是些闲杂外缘的话,现在肯定要开始裁决之说了。”如果大家一齐起身离开,这才叫“和合起座”。另外,如果听说“某处寺院的僧界混乱,伍波萨他和自恣已被搁置,某处有从事医生工作之类的恶比丘得势”,当有人问“谁去呵责他们?”时,大家争着说“我先去,我先去”,这样的前去也叫“和合起座”。巴利
Samaggātiādīsu cetiyapaṭijagganatthaṃ vā bodhigehauposathāgāracchādanatthaṃ vā katikavattaṃ vā ṭhapetukāmatāya ovādaṃ vā dātukāmatāya – ‘‘saṅgho sannipatatū’’ti bheriyā vā ghaṇṭiyā vā ākoṭitāya – ‘‘mayhaṃ cīvarakammaṃ atthi, mayhaṃ patto pacitabbo, mayhaṃ navakammaṃ atthī’’ti vikkhepaṃ karontā na samaggā sannipatanti nāma. Sabbaṃ pana taṃ kammaṃ ṭhapetvā – ‘‘ahaṃ purimataraṃ, ahaṃ purimatara’’nti ekappahāreneva sannipatantā samaggā sannipatanti nāma. Sannipatitā pana cintetvā mantetvā kattabbaṃ katvā ekato avuṭṭhahantā samaggā na vuṭṭhahanti nāma. Evaṃ vuṭṭhitesu hi ye paṭhamaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ evaṃ hoti – ‘‘amhehi bāhirakathāva sutā, idāni vinicchayakathā bhavissatī’’ti. Ekappahāreneva vuṭṭhahantā pana samaggā vuṭṭhahanti nāma. Apica ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne vihārasīmā ākulā, uposathapavāraṇā ṭhitā, asukaṭṭhāne vejjakammādikārakā pāpabhikkhū ussannā’’ti sutvā – ‘‘ko gantvā tesaṃ niggahaṃ karissatī’’ti vutte – ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ, ahaṃ paṭhama’’nti vatvā gacchantāpi samaggā vuṭṭhahanti nāma.
见到客比丘时,不说“你去这个房间,你去那个房间,这位是谁”,而是所有人都履行自己的义务。见到钵衣破旧的人,就按照乞食的规矩帮他寻找钵和衣;为生病的人寻找治病所需的药;即使只是一个无人照顾的病人,也不说“你去某个房间,你去某个房间”,而是各自在自己的房间里照顾他。如果有一部经籍让人难以理解,就请一位有智慧的比丘来,让他把这部经的疑难解决。像这样,大家和合一致地做僧团应当做的事,这就叫作和合僧伽作所应作。巴利
Āgantukaṃ pana disvā – ‘‘imaṃ pariveṇaṃ yāhi, etaṃ pariveṇaṃ yāhi, ayaṃ ko’’ti avatvā sabbe vattaṃ karontāpi, jiṇṇapattacīvarakaṃ disvā tassa bhikkhācāravattena pattacīvaraṃ pariyesamānāpi, gilānassa gilānabhesajjaṃ pariyesamānāpi, gilānameva anāthaṃ – ‘‘asukapariveṇaṃ yāhi, asukapariveṇaṃ yāhī’’ti avatvā attano attano pariveṇe paṭijaggantāpi, eko oliyamānako gantho hoti, paññavantaṃ bhikkhuṃ saṅgaṇhitvā tena taṃ ganthaṃ ukkhipāpentāpi samaggā saṅghaṃ karaṇīyāni karonti nāma.
在“未制立”等说法中,如果有人制定新的、不合法的公约或学处,这就叫“制立未制立”。就像在舍卫城,比丘们因为古旧卧具那件事所做的那样。如果有人宣扬非法、非律的教说,这就叫“废除已制立”。就像世尊般涅槃一百年后,毗舍离的瓦吉之子比丘们所做的那样。如果有人故意违犯那些微细的罪,对已制定的学处不受持而行,这就叫“不遵守已制之学处”。就像阿萨吉与富那婆娑比丘那样。反过来,如果不制定新的公约或学处,依法依律宣扬教说,不废除那些微细学处,这就叫“不制立未制立”“不废除已制立”“对已制之学处受持而行”。就像具寿伍巴塞那那样,也像具寿耶舍·迦拘陀子那样。巴利
Apaññattantiādīsu navaṃ adhammikaṃ katikavattaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ vā bandhantā apaññattaṃ paññapenti nāma, purāṇasanthatavatthusmiṃ sāvatthiyaṃ bhikkhū viya. Uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ sāsanaṃ dīpentā paññattaṃ samucchindanti nāma, vassasataparinibbute bhagavati vesālikā vajjiputtakā viya. Khuddānukhuddakā pana āpattiyo sañcicca vītikkamantā yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya na vattanti nāma, assajipunabbasukā viya. Navaṃ pana katikavattaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ vā abandhantā, dhammavinayato sāsanaṃ dīpentā, khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni asamūhanantā apaññattaṃ na paññapenti, paññattaṃ na samucchindanti, yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya vattanti nāma, āyasmā upaseno viya, āyasmā yaso kākaṇḍakaputto viya ca.
贤友们,请僧团听我说。我们有些学处已经传到了在家人那里,在家人也知道:这些对你们沙门释迦子是允许的,这些是不允许的。如果我们废除那些微细的学处,就会有人出来说:沙门乔达摩为弟子们制定的学处,像烟一样转瞬就散了。只要他们的导师还在,他们就学这些学处;导师一入涅槃,他们就不学了。如果僧团觉得合适,僧团就不应该制定未曾制定的,不应该废除已经制定的,应该按照已经制定的学处去受持遵行。巴利
‘‘Suṇātu, me āvuso saṅgho, santamhākaṃ sikkhāpadāni gihigatāni, gihinopi jānanti, ‘idaṃ vo samaṇānaṃ sakyaputtiyānaṃ kappati, idaṃ vo na kappatī’ti. Sace hi mayaṃ khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni samūhanissāma, bhavissanti vattāro – ‘dhūmakālikaṃ samaṇena gotamena sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, yāvimesaṃ satthā aṭṭhāsi, tāvime sikkhāpadesu sikkhiṃsu. Yato imesaṃ satthā parinibbuto, na dānime sikkhāpadesu sikkhantī’ti. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho apaññattaṃ na paññapeyya, paññattaṃ na samucchindeyya, yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya vatteyyā’’ti (cuḷava. 442) –
如同具寿大迦叶把这条法脉安立下来。所谓“只有增长”,就是指在戒等功德上只有增长,没有退减。巴利
Imaṃ tantiṃ ṭhapayanto āyasmā mahākassapo viya ca. Vuddhiyevāti sīlādīhi guṇehi vuḍḍhiyeva, no parihāni.
“长老”是指已经达到稳固境界、具备长老资格功德的人。“知多夜者”是指知道很多个夜晚的人。“久出家者”是指出家已经很久的人。“僧团之父”是指站在僧团父亲位置上的人。因为站在父亲的位置上,所以能引导僧团,作为前导,让僧团在三学中持续修行,因此称为“僧团导御者”。巴利
Therāti thirabhāvappattā therakārakehi guṇehi samannāgatā. Bahū rattiyo jānantīti rattaññū. Ciraṃ pabbajitānaṃ etesanti cirapabbajitā. Saṅghassa pituṭṭhāne ṭhitāti saṅghapitaro. Pituṭṭhāne ṭhitattā saṅghaṃ parinenti pubbaṅgamā hutvā tīsu sikkhāsu pavattentīti saṅghapariṇāyakā.
如果有人不对他们做恭敬等事,也不为了求教诫而两三次前去亲近,他们也不给这些人教诫,不说传统的训导,不教导核心的法门。这些人因为被他们舍弃,就从戒等法蕴和七圣财等功德上退失。反过来,如果有人对他们做恭敬等事,前去亲近,他们就给这些人教诫,说传统的训导:“你应该这样向前走,应该这样退回,应该这样向前看,应该这样向旁看,应该这样弯曲,应该这样伸展,应该这样持桑喀帝、钵和衣。”他们教导核心的法门,用十三头陀支和十种论题来教导。这些人安住在教诫中,在戒等功德上不断增长,最终达到沙门的目标。在这里,应当知道退失和增长的情形。巴利
Ye tesaṃ sakkārādīni na karonti, ovādatthāya dve tayo vāre upaṭṭhānaṃ na gacchanti, tepi tesaṃ ovādaṃ na denti, paveṇīkathaṃ na kathenti, sārabhūtaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ na sikkhāpenti. Te tehi vissaṭṭhā sīlādīhi dhammakkhandhehi sattahi ca ariyadhanehīti evamādīhi guṇehi parihāyanti. Ye pana tesaṃ sakkārādīni karonti, upaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanti, tepi tesaṃ ovādaṃ denti. ‘‘Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te ālokitabbaṃ, evaṃ te vilokitabbaṃ, evaṃ te samiñjitabbaṃ, evaṃ te pasāritabbaṃ, evaṃ te saṅghāṭipattacīvaraṃ dhāretabba’’nti paveṇīkathaṃ kathenti, sārabhūtaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ sikkhāpenti, terasahi dhutaṅgehi dasahi kathāvatthūhi anusāsanti. Te tesaṃ ovāde ṭhatvā sīlādīhi guṇehi vaḍḍhamānā sāmaññatthaṃ anupāpuṇanti. Evamettha hānivuddhiyo veditabbā.
能带来来生的,就是再有;再有是它的性质,所以叫导致再有,意思是它能带来来生,因此说它属于导致再有。关于不随它摆布:在这里,有些人为了四种生活必需品的缘故,跟在施主后面,一个村子到一个村子地游走,这些人就叫做随渴爱摆布;其他人则叫做不随它摆布。在这里,退减和增长是清楚可见的。巴利
Punabbhavadānaṃ punabbhavo, punabbhavo sīlamassāti ponobbhavikā, punabbhavadāyikāti attho, tasmā ponobbhavikāya. Na vasaṃ gacchantīti ettha ye catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ kāraṇā upaṭṭhākānaṃ padānupadikā hutvā gāmato gāmaṃ vicaranti, te tassā taṇhāya vasaṃ gacchanti nāma, itare na gacchanti nāma. Tattha hānivuddhiyo pākaṭāyeva.
“在森林住处”是指距离村庄五百弓之外的地方。“有所期望”是指还有渴爱、还有依恋。因为在靠近村庄的住处,即使入了禅那,才刚出定就会听到女人、男人、女孩等的声音,因此已经证得的殊胜也会退失。而在森林里,刚睡醒就听到狮子、老虎、孔雀等的声音,因此获得林居的喜悦,就随这所缘继续观照,便能安立于最高的果位。所以,世尊反而称赞在森林中睡眠的人,胜过那位在村庄边住处入禅而坐的比丘。正是基于这个用意,世尊才说:“在森林住处,他们将有所期望。”巴利
Āraññakesūti pañcadhanusatikapacchimesu. Sāpekkhāti sataṇhā sālayā. Gāmantasenāsanesu hi jhānaṃ appetvāpi tato vuṭṭhitamattova itthipurisadārikādisaddaṃ suṇāti, yenassa adhigatavisesopi hāyatiyeva. Araññe pana niddāyitvā paṭibuddhamatto sīhabyagghamorādīnaṃ saddaṃ suṇāti, yena āraññakaṃ pītiṃ labhitvā tameva sammasanto aggaphale patiṭṭhāti. Iti bhagavā gāmantasenāsane jhānaṃ appetvā nisinnabhikkhuno araññe niddāyantameva pasaṃsati. Tasmā tameva atthavasaṃ paṭicca – ‘‘āraññakesu senāsanesu sāpekkhā bhavissantī’’ti āha.
他们想的是“我们要自己把正念建立起来”,也就是靠自己把正念安立在自己内心之中。所谓“亲善者”,就是性情可亲、令人喜爱的人。在这里,那些不希望同梵行者前来的常住比丘,也是无信的、没有净信的。他们对已经到来的比丘,不做出迎、接取衣钵、铺设座位、递扇子等事;于是他们的坏名声就传开了:“住在某某精舍的比丘无信、没有净信,对进入精舍的比丘不尽应尽的义务和礼数。”出家人听到这些话之后,即使从精舍门口经过也不进去。这样一来,还没来的人就不会来了。至于已经来的人,因为得不到安适的居住条件,就连那些事先不知情而来的人也会想:“我们本来是打算住下来才来的,可是这些常住比丘是这种态度,谁还愿意住下去?”于是便离开。这样一来,那座精舍对别的比丘来说就成了没法住的地方。接着,常住比丘们见不到持戒的人,也就得不到除疑、威仪教导或听闻甘美佛法的机会;他们既不能领受未曾学过的法,也不能对已学过的法加以温习。因此,他们只有退失,没有增长。巴利
Paccattaññeva satiṃ upaṭṭhapessantīti attanāva attano abbhantare satiṃ upaṭṭhapessanti. Pesalāti piyasīlā. Idhāpi sabrahmacārīnaṃ āgamanaṃ anicchantā nevāsikā assaddhā honti appasannā . Sampattabhikkhūnaṃ paccuggamanapattacīvarappaṭiggahaṇaāsanapaññāpanatālavaṇṭaggahaṇādīni na karonti, atha nesaṃ avaṇṇo uggacchati – ‘‘asukavihāravāsino bhikkhū assaddhā appasannā vihāraṃ paviṭṭhānaṃ vattapaṭivattaṃ na karontī’’ti. Taṃ sutvā pabbajitā vihāradvārena gacchantāpi vihāraṃ na pavisanti. Evaṃ anāgatānaṃ anāgamanameva hoti. Āgatānaṃ pana phāsuvihāre asati yepi ajānitvā āgatā, te – ‘‘vasissāmāti tāva cintetvā āgatāmha, imesaṃ pana nevāsikānaṃ iminā nīhārena ko vasissatī’’ti nikkhamitvā gacchanti. Evaṃ so vihāro aññesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anāvāsova hoti. Tato nevāsikā sīlavantānaṃ dassanaṃ alabhantā kaṅkhāvinodanaṃ vā ācārasikkhāpakaṃ vā madhuradhammassavanaṃ vā na labhanti, tesaṃ neva aggahitadhammaggahaṇaṃ, na gahitasajjhāyakaraṇaṃ hoti. Iti nesaṃ hāniyeva hoti, na vuddhi.
有些比丘希望同梵行者前来。他们是有信、有净信的。同梵行者来了以后,他们就去迎接,铺设住处,把住处安排好再交给对方。然后带着他们进村乞食,帮他们消除疑惑,还能听到甘甜的佛法。这样一来,他们的好名声就传开了:某某精舍的比丘们有信、有净信,具足义务,乐于摄受。比丘们听到这个名声,即使从很远的地方也会赶来。常住比丘们对他们尽各种义务,走上前去顶礼年长的客比丘,然后坐下;在较年轻的客比丘旁边取座坐下。坐下之后问:您是要住在这座精舍,还是要离开?如果对方说我要离开,他们就说这里的住处很合适、乞食很容易得到等等,不让对方走。如果来客是持律的,他们就在他跟前读诵律;如果来客是持经等法门的,就在他跟前读诵相应的法。他们安住在客比丘长老的教诫中,甚至连同无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果。那些客比丘会说:我们本来只打算住一两天才来的,可这里住得太舒服了,我们愿意住上十年十二年。如此,在这里应当知道什么是退减、什么是增长。巴利
Ye pana sabrahmacārīnaṃ āgamanaṃ icchanti, te saddhā honti pasannā, āgatānaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ paccuggamanādīni katvā senāsanaṃ paññapetvā denti, te gahetvā bhikkhācāraṃ pavisanti, kaṅkhaṃ vinodenti, madhuradhammassavanaṃ labhanti. Atha nesaṃ kittisaddo uggacchati – ‘‘asukavihārabhikkhū evaṃ saddhā pasannā vattasampannā saṅgāhakā’’ti. Taṃ sutvā bhikkhū dūratopi enti, tesaṃ nevāsikā vattaṃ karonti , samīpaṃ āgantvā vuḍḍhataraṃ āgantukaṃ vanditvā nisīdanti, navakatarassa santike āsanaṃ gahetvā nisīdanti. Nisīditvā – ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre vasissatha gamissathā’’ti pucchanti. ‘Gamissāmī’ti vutte – ‘‘sappāyaṃ senāsanaṃ, sulabhā bhikkhā’’tiādīni vatvā gantuṃ na denti. Vinayadharo ce hoti, tassa santike vinayaṃ sajjhāyanti. Suttantādidharo ce, tassa santike taṃ taṃ dhammaṃ sajjhāyanti. Āgantukānaṃ therānaṃ ovāde ṭhatvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇanti. Āgantukā ‘‘ekaṃ dve divasāni vasissāmāti āgatāmha, imesaṃ pana sukhasaṃvāsatāya dasadvādasavassāni vasissāmā’’ti vattāro honti. Evamettha hānivuddhiyo veditabbā.
137 在第二组七法中,把各种劳作当作自己的乐园,所以叫“以业为乐”。对劳作有欢喜,就是“乐业”。致力于以业为乐者,即相应、投入、持续致力于此。这里说的“业”,指的是应当做的各种事务,比如:计量衣料、缝制袈裟、做托肩布、做针筒、做钵袋、做不系缚物、做腰带、做风箱、做钵座、做脚垫、扎扫帚等等。确实有人做这些事时,整天就只做这些。针对这种情况而加以遮止。但如果只是在该做这些事的时候才做,在该受教的时候受教,在该读诵的时候读诵,在该履行塔庙庭园义务的时候履行义务,在该作意的时候作意,这样的人就不叫“以业为乐”。巴利
137. Dutiyasattake kammaṃ ārāmo etesanti kammārāmāti. Kamme ratāti kammaratā. Kammārāmatamanuyuttāti yuttā payuttā anuyuttā. Tattha kammanti itikātabbakammaṃ vuccati. Seyyathidaṃ – cīvaravicāraṇaṃ, cīvarakaraṇaṃ, upatthambhanaṃ, sūcigharaṃ, pattatthavikaṃ, asaṃbaddhakaṃ, kāyabandhanaṃ, dhamakaraṇaṃ, ādhārakaṃ, pādakathalikaṃ, sammajjanīādīnaṃ karaṇanti. Ekacco hi etāni karonto sakaladivasaṃ etāneva karoti. Taṃ sandhāyesa paṭikkhepo. Yo pana etesaṃ karaṇavelāyameva etāni karoti, uddesavelāyaṃ uddesaṃ gaṇhāti, sajjhāyavelāyaṃ sajjhāyati, cetiyaṅgaṇavattavelāyaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ karoti, manasikāravelāyaṃ manasikāraṃ karoti, na so kammārāmo nāma.
不乐于谈论:在这里,如果有人整天整夜只是以谈论女人的容貌、男人的容貌等方式来说闲话,对这样的谈论不加节制,这种人就叫作“乐于谈论”。但如果有人日夜说法、回答问题,这种人就是少言的人,对谈论是有节制的。为什么呢?因为佛这样说过:“比丘们,你们聚会时应当做两件事:要么谈论法,要么保持圣洁的沉默。”巴利
Na bhassārāmāti ettha yo itthivaṇṇapurisavaṇṇādivasena ālāpasallāpaṃ karontoyeva divasañca rattiñca vītināmeti, evarūpe bhasse pariyantakārī na hoti, ayaṃ bhassārāmo nāma. Yo pana rattindivaṃ dhammaṃ katheti, pañhaṃ vissajjeti, ayaṃ appabhassova bhasse pariyantakārīyeva. Kasmā? ‘‘Sannipatitānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dvayaṃ karaṇīyaṃ – dhammī vā kathā, ariyo vā tuṇhībhāvo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.273) vuttattā.
“不乐于睡眠”在这里是指:如果有人无论走着、坐着还是躺着,只要被昏沉和睡眠压倒,就一味地睡,这种人就叫“乐于睡眠”。但如果是因为业报所生的身体有病,使心沉入有分,那这个人就不算“乐于睡眠”。正因如此,世尊才说:“阿吉韦萨那,我记得在夏季最后一个月,午后乞食回来,把桑喀帝叠成四折,右胁而卧,正念正知,进入睡眠。”巴利
Na niddārāmāti ettha yo gacchantopi nisinnopi nipannopi thinamiddhābhibhūto niddāyatiyeva, ayaṃ niddārāmo nāma. Yassa pana karajakāyagelaññena cittaṃ bhavaṅge otarati , nāyaṃ niddārāmo. Tenevāha – ‘‘abhijānāmahaṃ aggivessana, gimhānaṃ pacchime māse pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātappaṭikkanto catugguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno niddaṃ okkamitā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387).
不乐于众会者:在这里,如果有人总是这样混在一起——一个人时就有第二个人作伴,两个人时就有第三个人作伴,三个人时就有第四个人作伴——如此一直与人混杂而住,独自一人时体会不到乐味,这个人就是乐于众会者。但如果有人在行、住、坐、卧四种姿势中,独自一人时能体会到乐味,就应该知道这个人不是乐于众会者。巴利
Na saṅgaṇikārāmāti ettha yo ekassa dutiyo dvinnaṃ tatiyo tiṇṇaṃ catutthoti evaṃ saṃsaṭṭhova viharati, ekako assādaṃ na labhati, ayaṃ saṅgaṇikārāmo. Yo pana catūsu iriyāpathesu ekako assādaṃ labhati, nāyaṃ saṅgaṇikārāmoti veditabbo.
在这里,“不恶欲者”是与“恶欲者”相反的人。所谓“恶欲者”,就是怀着“想让人把并不存在的功德当成自己所有”这种欲求的破戒之人。巴利
Napāpicchāti ettha asantasambhāvanāya icchāya samannāgatā dussīlā pāpicchā nāma.
恶友:因为他们的朋友是恶的,所以叫恶友。在行、住、坐、卧四种威仪中一起活动,因为他们的同伴是恶的,所以叫恶同伴。由于倾向于恶、趣向于恶、朝向于恶,所以在恶法上彻底歪斜,因此叫恶同侣。巴利
Na pāpamittādīsu pāpā mittā etesanti pāpamittā. Catūsu iriyāpathesu saha ayanato pāpā sahāyā etesanti pāpasahāyā. Tanninnatappoṇatappabbhāratāya pāpesu sampavaṅkāti pāpasampavaṅkā.
“以微小程度”是指以低劣、微小的成就。“在此期间”是指还没有证到阿拉汉果,就在这个中间阶段。“中止”是指达到“已经足够了”的状态,也就是退缩、停下来,觉得事情已经完成了。这里说的是:只要比丘们不因为仅仅戒清净、或仅仅修观、或仅仅得禅那、或仅仅是入流者的程度、或仅仅是一来者的程度、或仅仅是不来者的程度就停下来,那么就可以期待他们只会增长,不会退堕。巴利
Oramattakenāti avaramattakena appamattakena. Antarāti arahattaṃ apatvāva etthantare. Vosānanti pariniṭṭhitabhāvaṃ – ‘‘alamettāvatā’’ti osakkanaṃ ṭhitakiccataṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yāva sīlapārisuddhimattena vā vipassanāmattena vā jhānamattena vā sotāpannabhāvamattena vā sakadāgāmibhāvamattena vā anāgāmibhāvamattena vā vosānaṃ na āpajjissanti, tāva vuddhiyeva bhikkhūnaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānī’’ti.
138 138. 在第三个七法中,“信”指的是具足信的人。其中,信有四种:入来信、证得信、净信、确信信。其中,入来信属于一切智菩萨;证得信属于圣者。当说到“佛、法、僧”时,内心生起的欢喜是净信;经过反复思量、确定之后而生起的信受是确信信。这里所指的,正是后两种信。因为具足这样的信,所以称为“信解脱”,就像婆迦梨长老那样。他一定会履行塔庙庭院的义务或菩提树庭院的义务,也会圆满亲教师义务、老师义务等一切义务。“有惭”是指心与惭相应,惭的特征是厌恶恶行。“有愧”是指具足愧,愧的特征是畏惧恶行。巴利
138. Tatiyasattake saddhāti saddhāsampannā. Tattha āgamanīyasaddhā, adhigamasaddhā, pasādasaddhā, okappanasaddhāti catubbidhā saddhā. Tattha āgamanīyasaddhā sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ hoti. Adhigamasaddhā ariyapuggalānaṃ. Buddho dhammo saṅghoti vutte pana pasādo pasādasaddhā. Okappetvā pakappetvā pana saddahanaṃ okappanasaddhā. Sā duvidhāpi idhādhippetā. Tāya hi saddhāya samannāgato saddhāvimutto, vakkalittherasadiso hoti. Tassa hi cetiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ vā, bodhiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ vā katameva hoti. Upajjhāyavattaācariyavattādīni sabbavattāni pūreti. Hirimanāti pāpajigucchanalakkhaṇāya hiriyā yuttacittā. Ottappīti pāpato bhāyanalakkhaṇena ottappena samannāgatā.
“多闻者”在这里有两种多闻:教理多闻和通达多闻。教理指三藏,通达指证悟真理。但在这一段里,指的是教理多闻。一个人广泛地听闻了教理,他就是“多闻者”。这种多闻者又分四种:不再依赖他人的多闻者、服务僧团的多闻者、教诫比丘尼的多闻者、一切处多闻者。其中前三种,应按照《一切善见》律注中“教诫品”所说的方式来理解;而一切处多闻者,就像阿难长老那样。这里指的就是他们。巴利
Bahussutāti ettha pana pariyattibahussuto, paṭivedhabahussutoti dve bahussutā. Pariyattīti tīṇi piṭakāni. Paṭivedhoti saccappaṭivedho. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne pariyatti adhippetā. Sā yena bahu sutā, so bahussuto. So panesa nissayamuccanako, parisupaṭṭhāko, bhikkhunovādako, sabbatthakabahussutoti catubbidho hoti. Tattha tayo bahussutā samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya ovādavagge vuttanayena gahetabbā. Sabbatthakabahussutā pana ānandattherasadisā honti. Te idha adhippetā.
精进已发动:这是指有些人的身精进和心精进都已经发动起来。其中,有些人摆脱了身体方面的拥挤杂闹,在行、住、坐、卧四种姿势中,以八种发勤之事为所缘而独自安住,他们的身精进就叫做已发动。有些人摆脱了内心方面的拥挤杂闹,以八种等至为所缘而独自安住;走路时生起的烦恼,他们不让它有站住的机会;站着时生起的烦恼,不让它有坐下的机会;坐着时生起的烦恼,不让它有躺下的机会;烦恼无论在哪里生起,就在那里立刻把它压制住,他们的心精进就叫做已发动。巴利
Āraddhavīriyāti yesaṃ kāyikañca cetasikañca vīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ hoti. Tattha ye kāyasaṅgaṇikaṃ vinodetvā catūsu iriyāpathesu aṭṭhaārabbhavatthuvasena ekakā honti, tesaṃ kāyikavīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ nāma hoti. Ye cittasaṅgāṇikaṃ vinodetvā aṭṭhasamāpattivasena ekakā honti, gamane uppannakilesassa ṭhānaṃ pāpuṇituṃ na denti, ṭhāne uppannakilesassa nisajjaṃ, nisajjāya uppannakilesassa sayanaṃ pāpuṇituṃ na denti, uppannuppannaṭṭhāneyeva kilese niggaṇhanti, tesaṃ cetasikavīriyaṃ āraddhaṃ nāma hoti.
“念现前”是指对很久以前做过的事都能记得、能随念起来,就像摩诃伽丁跋耶无畏长老、长诵无畏长老、持帝毕塔咖秋喇阿跋亚长老那样。据说,摩诃伽丁跋耶无畏长老在出生第五天,看见一只乌鸦把嘴伸进吉祥乳糜里,就发出了“呼——呼——”的声音。后来他做了长老,有比丘问他:“尊者,您是从什么时候开始有记忆的?”他说:“贤友,从出生第五天发出那个声音时起就有了。”巴利
Upaṭṭhitassatīti cirakatādīnaṃ saritā anussaritā mahāgatimbayaabhayattheradīghabhāṇaabhayattheratipiṭakacūḷābhayattherā viya. Mahāgatimbayaabhayatthero kira jātapañcamadivase maṅgalapāyāse tuṇḍaṃ pasārentaṃ vāyasaṃ disvā huṃ hunti saddamakāsi. Atha so therakāle – ‘‘kadā paṭṭhāya, bhante, sarathā’’ti bhikkhūhi pucchito ‘‘jātapañcamadivase katasaddato paṭṭhāya āvuso’’ti āha.
迪卡跋纳咖·阿跋亚长老出生第九天,他母亲弯下腰想亲他,她的发髻一下子散开了。那时,满满一桶那么大的须摩那花落在婴儿胸口,让他感到疼痛。他后来成了长老,有人问他:“尊者,您从什么时候开始有记忆的?”他说:“从出生第九天起。”巴利
Dīghabhāṇakaabhayattherassa jātanavamadivase mātā cumbissāmīti onatā tassā moḷi muccittha . Tato tumbamattāni sumanapupphāni dārakassa ure patitvā dukkhaṃ janayiṃsu. So therakāle – ‘‘kadā paṭṭhāya, bhante, sarathā’’ti pucchito – ‘‘jātanavamadivasato paṭṭhāyā’’ti āha.
持三藏的秋喇阿跋亚长老说过这样一件事:在阿努拉德普勒城,让人把三道城门都关上,只留一道门让人出去,然后一个一个问“你叫什么名字,你叫什么名字”,到了傍晚不用再问,就能把那些人的名字全都记住。有人问他能不能做到,他回答说:“贤友,能。”就是针对这样的比丘,才说“念现前”。巴利
Tipiṭakacūḷābhayatthero – ‘‘anurādhapure tīṇi dvārāni pidahāpetvā manussānaṃ ekena dvārena nikkhamanaṃ katvā – ‘tvaṃ kinnāmo, tvaṃ kinnāmo’ti pucchitvā sāyaṃ puna apucchitvāva tesaṃ nāmāni sampaṭicchāpetuṃ – ‘‘sakkā āvuso’’ti āha. Evarūpe bhikkhū sandhāya – ‘‘upaṭṭhitassatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“具慧者”是指具备那种能观照五蕴生灭的智慧。此外,这两个词也同时说明了:对于修观的比丘们来说,正念和观慧是观行的资粮。巴利
Paññavantoti pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayabbayapariggāhikāya paññāya samannāgatā. Api ca dvīhipi etehi padehi vipassakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vipassanāsambhārabhūtā sammāsati ceva vipassanāpaññā ca kathitā.
139 在第四个七法组里,念本身就是觉支,所以叫念觉支。其余各项也按这个方式理解。其中,念觉支的特相是现起,择法觉支的特相是简择,精进觉支的特相是策励,喜觉支的特相是遍满,轻安觉支的特相是寂静,定觉支的特相是不散乱,舍觉支的特相是审察。所谓“他们将修习”,意思是:他们以四种因缘使念觉支生起并增长,以六种因缘使择法觉支生起并增长,以九种因缘使精进觉支生起并增长,以十种因缘使喜觉支生起并增长,以七种因缘使轻安觉支生起并增长,以十种因缘使定觉支生起并增长,以五种因缘使舍觉支生起并增长。这样,就讲说了与观、道、果相应,世间与出世间混杂的觉支。巴利
139. Catutthasattake satiyeva sambojjhaṅgo satisambojjhaṅgoti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Tattha upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇo satisambojjhaṅgo, pavicayalakkhaṇo dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo, paggahalakkhaṇo vīriyasambojjhaṅgo, pharaṇalakkhaṇo pītisambojjhaṅgo, upasamalakkhaṇo passaddhisambojjhaṅgo, avikkhepalakkhaṇo samādhisambojjhaṅgo, paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo. Bhāvessantīti satisambojjhaṅgaṃ catūhi kāraṇehi samuṭṭhāpentā, chahi kāraṇehi dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgaṃ samuṭṭhāpentā, navahi kāraṇehi vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṃ samuṭṭhāpentā, dasahi kāraṇehi pītisambojjhaṅgaṃ samuṭṭhāpentā, sattahi kāraṇehi passaddhisambojjhaṅgaṃ samuṭṭhāpentā, dasahi kāraṇehi samādhisambojjhaṅgaṃ samuṭṭhāpentā, pañcahi kāraṇehi upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṃ samuṭṭhāpentā vaḍḍhessantīti attho. Iminā vipassanāmaggaphalasampayutte lokiyalokuttaramissake sambojjhaṅge kathesi.
140 在第五个七法组里,“无常想”是指和随观无常一起生起的想。“无我想”等其余各项,也是同样的道理。这七种想也可以是世间的观想。不过,按照《增支部》9.36中所说的“这就是寂静,这就是殊胜,也就是一切行寂止、离染、灭尽”,应当知道,在这里也可以有两种出世间的想。巴利
140. Pañcamasattake aniccasaññāti aniccānupassanāya saddhiṃ uppannasaññā. Anattasaññādīsupi eseva nayo. Imā satta lokiyavipassanāpi honti. ‘‘Etaṃ santaṃ, etaṃ paṇītaṃ, yadidaṃ sabbasaṅkhārasamatho virāgo nirodho’’ti (a. ni. 9.36) āgatavasenettha dve lokuttarāpi hontīti veditabbā.
141 141. 在“六法”中,“慈身业”是指以慈心所做的身业。慈语业和慈意业也是同样的道理。不过,这些主要是依比丘的情况来说的,在家人也同样适用。对比丘来说,以慈心完成等正行法,就叫慈身业。对在家人来说,为了礼敬塔庙、礼敬菩提树、迎请僧团而前往;看见比丘进村乞食,就上前迎接、接钵、铺设座位、随后送行等等,这一类行为就叫慈身业。巴利
141. Chakke mettaṃ kāyakammanti mettacittena kattabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ. Vacīkammamanokammesupi eseva nayo. Imāni pana bhikkhūnaṃ vasena āgatāni gihīsupi labbhanti . Bhikkhūnañhi mettacittena ābhisamācārikadhammapūraṇaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ cetiyavandanatthāya bodhivandanatthāya saṅghanimantanatthāya gamanaṃ, gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā paccuggamanaṃ, pattappaṭiggahaṇaṃ, āsanapaññāpanaṃ, anugamananti evamādikaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma.
比丘们以慈心制定行为规范与学处、讲说业处、开示佛法,乃至讲说三藏佛语,这些都叫慈语业。在家人说“我们去礼敬塔庙”“我们去礼敬菩提树”“我们要去听法”“我们要作灯供、花鬘供、花供”“我们要受持三种善行并践行”“我们要供养筹食等”“我们要供养雨安居的资具”“今天我们要向僧团供养四种资具”“请迎请僧团,准备嚼食等食物”“铺设座位”“准备饮用水”“去迎接僧团并请他们过来”“请他们就坐在已铺好的座位上”“请大家生起欢喜心、精进心去服务”——在说这类话的时候,就是慈语业。巴利
Bhikkhūnaṃ mettacittena ācārapaññattisikkhāpadapaññāpanaṃ, kammaṭṭhānakathanaṃ, dhammadesanā, tepiṭakampi buddhavacanaṃ mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ cetiyavandanatthāya gacchāma , bodhivandanatthāya gacchāma, dhammassavanaṃ karissāma, dīpamālapupphapūjaṃ karissāma, tīṇi sucaritāni samādāya vattissāma, salākabhattādīni dassāma, vassavāsikaṃ dassāma, ajja saṅghassa cattāro paccaye dassāma, saṅghaṃ nimantetvā khādanīyādīni saṃvidahatha, āsanāni paññāpetha, pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhapetha, saṅghaṃ paccuggantvā ānetha, paññattāsane nisīdāpetha, chandajātā ussāhajātā veyyāvaccaṃ karothātiādikathanakāle mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma.
比丘们清晨起床后,照料身体,做完打扫塔庙庭院等日常事务,然后坐到僻静的地方,心里这样想:“愿这座精舍里的比丘们安乐,没有怨恨,没有恼害。”这种心里的思惟,就叫慈意业。在家人心里这样想:“愿各位尊者安乐,没有怨恨,没有恼害。”这就是慈意业。巴利
Bhikkhūnaṃ pātova uṭṭhāya sarīrappaṭijagganaṃ, cetiyaṅgaṇavattādīni ca katvā vivittāsane nisīditvā imasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū sukhī hontu averā abyāpajjāti cintanaṃ mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma. Gihīnaṃ ‘ayyā sukhī hontu, averā abyāpajjā’ti cintanaṃ mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma.
当面和背后,就是指在眼前和在背后。其中,对刚出家不久的新学比丘,在缝衣服等事务上以同伴的身份一起去帮忙,这叫当面的慈身业。对长老比丘,为他洗脚、顶礼、扇风等一切恭敬服侍的事,这叫当面的慈身业。对这两种人,看到他们随意乱放的木器等物品,不轻视他们,而是像对待自己乱放的东西一样把它收拾归位,这叫背后的慈身业。巴利
Āvi ceva raho cāti sammukhā ca parammukhā ca. Tattha navakānaṃ cīvarakammādīsu sahāyabhāvagamanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Therānaṃ pana pādadhovanavandanabījanadānādibhedaṃ sabbaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma. Ubhayehipi dunnikkhittānaṃ dārubhaṇḍādīnaṃ tesu avamaññaṃ akatvā attanā dunnikkhittānaṃ viya paṭisāmanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma.
当面用“天长老”“提萨长老”这样的称呼来讲话,这叫做当面的慈语业。如果长老不在精舍里,有人问起:“我们的天长老在哪里?我们的提萨长老在哪里?他什么时候才会回来?”像这样带着牵挂和惦念的话语,就叫做背后的慈语业。巴利
Devatthero tissattheroti evaṃ paggayha vacanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma. Vihāre asantaṃ pana paṭipucchantassa kuhiṃ amhākaṃ devatthero, kuhiṃ amhākaṃ tissatthero, kadā nu kho āgamissatīti evaṃ mamāyanavacanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma.
用充满慈爱、湿润的双眼,带着清净愉悦的面容注视对方,这叫做当面的慈意业。心里默念“愿天长老、帝萨长老无病、无恼”,这叫做背后的慈意业。巴利
Mettāsinehasiniddhāni pana nayanāni ummīletvā pasannena mukhena olokanaṃ sammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma. Devatthero tissatthero arogo hotu, appābādhoti samannāharaṇaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ manokammaṃ nāma.
“利得”是指袈裟等已经得到的资具。“如法”是指避开谄曲等邪命,以如法、平等、按乞食规矩而得到的。“乃至仅落入钵中的那么一点”是指最低限度上,落入钵里、进到钵中的,乃至只有两三汤匙那么一点乞食。“不分别受用”在这里有两种分别:财物分别和个人分别。其中,以“我要给这么多,不给那么多”这样的心去分别,叫财物分别;以“我要给某人,不给某人”这样的心去分别,叫个人分别。这两种都不作,而受用不分别之物的人,就叫不分别受用者。巴利
Lābhāti cīvarādayo laddhapaccayā. Dhammikāti kuhanādibhedaṃ micchājīvaṃ vajjetvā dhammena samena bhikkhācāravattena uppannā. Antamaso pattapariyāpannamattampīti pacchimakoṭiyā patte pariyāpannaṃ pattassa antogataṃ dvitikaṭacchubhikkhāmattampi . Appaṭivibhattabhogīti ettha dve paṭivibhattā nāma – āmisappaṭivibhattañca, puggalappaṭivibhattañca. Tattha – ‘‘ettakaṃ dassāmi, ettakaṃ na dassāmī’’ti evaṃ cittena vibhajanaṃ āmisappaṭivibhattaṃ nāma. ‘‘Asukassa dassāmi, asukassa na dassāmī’’ti evaṃ cittena vibhajanaṃ pana puggalappaṭivibhattaṃ nāma. Tadubhayampi akatvā yo appaṭivibhattaṃ bhuñjati, ayaṃ appaṭivibhattabhogī nāma.
与持戒的梵行同伴共同受用——这里,共同受用者的特征是:无论得到什么殊胜的东西,他都不会以“用利养换取利养”的心态送给在家人,也不自己独自享用;接受时他想“愿这与僧伽共有”,把它看作跟僧伽之物一样,要敲钟之后才能受用。巴利
Sīlavantehisabrahmacārīhi sādhāraṇabhogīti ettha sādhāraṇabhogino idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ, yaṃ yaṃ paṇītaṃ labbhati, taṃ taṃ neva lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanatāmukhena gihīnaṃ deti, na attanā bhuñjati, paṭiggaṇhanto ca – ‘‘saṅghena sādhāraṇaṃ hotū’’ti gahetvā ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ saṅghasantakaṃ viya passati.
那么,谁来圆满这个和合法,谁又不圆满呢?首先,破戒者不能圆满。因为持戒的人不会接受属于破戒者的东西。而戒行清净的人,只要不违犯行仪,就能圆满。这里的行仪是这样的:如果有人指定布施的对象——比如指定给母亲、父亲、师长、亲教师等——他确实是把该给的东西给了出去,但这对他而言不成为和合法,只是叫作“照料亲缘系缚”而已。因为和合法只有在已解除系缚的人身上才成立。不过,他作指定布施时,也应该布施给病人、看护病人的人、客比丘、即将远行的人,以及新出家还不知道怎么拿桑喀帝和钵的人。先布施给这些人之后,剩下的从长老的座位开始依次分给,给一点点,谁拿多少就给他多少。如果没有剩余了,就再去乞食,然后从长老的座位开始,凡是好的食物都先布施给他们,剩下的自己再受用。由于经中说“与持戒者”,所以即使不布施给破戒者,也是可以的。巴利
Imaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammaṃ ko pūreti, ko na pūretīti? Dussīlo tāva na pūreti. Na hi tassa santakaṃ sīlavantā gaṇhanti. Parisuddhasīlo pana vattaṃ akhaṇḍento pūreti. Tatridaṃ vattaṃ – yo hi odissakaṃ katvā mātu vā pitu vā ācariyupajjhāyādīnaṃ vā deti, so dātabbaṃ deti, sāraṇīyadhammo panassa na hoti, palibodhajagganaṃ nāma hoti. Sāraṇīyadhammo hi muttapalibodhasseva vaṭṭati. Tena pana odissakaṃ dentena gilānagilānupaṭṭhākaāgantukagamikānañceva navapabbajitassa ca saṅghāṭipattaggahaṇaṃ ajānantassa dātabbaṃ. Etesaṃ datvā avasesaṃ therāsanato paṭṭhāya thokaṃ adatvā yo yattakaṃ gaṇhāti, tassa tattakaṃ dātabbaṃ. Avasiṭṭhe asati puna piṇḍāya caritvā therāsanato paṭṭhāya yaṃ yaṃ paṇītaṃ, taṃ datvā sesaṃ paribhuñjitabbaṃ. ‘‘Sīlavantehī’’ti vacanato dussīlassa adātumpi vaṭṭati.
这种和合法只有在受过良好训练的僧团里才能圆满,在没受过训练的僧团里则不能圆满。因为在受过良好训练的僧团里,如果有人从别处得到了食物,他就不会接受这里的;即使从别处得不到,他也只取适量,不会多取。而且,这种和合法即使这样一次又一次地出去乞食,得到什么就布施什么,也要十二年才能圆满,不能比这更早。如果在第十二年,那位圆满和合法的比丘把装满乞食的钵放在集会堂里,自己去洗澡,这时僧团长老问:“这是谁的钵?”有人回答:“是那位圆满和合法者的。”长老说:“拿来。”于是把所有的乞食都分掉吃光,只留下一个空钵。那位比丘回来看到空钵,心里就生起忧恼:“他们一点都没给我留,全吃光了。”因为这样生起忧恼,和合法就破了,必须重新再圆满十二年。这就像外道的别住一样,一旦破了就得重新圆满。反过来,如果那位比丘心生欢喜,这样想:“我真是有福报!真是善得!我的同梵行者们竟然没跟我说一声就取用了我钵里的食物!”这样,他的和合法就叫作圆满。巴利
Ayaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammo susikkhitāya parisāya supūro hoti, no asikkhitāya parisāya. Susikkhitāya hi parisāya yo aññato labhati, so na gaṇhāti. Aññato alabhantopi pamāṇayuttameva gaṇhāti, nātirekaṃ. Ayaṃ pana sāraṇīyadhammo evaṃ punappunaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā laddhaṃ laddhaṃ dentassāpi dvādasahi vassehi pūrati, na tato oraṃ. Sace hi dvādasame vasse sāraṇīyadhammapūrako piṇḍapātapūraṃ pattaṃ āsanasālāyaṃ ṭhapetvā nahāyituṃ gacchati saṅghatthero ca kasseso pattoti, ‘‘sāraṇīyadhammapūrakassā’’ti vutte ‘‘āharatha na’’nti sabbaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ vicāretvā bhuñjitvā ca rittaṃ pattaṃ ṭhapeti, atha so bhikkhu rittaṃ pattaṃ disvā ‘‘mayhaṃ anavasesetvāva paribhuñjiṃsū’’ti domanassaṃ uppādeti, sāraṇīyadhammo bhijjati, puna dvādasavassāni pūretabbo hoti. Titthiyaparivāsasadiso hesa, sakiṃ khaṇḍe jāte puna pūretabbova. Yo pana – ‘‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṃ vata me, yassa me pattagataṃ anāpucchāva sabrahmacārī paribhuñjantī’’ti somanassaṃ janeti, tassa puṇṇo nāma hoti.
这样,对于已经圆满修成“可念法”的人来说,既没有嫉妒,也没有悭吝。他招人喜爱,容易得到供养;即使别人分吃他钵里的食物,也不会耗尽;在分配物品的场合,他能得到最好的那份;当恐惧或饥荒来临时,天神们也会为他奔走操劳。巴利
Evaṃ pūritasāraṇīyadhammassa pana neva issā, na macchariyaṃ hoti. So manussānaṃ piyo hoti, sulabhapaccayo ca, pattagatamassa diyyamānampi na khīyati, bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ labhati, bhaye vā chātake vā sampatte devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjanti.
关于这一点,有这些事例:据说,住在塞纳山的帝萨长老依止大山村而住。有五十位大长老为了去龙岛礼塔,路过大山村时进村托钵,结果什么也没得到,就出来了。帝萨长老正要进村,看见他们,就问:“尊者,得到食物了吗?”他们回答说:“贤友,我们走了一圈了。”长老知道他们没得到食物,就说:“尊者,请在这里等我回来。”他们说:“贤友,我们五十个人,连沾湿钵底那么一点都没得到。”长老说:“尊者,常住比丘是有办法的,就算得不到食物,也知道哪里托钵方便。”长老们就留下来等。帝萨长老进了村。就在村口第一户人家里,一位大近事女已经煮好了乳粥,正站在那里望着长老来。长老一到门口,她就把钵装满递给他。长老拿着食物来到长老们那里,对僧团长老说:“请拿吧,尊者。”那位僧团长老心想:“我们这么多人都没得到,他这么快就拿了回来,这是怎么回事?”就看了看其他比丘的脸色。帝萨长老从他们看的神情就知道了,说:“尊者,这是如法、公平得来的钵食,不必犹豫,请拿吧。”于是从第一位开始,他给所有人都按需分足了,自己也吃饱了。巴利
Tatrimāni vatthūni – senagirivāsī tissatthero kira mahāgirigāmaṃ upanissāya viharati. Paññāsa mahātherā nāgadīpaṃ cetiyavandanatthāya gacchantā girigāme piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci aladdhā nikkhamiṃsu. Thero pana pavisanto te disvā pucchi – ‘‘laddhaṃ, bhante’’ti? Vicarimha āvusoti. So tesaṃ aladdhabhāvaṃ ñatvā āha – ‘‘bhante yāvāhaṃ āgacchāmi, tāva idheva hothā’’ti. Mayaṃ, āvuso, paññāsa janā pattatemanamattampi na labhimhāti. Bhante, nevāsikā nāma paṭibalā honti, alabhantāpi bhikkhācāramaggasabhāgaṃ jānantīti. Therā āgamesuṃ. Thero gāmaṃ pāvisi. Dhurageheyeva mahāupāsikā khīrabhattaṃ sajjetvā theraṃ olokayamānā ṭhitā. Atha therassa dvāraṃ sampattasseva pattaṃ pūretvā adāsi, so taṃ ādāya therānaṃ santikaṃ gantvā gaṇhatha, bhanteti, saṅghattheraṃ āha. Thero – ‘‘amhehi ettakehi kiñci na laddhaṃ, ayaṃ sīghameva gahetvā āgato, kiṃ nu kho’’ti sesānaṃ mukhaṃ olokesi. Thero olokanākāreneva ñatvā ‘‘bhante, dhammena samena laddhapiṇḍapāto, nikkukkuccā gaṇhathā’’tiādito paṭṭhāya sabbesaṃ yāvadatthaṃ datvā attanāpi yāvadatthaṃ bhuñji.
饭后,长老们问他:“贤友,你是什么时候证悟出世间法的?”他说:“尊者,我没有出世间法。”又问:“贤友,你是得禅那的人吗?”他说:“尊者,这个我也没有。”又问:“贤友,难道不是神通吗?”他说:“尊者,我圆满的是令人忆念之法。自从我圆满那个法以来,即使有十万比丘,我钵里的食物也不会耗尽。”长老们听了之后说:“萨度,萨度,善士,这正适合你。”以上就是关于“钵里的食物不会耗尽”这件事。巴利
Atha naṃ bhattakiccāvasāne therā pucchiṃsu – ‘‘kadā, āvuso, lokuttaradhammaṃ paṭivijjhī’’ti? Natthi me, bhante, lokuttaradhammoti. Jhānalābhīsi, āvusoti? Etampi me, bhante, natthīti. Nanu, āvuso, pāṭihāriyanti? Sāraṇīyadhammo me, bhante, pūrito, tassa me dhammassa pūritakālato paṭṭhāya sacepi bhikkhusatasahassaṃ hoti, pattagataṃ na khīyatīti. Te sutvā – ‘‘sādhu sādhu sappurisa, anucchavikamidaṃ tuyha’’nti āhaṃsu. Idaṃ tāva – ‘‘pattagataṃ na khīyatī’’ti ettha vatthu.
这位长老在支提山举行山宝大供养时,来到布施的场所,问:“这里最上等的物品是什么?”有人回答:“两件衣,尊者。”他说:“这些应该归我。”一位大臣听到这话,就向国王禀报:“有个年轻比丘这样说。”国王心想:年轻比丘有这样的心思,而大长老们才适合用精细的衣。于是说先放着,要供养给大长老们。当国王按顺序向僧团布施时,那两件衣即使被放在他们头顶上,也不落到他们手里;向其他比丘布施时,衣就落到手上。可是轮到向那位年轻比丘布施时,衣却落到了他手上。国王便把衣放到他手中,看了大臣一眼,请年轻比丘坐下,供养完毕后解散了僧团。然后国王坐在年轻比丘身边,问:“尊者,您是什么时候证悟这法的?”那位年轻比丘即使委婉也不肯说妄语,就说:“大王,我没有出世间法。”国王说:“尊者,您之前不是说过吗?”他回答:“是的,大王,我是圆满和合法的人。自从我圆满那法以来,凡是分配物品时,我就能得到最上等的物品。”国王说:“萨度,萨度,尊者,这正适合您。”礼敬后离去。这就是“在分配物品时得到最上等物品”这一故事的由来。巴利
Ayameva pana thero cetiyapabbate giribhaṇḍamahāpūjāya dānaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā imasmiṃ ṭhāne kiṃ varabhaṇḍanti pucchi. Dve sāṭakā, bhanteti. Ete mayhaṃ pāpuṇissantīti. Taṃ sutvā amacco rañño ārocesi – ‘‘eko daharo evaṃ vadatī’’ti. Daharassa evaṃ cittaṃ, mahātherānaṃ pana sukhumasāṭakā vaṭṭantīti vatvā mahātherānaṃ dassāmīti ṭhapeti. Tassa bhikkhusaṅghe paṭipāṭiyā ṭhite dentassa matthake ṭhapitāpi te sāṭakā hatthaṃ nārohanti. Aññe ārohanti. Daharassa dānakāle pana hatthaṃ āruḷhā. So tassa hatthe pātetvā amaccassa mukhaṃ oloketvā daharaṃ nisīdāpetvā dānaṃ datvā saṅghaṃ vissajjetvā daharassa santike nisīditvā – ‘‘bhante, imaṃ dhammaṃ kadā paṭivijjhitthā’’ti āha. So pariyāyenāpi asantaṃ avadanto – ‘‘natthi mayhaṃ mahārāja lokuttaradhammo’’ti āha. Nanu, bhante, pubbe avacutthāti. Āma, mahārāja, sāraṇīyadhammapūrako ahaṃ, tassa me dhammassa pūritakālato paṭṭhāya bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ pāpuṇātīti. ‘‘Sādhu sādhu, bhante, anucchavikamidaṃ tuyha’’nti vanditvā pakkāmi. Idaṃ – ‘‘bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṭṭhāne aggabhaṇḍaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti ettha vatthu.
婆罗门帝萨怖畏时期,住在兄弟村的人没有通知那嘎长老尼就逃走了。长老尼在清晨时分对年轻的比丘尼们说:“这个村子实在太安静了,你们先去查看一下。”她们去了之后,知道所有人都已经离开了,就回来禀报长老尼。长老尼听后说:“你们不要惦记他们离开的事,只管在背诵、问法和如理作意上用功。”说完,到了乞食的时候,她穿好衣,连同自己共十二人,站在村门口的榕树下。住在树上的天神供养了这十二位比丘尼团食,并说:“尊者们,别去别处,以后常到这里来。”长老尼有个弟弟,名叫龙长老。他心想:“这里太危险了,没法住下去,我要到对岸去。”于是他也连同自己共十二人,从住处出来准备离开。他看见长老尼,就来到兄弟村想告别。长老尼听说“长老们来了”,便走到他们跟前,问:“尊者们怎么了?”他把情况说了。长老尼说:“今天先在精舍住一天,明天再走吧。”长老们就去了精舍。巴利
Brāhmaṇatissabhaye pana bhātaragāmavāsino nāgattheriyā anārocetvāva palāyiṃsu. Therī paccūsasamaye – ‘‘ativiya appanigghoso gāmo, upadhāretha tāvā’’ti daharabhikkhuniyo āha. Tā gantvā sabbesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ ñatvā āgamma theriyā ārocesuṃ. Sā sutvā ‘‘mā tumhe tesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ cintayittha, attano uddesaparipucchāyonisomanasikāresuyeva yogaṃ karothā’’ti vatvā bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ pārupitvā attadvādasamā gāmadvāre nigrodhamūle aṭṭhāsi. Rukkhe adhivatthādevatā dvādasannampi bhikkhunīnaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ datvā ‘‘ayye, mā aññattha gacchatha, niccaṃ idheva ethā’’ti āha. Theriyā pana kaniṭṭhabhātā nāgatthero nāma atthi, so – ‘‘mahantaṃ bhayaṃ, na sakkā idha yāpetuṃ, paratīraṃ gamissāmī’’ti attadvādasamova attano vasanaṭṭhānā nikkhanto theriṃ disvā gamissāmīti bhātaragāmaṃ āgato. Therī – ‘‘therā āgatā’’ti sutvā tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā kiṃ ayyāti pucchi. So taṃ pavattiṃ ācikkhi. Sā – ‘‘ajja ekadivasaṃ vihāreyeva vasitvā sve gamissathā’’ti āha. Therā vihāraṃ agamaṃsu.
长老尼第二天在树下乞食后,走到长老面前说:“请用这份钵食。”长老说:“长老尼,够了吧。”说完就沉默地站着。长老尼说:“孩子,这是如法得来的钵食,不要有顾虑,请用吧。”长老还是说:“长老尼,够了吧。”长老尼便拿起钵,向空中抛去,钵停在了半空中。长老说:“就算停在七多罗树那么高的地方,这终究还是比丘尼的食物。”接着又说:“恐惧并不是任何时候都存在的。等恐惧平息下来,我讲到圣种的时候,心里会这样指责:‘喂,行乞食者,你当初是靠吃比丘尼的食物过活的。’我承受不了这样的指责。长老尼们,你们不要放逸。”说完就上路了。巴利
Therī punadivase rukkhamūle piṇḍāya caritvā theraṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘imaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti āha. Thero – ‘‘vaṭṭissati therī’’ti vatvā tuṇhī aṭṭhāsi. Dhammiko tāta piṇḍapāto , kukkuccaṃ akatvā paribhuñjathāti. ‘‘Vaṭṭissati therī’’ti. Sā pattaṃ gahetvā ākāse khipi. Patto ākāse aṭṭhāsi. Thero – ‘‘sattatālamatte ṭhitampi bhikkhunibhattameva therī’’ti vatvā – ‘‘bhayaṃ nāma sabbakālaṃ na hoti, bhaye vūpasante ariyavaṃsaṃ kathayamāno, ‘bho piṇḍapātika, bhikkhunibhattaṃ bhuñjitvā vītināmayitthā’ti cittena anuvadiyamāno santhambhetuṃ na sakkhissāmi, appamattā hotha theriyo’’ti maggaṃ āruhi.
树神也在心里盘算:如果这位长老吃下长老尼亲手给的团食,我就不拦他;如果他不吃,我就把他拦回来。她这样想着站在那里,看见长老要走,就从树上下来,说:尊者,把钵给我。她接过钵,把长老带回那棵榕树底下,铺好座位,供养团食,等长老吃完饭,请他给了承诺,然后连续七年照料十二位比丘尼和十二位比丘。这就是“天神热心操办”那句话的出处。在那里,那位长老尼正是圆满和合法的人。巴利
Rukkhadevatāpi – ‘‘sace thero theriyā hatthato piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjissati, na naṃ nivattessāmi. Sace na paribhuñjissati, nivattessāmī’’ti cintayamānā ṭhatvā therassa gamanaṃ disvā rukkhā oruyha pattaṃ, bhante, dethāti pattaṃ gahetvā theraṃ rukkhamūlaṃyeva ānetvā āsanaṃ paññapetvā piṇḍapātaṃ datvā katabhattakiccaṃ paṭiññaṃ kāretvā dvādasa bhikkhuniyo dvādasa bhikkhū ca sattavassāni upaṭṭhahi. Idaṃ – ‘‘devatā ussukkaṃ āpajjantī’’ti ettha vatthu. Tatra hi therī sāraṇīyadhammapūrikā ahosi.
在“不破”等说法中:如果一个人在七种犯戒类别里,最初或最后一条学处破了,他的戒就像衣服边缘裂开一样,叫作“破”。如果是在中间破了,他的戒就像衣服中间破了个洞一样,叫作“穿”。如果接连破了两三条,他的戒就像一头背或肚子上长出一块异色斑的黑牛、红牛等某一种颜色的牛一样,叫作“斑”。如果是一条一条间隔着破,就像一头牛身上散布着不同颜色的斑点,叫作“驳”。如果对所有戒条完全没有违犯,这些戒就叫作“不破、不穿、不斑、不驳”。这些戒能把人从渴爱的奴役中解放出来,使人获得自由,所以叫“自由”;因为是佛等智者所赞叹的,所以叫“智者所赞叹”;因为不被渴爱和邪见执取,谁也没法抓着说“你以前犯过这条”,所以叫“无可执取”;因为它们能导向近行定或安止定,所以说它们“能成就定”。巴利
Akhaṇḍānītiādīsu yassa sattasu āpattikkhandhesu ādimhi vā ante vā sikkhāpadaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti, tassa sīlaṃ pariyante chinnasāṭako viya khaṇḍaṃ nāma. Yassa pana vemajjhe bhinnaṃ, tassa majjhe chiddasāṭako viya chiddaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa pana paṭipāṭiyā dve tīṇi bhinnāni, tassa piṭṭhiyaṃ vā kucchiyaṃ vā uṭṭhitena visabhāgavaṇṇena kāḷarattādīnaṃ aññataravaṇṇā gāvī viya sabalaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa pana antarantarā visabhāgabinducitrā gāvī viya kammāsaṃ nāma hoti. Yassa pana sabbenasabbaṃ abhinnāni, tassa tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni nāma honti. Tāni panetāni taṇhādāsabyato mocetvā bhujissabhāvakaraṇato bhujissāni. Buddhādīhi viññūhi pasatthattā viññupasatthāni, taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattā – ‘‘idaṃ nāma tvaṃ āpannapubbo’’ti kenaci parāmaṭṭhuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā ca aparāmaṭṭhāni, upacārasamādhiṃ vā appanāsamādhiṃ vā saṃvattayantīti samādhisaṃvattanikānīti vuccanti.
他们将会以戒的同等性而共住。也就是说,他们会与那些住在各个地方的比丘们一起,安住在同等一致的戒中。因为,入流者等圣者的戒,即使他们住在大洋彼岸,或者住在天界,与其他入流者等圣者的戒也是完全同等的;在道戒上,不存在任何差异。这句话就是针对这个意思而说的。巴利
Sīlasāmaññagatāviharissantīti tesu tesu disābhāgesu viharantehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ samānabhāvūpagatasīlā viharissanti. Sotāpannādīnañhi sīlaṃ samuddantarepi devalokepi vasantānaṃ aññesaṃ sotāpannādīnaṃ sīlena samānameva hoti, natthi maggasīle nānattaṃ. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
这里说的“这种见”,就是指和圣道相应的正见。“圣”是说没有过失。“能出离”是说它具有导向解脱的性质。“如此实行的人”,是指照着这样去做的人。“为了灭尽一切苦”,就是为了灭尽一切苦。“达到同一种见”是指达到相同的见的状态之后而安住。所谓“只有增长”,是说这样安住的比丘们,只可以期待增长,不会退减。巴利
Yāyaṃdiṭṭhīti maggasampayuttā sammādiṭṭhi. Ariyāti niddosā. Niyyātīti niyyānikā. Takkarassāti yo tathākārī hoti. Sabbadukkhakkhayāyāti sabbadukkhakkhayatthaṃ. Diṭṭhisāmaññagatāti samānadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ upagatā hutvā viharissanti. Vuddhiyevāti evaṃ viharantānaṃ vuddhiyeva bhikkhūnaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānīti.
142 “就以这为多”:因为临近般涅槃,佛陀在教诫比丘们时,便一再只作这样的法谈。所谓“戒”,就是这样的戒,就是这种程度的戒。在这里应当理解:四遍清净戒是戒,心一境性是定,观慧是慧。在“戒所修习”等说法中,安住于某种戒而成就道定和果定,那个定就是由那种戒所修习的,因此有大果报、大利益;安住于某种定而成就道慧和果慧,那个慧就是由那种定所修习的,因此有大果报、大利益;安住于某种慧而成就道心和果心,那个心就是由那种慧所修习的,从而能正确地从一切烦恼中解脱。巴利
142.Etadeva bahulanti āsannaparinibbānattā bhikkhu ovadanto punappunaṃ etaṃyeva dhammiṃ kathaṃ karoti. Iti sīlanti evaṃ sīlaṃ, ettakaṃ sīlaṃ. Ettha catupārisuddhisīlaṃ sīlaṃ cittekaggatā samādhi, vipassanāpaññā paññāti veditabbā. Sīlaparibhāvitoti ādīsu yasmiṃ sīle ṭhatvāva maggasamādhiṃ phalasamādhiṃ nibbattenti. Eso tena sīlena paribhāvito mahapphalo hoti, mahānisaṃso. Yamhi samādhimhi ṭhatvā maggapaññaṃ phalapaññaṃ nibbattenti, sā tena samādhinā paribhāvitā mahapphalā hoti, mahānisaṃsā. Yāya paññāya ṭhatvā maggacittaṃ phalacittaṃ nibbattenti, taṃ tāya paribhāvitaṃ sammadeva āsavehi vimuccati.
“随其所乐”:诸佛并没有所谓的不高兴或不安,这里只是说随其所欲、随其意乐而已。“来吧”:来吧,我们走。也有读作“ayāma”的,意思是“我们去”。“阿难”:世尊因为他是近侍,所以这样称呼长老。而长老则对诸比丘说道:“诸位尊者,请拿好衣钵,世尊想去某个地方。”巴利
Yathābhirantanti buddhānaṃ anabhiratiparitassitaṃ nāma natthi, yathāruci yathāajjhāsayanti pana vuttaṃ hoti. Āyāmāti ehi yāma. ‘‘Ayāmā’’tipi pāṭho, gacchāmāti attho. Ānandāti bhagavā santikāvacarattā theraṃ ālapati. Thero pana – ‘‘gaṇhathāvuso pattacīvarāni, bhagavā asukaṭṭhānaṃ gantukāmo’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ āroceti.
144 前往芒果苗圃这件事本身很清楚。至于“那时,具寿舍利弗”等语(见《长部》3.141),在《清净信经》中已有详细说明。巴利
144.Ambalaṭṭhikāgamanaṃ uttānameva. Atha kho āyasmā sāriputtotiādi (dī. ni. 3.141) sampasādanīye vitthāritaṃ.
破戒者的过患注释巴利
Dussīlaādīnavavaṇṇanā
148 148. 在帕塔利伽马的住所厅堂,是指接待来客的住处。据说,在帕塔利伽马村,经常有两位国王的朋友们到来,把各家的人从屋子里赶出去,一住就是一个月或半个月。那些居民常常受到侵扰,心想:“他们来的时候,得有个住的地方。”于是就在城中央建了一座大礼堂,在一个地方存放物品,在另一个地方安排住宿。他们一听说“世尊来了”,就想:“我们本该去把世尊请来,可世尊自己已经来到我们住的地方了。今天我们要请世尊在那住所里诵说吉祥。”他们正是为了这件事才前去拜见,所以才那样说。“走向那住所厅堂”:据说,他们不知道世尊的心意——佛陀们一向喜欢住在林中,以林中为乐,不知道世尊是否愿意住在村落里——所以没有事先打扫住所厅堂就来了。现在知道了世尊的心意,他们心想“我们先去准备一下”,就朝那住所厅堂走去。“一切敷设”:就像要把一切都铺满一样,铺了开来。巴利
148. Pāṭaligamane āvasathāgāranti āgantukānaṃ āvasathagehaṃ. Pāṭaligāme kira niccakālaṃ dvinnaṃ rājūnaṃ sahāyakā āgantvā kulāni gehato nīharitvā māsampi aḍḍhamāsampi vasanti. Te manussā niccupaddutā – ‘‘etesaṃ āgatakāle vasanaṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti nagaramajjhe mahatiṃ sālaṃ karitvā tassā ekasmiṃ padese bhaṇḍapaṭisāmanaṭṭhānaṃ, ekasmiṃ padese nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ akaṃsu. Te – ‘‘bhagavā āgato’’ti sutvāva – ‘‘amhehi gantvāpi bhagavā ānetabbo siyā, so sayameva amhākaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ sampatto, ajja bhagavantaṃ āvasathe maṅgalaṃ vadāpessāmā’’ti etadatthameva upasaṅkamantā. Tasmā evamāhaṃsu. Yena āvasathāgāranti te kira – ‘‘buddhā nāma araññajjhāsayā araññārāmā antogāme vasituṃ iccheyyuṃ vā no vā’’ti bhagavato manaṃ ajānantā āvasathāgāraṃ appaṭijaggitvāva āgamaṃsu. Idāni bhagavato manaṃ ñatvā puretaraṃ gantvā paṭijaggissāmāti yenāvasathāgāraṃ, tenupasaṅkamiṃsu. Sabbasantharinti yathā sabbaṃ santhataṃ hoti, evaṃ santhariṃ.
149 无戒者,就是没有戒、不持戒。戒坏者,就是戒已败坏、律仪破损。以放逸为因,就是由放逸所导致。巴利
149.Dussīloti asīlo nissīlo. Sīlavipannoti vipannasīlo bhinnasaṃvaro. Pamādādhikaraṇanti pamādakāraṇā.
这部经虽然是依在家人的情况而说的,但对出家人也同样适用。在家人不管靠哪种技艺谋生——不管是种田还是经商——一旦因为杀生等事而放逸懈怠,就不能按时完成该做的事,连本钱也会赔光。如果在不该杀生的时候杀生,又做不与取等事,就会受到刑罚,遭受巨大的财产损失。而出家人如果破戒,也会因为放逸,在戒、佛语、禅那和七圣财上遭受损失。巴利
Idañca suttaṃ gahaṭṭhānaṃ vasena āgataṃ pabbajitānampi pana labbhateva. Gahaṭṭho hi yena yena sippaṭṭhānena jīvitaṃ kappeti – yadi kasiyā, yadi vaṇijjāya, pāṇātipātādivasena pamatto taṃ taṃ yathākālaṃ sampādetuṃ na sakkoti, athassa mūlampi vinassati. Māghātakāle pāṇātipātaṃ pana adinnādānādīni ca karonto daṇḍavasena mahatiṃ bhogajāniṃ nigacchati. Pabbajito dussīlo ca pamādakāraṇā sīlato buddhavacanato jhānato sattaariyadhanato ca jāniṃ nigacchati.
在家人会被人在四众当中传开这样的坏名声:“某某人生在某族,破戒、品行恶劣,把今生和来世都抛弃了,连一勺饭都不肯布施。”出家人也一样会被传开这样的坏名声:“某某人守不住戒,学不会佛陀的教法,靠行医之类的手段过活,还具备六种不敬。”巴利
Gahaṭṭhassa – ‘‘asuko nāma asukakule jāto dussīlo pāpadhammo pariccattaidhalokaparaloko salākabhattamattampi na detī’’ti catuparisamajjhe pāpako kittisaddo abbhuggacchati. Pabbajitassa vā – ‘‘asuko nāma nāsakkhi sīlaṃ rakkhituṃ, na buddhavacanaṃ uggahetuṃ, vejjakammādīhi jīvati, chahi agāravehi samannāgato’’ti evaṃ abbhuggacchati.
没有自信的人,先说在家人:他会想“众人聚集的地方,一定有人知道我的所作所为,然后就会责骂我”,或者想“一定会向王族告发我”。于是他心怀恐惧地走近,羞愧地垂着肩、低着头,用指头在地上划来划去地坐着,没办法有自信地说话。出家人也一样:他会想“很多比丘聚集在一起,一定有人知道我的所作所为,到时候就会取消我的伍波萨他和自恣,把我从沙门身份中赶出去、驱逐出去”。于是他心怀恐惧地走近,没办法有自信地说话。不过,有些人即使破了戒,也表现得好像很了不起一样到处走动,但这样的人内心其实还是羞愧的。巴利
Avisāradoti gahaṭṭho tāva – ‘‘avassaṃ bahūnaṃ sannipātaṭṭhāne keci mama kammaṃ jānissanti, atha maṃ niggaṇhissantī’’ti vā, ‘‘rājakulassa vā dassantī’’ti sabhayo upasaṅkamati, maṅkubhūto pattakkhandho adhomukho aṅgulikena bhūmiṃ kasanto nisīdati, visārado hutvā kathetuṃ na sakkoti. Pabbajitopi – ‘‘bahū bhikkhū sannipatitā, avassaṃ koci mama kammaṃ jānissati, atha me uposathampi pavāraṇampi ṭhapetvā sāmaññato cāvetvā nikkaḍḍhissantī’’ti sabhayo upasaṅkamati, visārado hutvā kathetuṃ na sakkoti. Ekacco pana dussīlopi dappito viya vicarati, sopi ajjhāsayena maṅku hotiyeva.
迷乱而死:因为那个破戒的人躺在临终的床上时,他过去造作不善业的地方会浮现在眼前。他睁开眼睛,看到这个世界;闭上眼睛,看到另一个世界。四种苦界的景象同时出现在他面前,就像头部被一百支矛刺穿一样。他大声喊着“挡住!挡住!”就这样死去。因此说“迷乱而死”。第五句的意思很清楚。巴利
Sammūḷho kālaṅkarotīti tassa hi maraṇamañce nipannassa dussīlakamme samādāya pavattitaṭṭhānaṃ āpāthamāgacchati, so ummīletvā idhalokaṃ passati, nimīletvā paralokaṃ passati , tassa cattāro apāyā upaṭṭhahanti, sattisatena sīse pahariyamāno viya hoti. So – ‘‘vāretha, vārethā’’ti viravanto marati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sammūḷho kālaṃ karotī’’ti. Pañcamapadaṃ uttānameva.
150 功德论应当依照前面所说过失的相反方式来理解。巴利
150.Ānisaṃsakathā vuttavipariyāyena veditabbā.
151 世尊用大半夜时间,以脱离巴利圣典的法谈和随喜住处的开示,就像把天上的恒河引下来,又像把一由旬大的蜜团压榨出来给人喝蜜汁一样,开示、令大众欢喜之后,才让他们离去。“已逝去”是指已经过去、已经灭尽,进入了消亡坏灭的状态。“空寂之处”:并不是另外有一间单独叫“空寂之处”的屋子,而是在那个地方,他们用布幔把一边围起来,铺好卧具,心想:“世尊要在这里休息。”世尊想:“如果他们以四种威仪受用这地方,将会有大果报。”于是就在那里作狮子卧。针对这件事,才说“进入空寂之处”。巴利
151.Bahudeva rattiṃ dhammiyā kathāyāti aññāya pāḷimuttakāya dhammikathāya ceva āvasathānumodanāya ca ākāsagaṅgaṃ otārento viya yojanappamāṇaṃ mahāmadhuṃ pīḷetvā madhupānaṃ pāyento viya bahudeva rattiṃ sandassetvā sampahaṃsetvā uyyojesi. Abhikkantāti atikkantā khīṇā khayavayaṃ upetā. Suññāgāranti pāṭiyekkaṃ suññāgāraṃ nāma natthi, tattheva pana ekapasse sāṇipākārena parikkhipitvā – ‘‘idha satthā vissamissatī’’ti mañcakaṃ paññapesuṃ. Bhagavā – ‘‘catūhipi iriyāpathehi paribhuttaṃ etesaṃ mahapphalaṃ bhavissatī’’ti tattha sīhaseyyaṃ kappesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘suññāgāraṃ pāvisī’’ti.
建造华氏城的注释巴利
Pāṭaliputtanagaramāpanavaṇṇanā
152 孙尼陀和瓦萨咖拉,是两位婆罗门。摩揭陀大臣,是指摩揭陀王的大臣、大辅相;或者是指在摩揭陀国中拥有强大权势的大臣,所以叫摩揭陀大臣。在巴咤厘村建城,意思是把巴咤厘村建成一座城市。为了阻挡跋耆族,是为了切断跋耆王族的财源。以千为单位,是按每一组一千人的方式,组成一个个千人单位。宅地,指房屋的地基。他们的心倾向于建造住所,意思是那些懂得宅地术的人,心里倾向于为国王和王室大臣们勘察建造住所。据说他们凭着自己的技艺,能看透地下约三十肘深的地方,知道这里有龙占据、这里有夜叉占据、这里有鬼占据,或者这里有岩石、有树桩。他们那时念诵技艺咒语,像是和天神商量着一样来建造。另一种说法是,天神进入他们的身体,使他们的心倾向于在各个地方建造住所。天神们在四个角打下木桩,宅地刚一确定,就离开了。对于有信仰的家庭,有信仰的天神会这样做;对于没有信仰的家庭,没有信仰的天神也会这样做。什么原因呢?因为有信仰的天神会这样想:这里的人们建好住所后,会先请比丘僧团坐下接受供养,然后举行祈福仪式。那时我们就能见到有戒德的人,听法谈,听问答,听随喜。人们布施后,会把功德回向给我们。巴利
152.Sunidhavassakārāti sunidho ca vassakāro ca dve brāhmaṇā. Magadhamahāmattāti magadharañño mahāmattā mahāamaccā, magadharaṭṭhe vā mahāmattā mahatiyā issariyamattāya samannāgatāti magadhamahāmattā. Pāṭaligāme nagaranti pāṭaligāmaṃ nagaraṃ katvā māpenti. Vajjīnaṃ paṭibāhāyāti vajjirājakulānaṃ āyamukhapacchindanatthaṃ. Sahassevāti ekekavaggavasena sahassaṃ sahassaṃ hutvā. Vatthūnīti gharavatthūni. Cittāni namanti nivesanāni māpetunti raññañca rājamahāmattānañca nivesanāni māpetuṃ vatthuvijjāpāṭhakānaṃ cittāni namanti. Te kira attano sippānubhāvena heṭṭhā pathaviyaṃ tiṃsahatthamatte ṭhāne – ‘‘idha nāgaggāho, idha yakkhaggāho, idha bhūtaggāho, pāsāṇo vā khāṇuko vā atthī’’ti passanti. Te tadā sippaṃ jappitvā devatāhi saddhiṃ mantayamānā viya māpenti. Athavā nesaṃ sarīre devatā adhimuccitvā tattha tattha nivesanāni māpetuṃ cittaṃ nāmenti. Tā catūsu koṇesu khāṇuke koṭṭetvā vatthumhi gahitamatte paṭivigacchanti. Saddhānaṃ kulānaṃ saddhā devatā tathā karonti, assaddhānaṃ kulānaṃ assaddhā devatāva. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Saddhānañhi evaṃ hoti – ‘‘idha manussā nivesanaṃ māpetvā paṭhamaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nisīdāpetvā maṅgalaṃ vaḍḍhāpessanti. Atha mayaṃ sīlavantānaṃ dassanaṃ, dhammakathaṃ, pañhāvissajjanaṃ , anumodanañca sotuṃ labhissāma, manussā dānaṃ datvā amhākaṃ pattiṃ dassantī’’ti.
“以三十三天”:就像在某个家族里,因为出了一个有智慧的人,或者在某个精舍里,因为有一位多闻的比丘,于是就会传出名声说“某某家族的人有智慧”“某某精舍的比丘多闻”。同样地,因为有了帝释天王和毗首羯磨天子,就传出了“三十三天有智慧”的名声。因此说“以三十三天”。意思是,他们建造时,简直就像跟三十三天的天神们商量过一样。巴利
Tāvatiṃsehīti yathā hi ekasmiṃ kule ekaṃ paṇḍitamanussaṃ, ekasmiṃ vā vihāre ekaṃ bahussutabhikkhuṃ upādāya – ‘‘asukakule manussā paṇḍitā, asukavihāre bhikkhū bahussutā’’ti saddo abbhuggacchati, evameva sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ vissakammañca devaputtaṃ upādāya – ‘‘tāvatiṃsā paṇḍitā’’ti saddo abbhuggato. Tenāha – ‘‘tāvatiṃsehī’’ti. Tāvatiṃsehi saddhiṃ mantetvāpi viya māpentīti attho.
所谓“圣者之处”,指的是圣者们聚集的地方,不论这样的地方有多少。所谓“商路”,指的是商人们把运来的货物成堆摆放、进行买卖交易的地方,或者商人居住的地方,不论这样的地方有多少。在那些圣者之处和商路当中,这座城将是最上等、最领先、最出众的——这就是“此为首要之城”的意思。解开包裹,指的是解开货物包裹的地方,也就是卸下货物包的地方。整个赡部洲都找不到的货物,在这里就能买到;在别处卖不出去、也行不通的货物,在这里就能卖出去。所以说,就在这里解开包裹。这是在说明,四座城门加上集会堂,每天会有五十万起交易活动。巴利
Yāvatā ariyaṃ āyatananti yattakaṃ ariyakamanussānaṃ osaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ nāma atthi. Yāvatā vaṇippathoti yattakaṃ vāṇijānaṃ ābhatabhaṇḍassa rāsivaseneva kayavikkayaṭṭhānaṃ nāma, vāṇijānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vā atthi. Idaṃ agganagaranti tesaṃ ariyāyatanavaṇippathānaṃ idaṃ agganagaraṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ pāmokkhaṃ bhavissatīti. Puṭabhedananti bhaṇḍapuṭabhedanaṭṭhānaṃ, bhaṇḍabhaṇḍikānaṃ mocanaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sakalajambudīpe aladdhabhaṇḍampi hi idheva labhissanti, aññattha vikkayena agacchantampi ca idheva gamissati. Tasmā idheva puṭaṃ bhindissantīti attho. Catūsu hi dvāresu cattāri sabhāyaṃ ekanti evaṃ divase divase pañcasatasahassāni uṭṭhahissantīti dasseti.
在“从火等”这一句里,“或”这个字是“和”的意思。意思是:这座城会被火、水和内讧一起毁掉。一部分会被火烧毁,人们没法把它扑灭;一部分会被恒河冲走;还有一部分,则是因为人们互相挑拨离间——“他把这人没说过的话告诉那人,又把那人没说过的话告诉这人”——彼此分裂、互相争斗而毁灭。世尊说完这些之后,在黎明时分来到恒河岸边,洗了脸,坐下来等待乞食的时间。巴利
Aggito vātiādīsu cakārattho vā-saddo. Agginā ca udakena ca mithubhedena ca nassissatīti attho. Ekakoṭṭhāso agginā nassissati, nibbāpetuṃ na sakkhissanti. Ekaṃ gaṅgā gahetvā gamissati. Eko – ‘‘iminā akathitaṃ amussa, amunā akathitaṃ imassā’’ti vadantānaṃ pisuṇavācānaṃ vasena bhinnānaṃ manussānaṃ aññamaññabhedeneva nassissatīti attho. Iti vatvā bhagavā paccūsakāle gaṅgāya tīraṃ gantvā katamukhadhovano bhikkhācāravelaṃ āgamayamāno nisīdi.
153 孙尼陀和雨行两人心想:“我们的国王是沙门乔达摩的侍者,他一定会问我们:‘听说导师去了巴咤厘村,你们有没有去他跟前拜访?’如果我们回答‘去了’,他又会追问:‘你们有没有邀请他?’如果我们说‘没有邀请’,他就会把过错推到我们头上,惩罚我们。而且我们正在这里建城,而沙门乔达摩所到之处,那些凶恶的夜叉都会退避。不如我们请他为我们这座新城祈福吧。”他们这样想好之后,就去拜见导师,向他发出了邀请。所以经文里说:“那时,孙尼陀和雨行……”巴利
153. Sunidhavassakārāpi – ‘‘amhākaṃ rājā samaṇassa gotamassa upaṭṭhāko, so amhe pucchissati, ‘satthā kira pāṭaligāmaṃ agamāsi, tassa santikaṃ upasaṅkamittha, na upasaṅkamitthā’ti. Upasaṅkamimhāti ca vutte – ‘nimantayittha, na nimantayitthā’ti ca pucchissati. Na nimantayimhāti ca vutte amhākaṃ dosaṃ āropetvā niggaṇhissati. Idaṃ cāpi mayaṃ āgataṭṭhāne nagaraṃ māpema, samaṇassa kho pana gotamassa gatagataṭṭhāne kāḷakaṇṇisattā paṭikkamanti, taṃ mayaṃ nagaramaṅgalaṃ vadāpessāmā’’ti cintetvā satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā nimantayiṃsu. Tasmā – ‘‘atha kho sunidhavassakārā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
上午时分就是上午的时候。穿好下衣,是指按照进村时应有的仪容穿好下衣、系好腰带。拿起钵和袈裟,是指把钵和袈裟拿起来,系带在身上。巴利
Pubbaṇhasamayanti pubbaṇhakāle. Nivāsetvāti gāmappavesananīhārena nivāsanaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā. Pattacīvaramādāyāti pattañca cīvarañca ādiyitvā kāyappaṭibaddhaṃ katvā.
这里说到“具戒者”,就是指在此处的持戒之人。“自制”是指以身、语、意三方面约束自己。巴利
Sīlavantetthāti sīlavante ettha. Saññateti kāyavācāmanehi saññate.
把供养僧团所得的四资具回向给那些家宅女神,就是把功德分给她们。受到供养的女神也会回报供养:她们会想“这些人虽然不是我们的亲戚,却还是把功德分给我们”,于是好好守护、用心保护。受到恭敬的女神也会回报恭敬:人们按时按节为她们做供养,她们因此受到恭敬,便想“这些人虽然不是我们的亲戚,却每隔四个月或六个月就为我们做供养”,于是对人们表示敬意;这些心怀敬意的女神会消除已经生起的危难。巴利
Tāsaṃdakkhiṇamādiyeti saṅghassa dinne cattāro paccaye tāsaṃ gharadevatānaṃ ādiseyya, pattiṃ dadeyya. Pūjitā pūjayantīti – ‘‘ime manussā amhākaṃ ñātakāpi na honti, evampi no pattiṃ dentī’’ti ārakkhaṃ susaṃvihitaṃ karothāti suṭṭhu ārakkhaṃ karonti. Mānitā mānayantīti kālānukālaṃ balikammakaraṇena mānitā ‘‘ete manussā amhākaṃ ñātakāpi na honti, catumāsachamāsantare no balikammaṃ karontī’’ti mānenti, mānentiyo uppannaṃ parissayaṃ haranti.
从此,那位生来就有智慧的人。亲生,是指放在胸前养育长大的,就像母亲疼爱亲生的儿子,为了消除他遇到的危险而尽心尽力;这样疼爱,这就是这里的含义。见到吉祥,就是见到美好的事物。巴利
Tato nanti tato naṃ paṇḍitajātikaṃ manussaṃ. Orasanti ure ṭhapetvā saṃvaḍḍhitaṃ, yathā mātā orasaṃ puttaṃ anukampati, uppannaparissayaharaṇatthameva tassa vāyamati, evaṃ anukampantīti attho. Bhadrāni passatīti sundarāni passati.
154 木船是为了渡到对岸,用木钉把板钉合起来做成的;小船则是用藤蔓等绑扎起来做成的。巴利
154.Uḷumpanti pāragamanatthāya āṇiyo koṭṭetvā kataṃ. Kullanti valliādīhi bandhitvā kataṃ.
在“那些渡海者”这首偈颂里,“海”最低限度是指深和广都达到一由旬的水域。这里说的“河”,指的是河流。这段话的意思是:那些渡过又深又广的渴爱之流的人,是靠圣道这座桥渡过去的;他们避开那些积水的低洼沼泽,不去碰触。而在这里,哪怕只是想渡过一小片水域的人,也还是要扎个筏子。但佛陀和佛弟子这些真正有智慧的人,根本不用筏子就已经渡过去了。巴利
‘‘Ye taranti aṇṇava’’nti gāthāya aṇṇavanti sabbantimena paricchedena yojanamattaṃ gambhīrassa ca puthulassa ca udakaṭṭhānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saranti idha nadī adhippetā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti, ye gambhīravitthataṃ taṇhāsaraṃ taranti, te ariyamaggasaṅkhātaṃ setuṃ katvāna. Visajja pallalāni anāmasitvā udakabharitāni ninnaṭṭhānāni. Ayaṃ pana idaṃ appamattakaṃ taritukāmopi kullañhi jano pabandhati. Buddhā ca buddhasāvakā ca vināyeva kullena tiṇṇā medhāvino janāti.
圣谛论的注释巴利
Ariyasaccakathāvaṇṇanā
155 “科提村”就是建在大光明王宫殿尽头的一个村子。“圣谛”就是能让人成为圣者的真理。“由于不觉悟”,是因为没有觉悟、没有知道。“由于不通达”,是因为没有通达。“流转”,是从一生到另一生不断地跑来跑去。“轮回”,是一次又一次地来来去去、反复轮转。“我和你们的”,就是由我以及由你们。或者也可以这样理解:流转和轮回,就是我与你们共同经历过的——这里的意思应当这样来理解。“引导存在之绳已被彻底断除”,意思是能够把人引向一生又一生投生的那根渴爱之绳,已经被彻底断掉、切断,不再起作用了。巴利
155.Koṭigāmoti mahāpanādassa pāsādakoṭiyaṃ katagāmo. Ariyasaccānanti ariyabhāvakarānaṃ saccānaṃ. Ananubodhāti abujjhanena ajānanena. Appaṭivedhāti appaṭivijjhanena. Sandhāvitanti bhavato bhavaṃ gamanavasena sandhāvitaṃ. Saṃsaritanti punappunaṃ gamanāgamanavasena saṃsaritaṃ. Mamañcevatumhākañcāti mayā ca tumhehi ca. Atha vā sandhāvitaṃ saṃsaritanti sandhāvanaṃ saṃsaraṇaṃ mamañceva tumhākañca ahosīti emamettha attho veditabbo. Bhavanetti samūhatāti bhavato bhavaṃ nayanasamatthā taṇhārajju suṭṭhu hatā chinnā appavattikatā.
不再退回、决定趣向正觉的注释巴利
Anāvattidhammasambodhiparāyaṇavaṇṇanā
156 那提迦:有两个村庄,分别依傍着一个小湖,一边属于小叔父的儿子们,一边属于大伯父的儿子们。在那提迦:指在其中一个亲属聚居的村里。在砖屋:指在一座砖砌的住处。巴利
156.Nātikāti ekaṃ taḷākaṃ nissāya dvinnaṃ cūḷapitumahāpituputtānaṃ dve gāmā. Nātiketi ekasmiṃ ñātigāmake. Giñjakāvasatheti iṭṭhakāmaye āvasathe.
157 下分结:是指属于下界的,只在欲界生命有中导致结生的。或者说,那些应当由三种名为“下分”的圣道所断除的,就是下分结。其中,欲贪和瞋恚这两种,如果没被禅定镇伏,或没被圣道断除,就会以再生的力量,让人无法向上前往色界生命有和无色界生命有。而身见等三种,则会把已经在那里再生的人又拉回来,让他们再次在这里结生。所以这五种全都是下分结。不还法:是指从结生来说,具有不再返回此界的性质。巴利
157.Orambhāgiyānanti heṭṭhābhāgiyānaṃ, kāmabhaveyeva paṭisandhiggāhāpakānanti attho. Oranti laddhanāmehi vā tīhi maggehi pahātabbānītipi orambhāgiyāni. Tattha kāmacchando, byāpādoti imāni dve samāpattiyā vā avikkhambhitāni, maggena vā asamucchinnāni nibbattavasena uddhaṃ bhāgaṃ rūpabhavañca arūpabhavañca gantuṃ na denti. Sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīni tīṇi tattha nibbattampi ānetvā puna idheva nibbattāpentīti sabbānipi orambhāgiyāneva. Anāvattidhammāti paṭisandhivasena anāgamanasabhāvā.
这里说“贪、嗔、痴变得薄弱”,应当从两方面来理解薄弱:一是它们只是偶尔才生起,二是它们现起时的缠缚力很弱。因为一来圣者的贪等烦恼不像凡夫那样频繁生起,只是偶尔才生起;而且即使生起,也不像凡夫那样粗重强烈,而是像苍蝇翅膀一样,生起得轻微细薄。不过,长部诵者三藏玛哈斯瓦长老这样说:“因为一来圣者还有儿女,还有妻妾,所以他的烦恼是粗重的。这里只是就‘有的薄弱’来说的。”然而,这种说法在义注中已被否定。因为义注中说:“对入流者来说,除了第七次有之外,在第八次有中不存在有的薄弱;对一来者来说,除了两次有之外,在五次有中不存在有的薄弱;对不来者来说,除了色界和无色界有之外,在欲界有中不存在有的薄弱;对漏尽者来说,在任何一种有中都不存在有的薄弱。”巴利
Rāgadosamohānaṃ tanuttāti ettha kadāci karahaci uppattiyā ca, pariyuṭṭhānamandatāya cāti dvedhāpi tanubhāvo veditabbo. Sakadāgāmissa hi puthujjanānaṃ viya abhiṇhaṃ rāgādayo nuppajjanti, kadāci karahaci uppajjanti. Uppajjamānā ca puthujjanānaṃ viya bahalabahalā nuppajjanti, makkhikāpattaṃ viya tanukatanukā uppajjanti. Dīghabhāṇakatipiṭakamahāsīvatthero panāha – ‘‘yasmā sakadāgāmissa puttadhītaro honti, orodhā ca honti, tasmā bahalā kilesā. Idaṃ pana bhavatanukavasena kathita’’nti. Taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ – ‘‘sotāpannassa sattabhave ṭhapetvā aṭṭhame bhave bhavatanukaṃ natthi. Sakadāgāmissa dve bhave ṭhapetvā pañcasu bhavesu bhavatanukaṃ natthi. Anāgāmissa rūpārūpabhave ṭhapetvā kāmabhave bhavatanukaṃ natthi. Khīṇāsavassa kismiñci bhave bhavatanukaṃ natthī’’ti vuttattā paṭikkhittaṃ hoti.
这里说的“这个世界”,指的是欲界世间。这里的用意是:如果有人在人间证得了一来果,死后投生到天界,然后在天界证悟阿拉汉果,这当然很好;但如果做不到,他必定会再回到人间来证悟。同样,如果有人在 天界证得了一来果,投生到人间后证悟阿拉汉果,这当然也很好;但如果做不到,他必定会再去天界证悟。巴利
Imaṃlokanti imaṃ kāmāvacaralokaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ayañcettha adhippāyo, sace hi manussesu sakadāgāmiphalaṃ patto devesu nibbattitvā arahattaṃ sacchikaroti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. Asakkonto pana avassaṃ manussalokaṃ āgantvā sacchikaroti. Devesu sakadāgāmiphalaṃ pattopi sace manussesu nibbattitvā arahattaṃ sacchikaroti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. Asakkonto pana avassaṃ devalokaṃ gantvā sacchikarotīti.
“不堕恶趣法”在这里的意思是:堕落就是堕落;他没有堕落的法,所以叫“不堕恶趣法”。意思是在四种恶趣中都不会堕落,具有在四种恶趣中不堕落的本质。“决定”是指依法的规律而决定。“必至正觉”是指以一来道、不还道、阿拉汉道这三种更高的道所说的正觉,是他最终的去处、归宿,是必定会证得的,所以叫“必至正觉”。巴利
Avinipātadhammoti ettha vinipatanaṃ vinipāto, nāssa vinipāto dhammoti avinipātadhammo. Catūsu apāyesu avinipātadhammo catūsu apāyesu avinipātasabhāvoti attho. Niyatoti dhammaniyāmena niyato. Sambodhiparāyaṇoti uparimaggattayasaṅkhātā sambodhi paraṃ ayanaṃ assa gati paṭisaraṇaṃ avassaṃ pattabbāti sambodhiparāyaṇo.
法镜法门注释巴利
Dhammādāsadhammapariyāyavaṇṇanā
158 恼害:当如来观察各类众生的智行、智生、智趣时,那只是身体的疲劳,阿难,这句话显示的就是这个意思;而诸佛并没有内心的恼害。法镜:就是法所构成的镜子。以此:就是具足此法镜。已尽恶趣、恶道、堕落:这是用同义词的方式来说明地狱等。地狱等之所以叫“苦界”,是因为离开了称为“增长”的“有”;是苦的去处和依止,所以叫“恶趣”;造恶的人在这里无力地堕落,所以叫“堕落”。巴利
158.Vihesāti tesaṃ tesaṃ ñāṇagatiṃ ñāṇūpapattiṃ ñāṇābhisamparāyaṃ olokentassa kāyakilamathova esa, ānanda, tathāgatassāti dīpeti, cittavihesā pana buddhānaṃ natthi. Dhammādāsanti dhammamayaṃ ādāsaṃ. Yenāti yena dhammādāsena samannāgato. Khīṇāpāyaduggativinipātoti idaṃ nirayādīnaṃyeva vevacanavasena vuttaṃ. Nirayādayo hi vaḍḍhisaṅkhātato ayato apetattā apāyā. Dukkhassa gati paṭisaraṇanti duggati. Ye dukkaṭakārino, te ettha vivasā nipatantīti vinipātā.
以不动摇的净信来说:因为如实了知佛陀的功德,所以生起不动摇、不退失的净信。上面两个词(对法和对僧的净信)也是这样。至于“他是世尊……”这些内容的详细解释,在《清净道论》中已经说过。巴利
Aveccappasādenāti buddhaguṇānaṃ yathābhūtato ñātattā acalena accutena pasādena. Upari padadvayepi eseva nayo. Itipi so bhagavātiādīnaṃ pana vitthāro visuddhimagge vutto.
圣者们所喜爱的:就是圣者们所喜爱、所珍爱、所悦意的。因为五戒是圣弟子们所喜爱的,即使转生到别的生命状态中也不会舍弃。这段话就是针对五戒说的。而且在这里,一切律仪也确实可得。巴利
Ariyakantehīti ariyānaṃ kantehi piyehi manāpehi. Pañca sīlāni hi ariyasāvakānaṃ kantāni honti, bhavantarepi avijahitabbato. Tāni sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Sabbopi panettha saṃvaro labbhatiyeva.
“我是入流者”这句话,只是开示的开头而已。一来者等也是用“我是一来者”这样的方式来自记的。其实对所有人来说,只要不与学处相违背,在合适的情况下自记,都是被允许的。巴利
Sotāpannohamasmīti idaṃ desanāsīsameva. Sakadāgāmiādayopi pana sakadāgāmīhamasmītiādinā nayena byākaronti yevāti. Sabbesampi hi sikkhāpadāvirodhena yuttaṭṭhāne byākaraṇaṃ anuññātameva hoti.
安巴巴利妓女的故事注释巴利
Ambapālīgaṇikāvatthuvaṇṇanā
161 “住在毗舍离”这一句,应当依据《犍度》中“那时,毗舍离确实丰裕、繁荣……”等所说的方式,来理解毗舍离的富足状况。“安巴巴利芒果园”,就是妓女安巴巴利所有的、像园林一样的芒果园。“具念的比丘们啊”,世尊为了在见到安巴巴利时能让正念现前,特别在这里开始讲说念处的教法。其中,“能忆念”就是具念;“能正知”就是正知。意思是:应当具足念与正知而安住。至于“于身,随观身”等应当解说的内容,我们将在《大念处》中说明。巴利
161.Vesāliyaṃviharatīti ettha tena kho pana samayena vesālī iddhā ceva hoti phītācātiādinā khandhake vuttanayena vesāliyā sampannabhāvo veditabbo. Ambapālivaneti ambapāliyā gaṇikāya uyyānabhūte ambavane. Sato bhikkhaveti bhagavā ambapālidassane satipaccupaṭṭhānatthaṃ visesato idha satipaṭṭhānadesanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha saratīti sato. Sampajānātīti sampajāno. Satiyā ca sampajaññena ca samannāgato hutvā vihareyyāti attho. Kāye kāyānupassītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhāne vakkhāma.
“青色”是总括的说法。“青色容貌”等则是进一步分类说明。这里并不是说他们本身的肤色是青色,而是因为涂了青色涂料才这么说。“青色衣服”:他们的布、丝绸等也都是青色的。“青色装饰”:用青宝石、青莲花装饰;他们的车也镶着青宝石、铺着青布、挂着青旗,配着青铠甲、青饰物、青马,连赶车的刺棒也是青色的。应当按这个方法理解各句的含义。“弹指”:就是拍击发声。“喂,安巴巴利!”中的“je”是呼唤语,意思是“尊敬的安巴巴利,是什么原因呢?”也有读作“kiñcā”的,意思相同。“带着国土者”:就是连同当地居民一起。“弹指”:就是动了动手指。“女人之身”:就是女身。巴利
Nīlāti idaṃ sabbasaṅgāhakaṃ. Nīlavaṇṇātiādi tasseva vibhāgadassanaṃ. Tattha na tesaṃ pakativaṇṇo nīlo, nīlavilepanavilittattā panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Nīlavatthāti paṭadukūlakoseyyādīnipi tesaṃ nīlāneva honti. Nīlālaṅkārāti nīlamaṇīhi nīlapupphehi alaṅkatā, rathāpi tesaṃ nīlamaṇikhacitā nīlavatthaparikkhittā nīladdhajā nīlavammikehi nīlābharaṇehi nīlaassehi yuttā, patodalaṭṭhiyopi nīlā yevāti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo. Parivaṭṭesīti pahari. Kiṃ je ambapālīti jeti ālapanavacanaṃ, bhoti ambapāli, kiṃ kāraṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Kiñcā’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevettha attho. Sāhāranti sajanapadaṃ. Aṅguliṃ phoṭesunti aṅguliṃ cālesuṃ. Ambakāyāti itthikāya.
“yesaṃ”这个词是表示具格的属格,意思是“没有被他们看见”。“看”就是观看。“遍看”就是一再地看。“联想”就是拿来比较。把这一群离车族人用心联想成跟三十三天一样,拉近、贴近、与之亲近。就像三十三天众极其美丽、端正,有青色等各种各样美妙的颜色,这些离车王族也是如此。意思是:把他们看作跟三十三天一样,然后去看。巴利
Yesanti karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, yehi adiṭṭhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Olokethāti passatha. Avalokethāti punappunaṃ passatha. Upasaṃharathāti upanetha. Imaṃ licchaviparisaṃ tumhākaṃ cittena tāvatiṃsasadisaṃ upasaṃharatha upanetha allīyāpetha. Yatheva tāvatiṃsā abhirūpā pāsādikā nīlādinānāvaṇṇā, evamime licchavirājānopīti tāvatiṃsehi samake katvā passathāti attho.
为什么世尊在成百上千部经里都禁止对眼等、对色等执取相,在这里却用这么大的力度鼓励执取相呢?这是出于想利益他们。据说,当时有些比丘精进力松懈了,世尊为了用成就来吸引他们,就说:“不放逸地修行沙门法的人,像这样的自在成就很容易就能得到。”这是为了激发他们在沙门法上的精进。同时也是为了显示无常相。因为过不了多久,这些人全都会因阿阇世王而走向毁灭。那时,在场的比丘们看到他们那种王国般的荣华成就,就会想:“连这样殊胜的荣华成就,也终将显出毁灭。”于是修习无常相,连同无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果。为了显示无常相,所以这样说。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavā anekasatehi suttehi cakkhādīnaṃ rūpādīsu nimittaggāhaṃ paṭisedhetvā idha mahantena ussāhena nimittaggāhe uyyojetīti? Hitakāmatāya. Tatra kira ekacce bhikkhū osannavīriyā, tesaṃ sampattiyā palobhento – ‘‘appamādena samaṇadhammaṃ karontānaṃ evarūpā issariyasampatti sulabhā’’ti samaṇadhamme ussāhajananatthaṃ āha. Aniccalakkhaṇavibhāvanatthañcāpi evamāha. Nacirasseva hi sabbepime ajātasattussa vasena vināsaṃ pāpuṇissanti. Atha nesaṃ rajjasirisampattiṃ disvā ṭhitabhikkhū – ‘‘tathārūpāyapi nāma sirisampattiyā vināso paññāyissatī’’ti aniccalakkhaṇaṃ bhāvetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇissantīti aniccalakkhaṇavibhāvanatthaṃ āha.
“请接受吧”:明明已经知道安巴巴利已经邀请了他们,为什么还要邀请呢?这一方面是因为不信任,另一方面也是随顺人们的惯常做法。因为那些比丘心里想:“她是个放荡的女人,就算没有邀请,也会说‘我邀请过了’。”另外,听完法之后,在要离开的时候先邀请再走,这本来就是人们的惯常做法。巴利
Adhivāsetūti ambapāliyā nimantitabhāvaṃ ñatvāpi kasmā nimantentīti? Asaddahanatāya ceva vattasīsena ca. Sā hi dhuttā itthī animantetvāpi nimantemīti vadeyyāti tesaṃ cittaṃ ahosi, dhammaṃ sutvā gamanakāle ca nimantetvā gamanaṃ nāma manussānaṃ vattameva.
竹林村入雨安居的注释巴利
Veḷuvagāmavassūpagamanavaṇṇanā
163 竹林村,就是毗舍离附近的一个叫竹林村的地方。“依朋友等”这几句里,“朋友”就是指朋友。“见过面的”是指在各处相遇、只是见过面、交情不算深的朋友。“亲密的人”是指彼此非常亲厚、有感情、交情很深的朋友。整句的意思是:无论在哪里,只要有这样的比丘,你们就到那些地方去入雨安居。为什么这样说呢?是为了让他们住得安稳舒适。因为竹林村那边住处不够,乞食也少;而毗舍离周围住处很多,乞食也容易得到,所以才这样说。那为什么不干脆说“你们随自己高兴去哪里”就把他们打发走呢?是出于对他们的慈悯。据说世尊是这样想的:“我再过大约十个月就要般涅槃了。如果这些比丘去了很远的地方,到我般涅槃的时候,他们就见不到我了。那时他们可能会后悔:‘导师般涅槃的时候,连让我们留意一下的机会都没给。要是早知道,我们就不会住到那么远的地方去了。’但如果他们住在毗舍离周围,每个月能来八次,听闻佛法,领受善逝的教导。”所以世尊没有把他们打发走。巴利
163.Veḷuvagāmakoti vesāliyā samīpe veḷuvagāmo. Yathāmittantiādīsu mittā mittāva. Sandiṭṭhāti tattha tattha saṅgamma diṭṭhamattā nātidaḷhamittā. Sambhattāti suṭṭhu bhattā sinehavanto daḷhamittā. Yesaṃ yesaṃ yattha yattha evarūpā bhikkhū atthi, te te tattha tattha vassaṃ upethāti attho. Kasmā evamāha? Tesaṃ phāsuvihāratthāya. Tesañhi veḷuvagāmake senāsanaṃ nappahoti, bhikkhāpi mandā. Samantā vesāliyā pana bahūni senāsanāni, bhikkhāpi sulabhā, tasmā evamāha. Atha kasmā – ‘‘yathāsukhaṃ gacchathā’’ti na vissajjesi? Tesaṃ anukampāya. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ahaṃ dasamāsamattaṃ ṭhatvā parinibbāyissāmi, sace ime dūraṃ gacchissanti, mama parinibbānakāle daṭṭhuṃ na sakkhissanti. Atha nesaṃ – ‘‘satthā parinibbāyanto amhākaṃ satimattampi na adāsi, sace jāneyyāma, evaṃ na dūre vaseyyāmā’’ti vippaṭisāro bhaveyya. Vesāliyā samantā pana vasantā māsassa aṭṭha vāre āgantvā dhammaṃ suṇissanti, sugatovādaṃ labhissantī’’ti na vissajjesi.
164 粗糙:就是粗恶。疾病:就是与体质不合的病。强烈:就是强而有力。近于死:就是能导致死亡、临近死亡。具念正知而忍受:就是安立正念,以智慧判别之后而忍受。不被恼害:就是不随感受辗转波动,不被逼迫,没有痛苦地忍受。未告知:就是没让他们知道。未辞别:就是没有告别,也就是说没有给予教诫。以精进:指前行精进和果等至精进。令其退去:就是镇伏。生命行:在这里,生命本身就是生命行;而能令将断的生命得以相续、维持的果等至法,也是生命行,这里指的就是后者。决意:就是作决定而令其持续,也就是令能维持生命的果等至生起。以上是这段话的简要意思。巴利
164.Kharoti pharuso. Ābādhoti visabhāgarogo. Bāḷhāti balavatiyo. Māraṇantikāti maraṇantaṃ maraṇasantikaṃ pāpanasamatthā. Sato sampajāno adhivāsesīti satiṃ sūpaṭṭhitaṃ katvā ñāṇena paricchinditvā adhivāsesi. Avihaññamānoti vedanānuvattanavasena aparāparaṃ parivattanaṃ akaronto apīḷiyamāno adukkhiyamānova adhivāsesi . Anāmantetvāti ajānāpetvā. Anapaloketvāti na apaloketvā ovādānusāsaniṃ adatvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vīriyenāti pubbabhāgavīriyena ceva phalasamāpattivīriyena ca. Paṭipaṇāmetvāti vikkhambhetvā. Jīvitasaṅkhāranti ettha jīvitampi jīvitasaṅkhāro. Yena jīvitaṃ saṅkhariyati chijjamānaṃ ghaṭetvā ṭhapiyati, so phalasamāpattidhammopi jīvitasaṅkhāro. So idha adhippeto. Adhiṭṭhāyāti adhiṭṭhahitvā pavattetvā, jīvitaṭṭhapanasamatthaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjeyyanti ayamettha saṅkhepattho.
那么,世尊在这之前不入果等至吗?他是入的。不过那是刹那等至。刹那等至只能在定中镇伏受,一旦出定,就像被棍棒或陶片拨开的水藻,水很快又重新覆盖上来一样,受又迅速遍满全身。但如果能把色七法和无色七法修得没有间隔、没有夹杂,以大观的力量进入等至,那就能很好地镇伏受。好比有人潜入池塘,用手和脚把水藻彻底拨开,水要过很久才会重新覆盖;同样,从这种等至出定后,受也要过很久才会生起。世尊在那一天,就像在大菩提座上现起崭新的观智一样,把色七法和无色七法修得没有间隔、没有夹杂,以十四种行相作意,用大观镇伏了受,然后决意:十个月内不要生起,随即进入等至。被等至镇伏的受,在十个月里确实没有生起。巴利
Kiṃ pana bhagavā ito pubbe phalasamāpattiṃ na samāpajjatīti? Samāpajjati. Sā pana khaṇikasamāpatti. Khaṇikasamāpatti ca antosamāpattiyaṃyeva vedanaṃ vikkhambheti, samāpattito vuṭṭhitamattassa kaṭṭhapātena vā kaṭhalapātena vā chinnasevālo viya udakaṃ puna sarīraṃ vedanā ajjhottharati. Yā pana rūpasattakaṃ arūpasattakañca niggumbaṃ nijjaṭaṃ katvā mahāvipassanāvasena samāpannā samāpatti, sā suṭṭhu vikkhambheti. Yathā nāma purisena pokkharaṇiṃ ogāhetvā hatthehi ca pādehi ca suṭṭhu apabyūḷho sevālo cirena udakaṃ ottharati; evameva tato vuṭṭhitassa cirena vedanā uppajjati. Iti bhagavā taṃ divasaṃ mahābodhipallaṅke abhinavavipassanaṃ paṭṭhapento viya rūpasattakaṃ arūpasattakaṃ niggumbaṃ nijjaṭaṃ katvā cuddasahākārehi sannetvā mahāvipassanāya vedanaṃ vikkhambhetvā – ‘‘dasamāse mā uppajjitthā’’ti samāpattiṃ samāpajji. Samāpattivikkhambhitā vedanā dasamāse na uppajji yeva.
病愈:生病之后又恢复了。像变成迟钝呆滞一样:身体变得沉重、僵硬,就像被穿在尖桩上的人一样。不显现:不清楚,不以种种相呈现。连诸法也不现前于我:意思是念处等诸法对我都不明朗。不过这位长老对经教法本其实极为纯熟。不说:他不给最后的教诫。就是针对这一点而说的。巴利
Gilānā vuṭṭhitoti gilāno hutvā puna vuṭṭhito. Madhurakajāto viyāti sañjātagarubhāvo sañjātathaddhabhāvo sūle uttāsitapuriso viya. Na pakkhāyantīti nappakāsanti, nānākārato na upaṭṭhahanti. Dhammāpi maṃ na paṭibhantīti satipaṭṭhānādidhammā mayhaṃ pākaṭā na hontīti dīpeti. Tantidhammā pana therassa supaguṇā. Na udāharatīti pacchimaṃ ovādaṃ na deti. Taṃ sandhāya vadati.
165 不分内外,是指不按法或按人来做内外之分。因为,当心里想“我不为别人说这么多法”时,就是把法当作内;心里想“我要为别人说这么多法”时,就是把法当作外。心里想“我要为这个人说法”时,就是把这个人当作内;心里想“我不为这个人说法”时,就是把这个人当作外。不这样区分而说法,就是这里的含义。老师的握拳:就像外道有所谓的“老师的握拳”——他们年轻时不对任何人讲说,到了晚年躺在临终床上,才对心爱的弟子讲说。这里是在显示,如来不会这样:不会想着“我要到老年、到最后时刻才说这个法”,把法握成拳头藏起来,心想“我要留着”。巴利
165.Anantaraṃabāhiranti dhammavasena vā puggalavasena vā ubhayaṃ akatvā. ‘‘Ettakaṃ dhammaṃ parassa na desessāmī’’ti hi cintento dhammaṃ abbhantaraṃ karoti nāma. ‘‘Ettakaṃ parassa desessāmī’’ti cintento dhammaṃ bāhiraṃ karoti nāma. ‘‘Imassa puggalassa desessāmī’’ti cintento pana puggalaṃ abbhantaraṃ karoti nāma. ‘‘Imassa na desessāmī’’ti cintento puggalaṃ bāhiraṃ karoti nāma. Evaṃ akatvā desitoti attho. Ācariyamuṭṭhīti yathā bāhirakānaṃ ācariyamuṭṭhi nāma hoti. Daharakāle kassaci akathetvā pacchimakāle maraṇamañce nipannā piyamanāpassa antevāsikassa kathenti, evaṃ tathāgatassa – ‘‘idaṃ mahallakakāle pacchimaṭṭhāne kathessāmī’’ti muṭṭhiṃ katvā ‘‘pariharissāmī’’ti ṭhapitaṃ kiñci natthīti dasseti.
“我比丘僧团”的意思是:要么是“我要亲自照顾比丘僧团”,要么是“以我为指示对象”——也就是“我应当被指示”,因此我就是“指示的对象”,所以叫“以我为指示对象”。意思是:或者只以我为指示、寄望于我,让比丘僧团这样存在;或者在我去世之后,他们就不存在了;或者不管怎样都行。“不会这样”:因为在菩提座上就已经断除了嫉妒和吝啬,所以不会这样想。“他怎样呢?他是什么?”“八十岁”就是年满八十,这是为了说明最后衰老阶段的到来。“靠维修”:就是用臂带、轮带等工具来修理,像修补旧车一样,靠绑缚维修勉强维持。这说明如来的行住坐卧四威仪,是靠阿拉汉果来维系的。巴利
Ahaṃbhikkhusaṅghanti ahameva bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pariharissāmīti vā mamuddesikoti ahaṃ uddisitabbaṭṭhena uddeso assāti mamuddesiko. Maṃyeva uddisitvā mama paccāsīsamāno bhikkhusaṅgho hotu, mama accayena vā mā ahesuṃ, yaṃ vā taṃ vā hotūti iti vā yassa assāti attho. Na evaṃ hotīti bodhipallaṅkeyeva issāmacchariyānaṃ vihatattā evaṃ na hoti. Sa kinti so kiṃ. Āsītikoti asītisaṃvacchariko. Idaṃ pacchimavayaanuppattabhāvadīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Veṭhamissakenāti bāhabandhacakkabandhādinā paṭisaṅkharaṇena veṭhamissakena. Maññeti jiṇṇasakaṭaṃ viya veṭhamissakena maññe yāpeti. Arahattaphalaveṭhanena catuiriyāpathakappanaṃ tathāgatassa hotīti dasseti.
现在要说明这段话的意思,于是诵出“阿难,于某时……”等语。其中,“一切相”是指色相等各种相。“某些受”是指世俗层面的受。“阿难,因此”:因为依靠这种果等至的安住而得到安乐,所以开示说:你们也应当为了这个目的而这样安住。“以自己为洲”:就像大海中的岛屿一样,以自己为洲、为依靠而安住。“以自己为皈依”:自己就是自己的皈依处,不要以别的为皈依处。在“以法为洲、以法为皈依”这些语句中,道理也是一样的。“最上者”:即“最上之最上”。中间有个“t”音,是依连音而说的。这里所说的是:“这些是最胜者,即‘最上者’。”如此断除一切“暗”的相应之后,阿难,我的这些比丘将处于极其殊胜、最上的状态中。他们将处于极其殊胜之中;凡是欲学戒者,全都以四念处为所行境,这些比丘将处于最上。以阿拉汉为顶峰来总结此教说。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ pakāsento yasmiṃ, ānanda, samayetiādimāha. Tattha sabbanimittānanti rūpanimittādīnaṃ. Ekaccānaṃ vedanānanti lokiyānaṃ vedanānaṃ. Tasmātihānandāti yasmā iminā phalasamāpattivihārena phāsu hoti, tasmā tumhepi tadatthāya evaṃ viharathāti dasseti. Attadīpāti mahāsamuddagatadīpaṃ viya attānaṃ dīpaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ katvā viharatha. Attasaraṇāti attagatikāva hotha, mā aññagatikā. Dhammadīpadhammasaraṇapadesupi eseva nayo. Tamataggeti tamaagge. Majjhe takāro padasandhivasena vutto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘ime aggatamāti tamataggā’’ti. Evaṃ sabbaṃ tamayogaṃ chinditvā ativiya agge uttamabhāve ete , ānanda , mama bhikkhū bhavissanti. Tesaṃ atiagge bhavissanti, ye keci sikkhākāmā, sabbepi te catusatipaṭṭhānagocarāva bhikkhū agge bhavissantīti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
《相与光明之说》的注释巴利
Nimittobhāsakathāvaṇṇanā
166 “进入毗舍离托钵”是在什么时候呢?是从乌迦切罗出发前往毗舍离的时候。据说,世尊雨安居结束后,从竹林村出发,心想“我要去舍卫城”,便沿着来时的路返回,次第到达舍卫城,进入祇园精舍。法将舍利弗侍奉世尊之后,去了日间住处。他在那里对弟子们作了教导,等他们告退后,打扫日间住处,铺上皮片,洗净双足,盘腿而坐,进入果定。从定中出来之后,他生起这样的念头:“是诸佛先般涅槃,还是上首弟子先般涅槃?”接着他知道:“是上首弟子先。”他观察自己的寿行,知道:“我的寿行只剩七天了。”便想:“我要在哪里般涅槃?”接着又想:“罗睺罗在三十三天已般涅槃,阿若憍陈如长老在六牙湖般涅槃,我要在哪里般涅槃呢?”再次思惟时,他缘念母亲,生起正念:“我的母亲虽然是七位阿拉汉的母亲,但对佛、法、僧三宝没有净信。她有没有证得道果的亲依止呢?还是没有呢?”观察之后,见到她有证得入流道的亲依止。又观察:“依谁的教说能令她通达?”发现:“唯有依靠我的教说才能通达,不是别人。但如果我不管这件事,就会有人说我:‘舍利弗长老对别人也是个依靠。比如在他讲平等心经那天,万亿天神证得阿拉汉果。已通达三道的天神数目无法计算。在其他场合也有许多通达的事例。那些只是对长老生起净信而投生天界的,就有八万户人家。可他现在连自己母亲的邪见都去除不了。’”因此,他下定决心:“我要先让母亲脱离邪见,就在我出生的房间里般涅槃。”于是想:“我今天就向世尊请求允许,然后出发。”便叫来春达长老:“贤友春达,请通知我们五百比丘众:‘贤友们,拿好衣钵吧,法将要去那拉咖村。’”长老照办了。比丘们收拾好住处,拿着衣钵来到长老身边。长老收拾好住处,打扫了日间住处,站在日间住处门口,看着日间住处,心想:“这是最后一次看它了,不会再回来了。”便由五百比丘围绕,前往世尊那里,顶礼之后,说了这番话——巴利
166.Vesāliṃ piṇḍāya pāvisīti kadā pāvisi? Ukkacelato nikkhamitvā vesāliṃ gatakāle. Bhagavā kira vuṭṭhavasso veḷuvagāmakā nikkhamitvā sāvatthiṃ gamissāmīti āgatamaggeneva paṭinivattanto anupubbena sāvatthiṃ patvā jetavanaṃ pāvisi. Dhammasenāpati bhagavato vattaṃ dassetvā divāṭṭhānaṃ gato. So tattha antevāsikesu vattaṃ dassetvā paṭikkantesu divāṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā cammakkhaṇḍaṃ paññapetvā pāde pakkhāletvā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā phalasamāpattiṃ pāvisi. Athassa yathāparicchedena tato vuṭṭhitassa ayaṃ parivitakko udapādi – ‘‘buddhā nu kho paṭhamaṃ parinibbāyanti, agasāvakā nu kho’’ti? Tato – ‘‘aggasāvakā paṭhama’’nti ñatvā attano āyusaṅkhāraṃ olokesi. So – ‘‘sattāhameva me āyusaṅkhāro pavattatī’’ti ñatvā – ‘‘kattha parinibbāyissāmī’’ti cintesi. Tato – ‘‘rāhulo tāvatiṃsesu parinibbuto, aññāsikoṇḍaññatthero chaddantadahe, ahaṃ kattha parinibbāyissāmī’’ti puna cintento mātaraṃ ārabbha satiṃ uppādesi – ‘‘mayhaṃ mātā sattannaṃ arahantānaṃ mātā hutvāpi buddhadhammasaṅghesu appasannā, atthi nu kho tassā upanissayo, natthi nu kho’’ti āvajjetvā sotāpattimaggassa upanissayaṃ disvā – ‘‘kassa desanāya abhisamayo bhavissatī’’ti olokento – ‘‘mameva dhammadesanāya bhavissati, na aññassa. Sace kho panāhaṃ appossukko bhaveyyaṃ, bhavissanti me vattāro – ‘sāriputtatthero avasesajanānampi avassayo hoti. Tathā hissa samacittasuttadesanādivase (a. ni. 1.37) koṭisatasahassadevatā arahattaṃ pattā . Tayo magge paṭividdhadevatānaṃ gaṇanā natthi. Aññesu ca ṭhānesu anekā abhisamayā dissanti. Thereva cittaṃ pasādetvā sagge nibbattāneva asītikulasahassāni. So dāni sakamātumicchādassanamattampi harituṃ nāsakkhī’ti. Tasmā mātaraṃ micchādassanā mocetvā jātovarakeyeva parinibbāyissāmī’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā – ‘‘ajjeva bhagavantaṃ anujānāpetvā nikkhamissāmī’’ti cundattheraṃ āmantesi. ‘‘Āvuso, cunda, amhākaṃ pañcasatāya bhikkhuparisāya saññaṃ dehi – ‘gaṇhathāvuso pattacīvarāni, dhammasenāpati nāḷakagāmaṃ gantukāmo’ti’’. Thero tathā akāsi. Bhikkhū senāsanaṃ saṃsāmetvā pattacīvaramādāya therassa santikaṃ āgamaṃsu. Thero senāsanaṃ saṃsāmetvā divāṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā divāṭṭhānadvāre ṭhatvā divāṭṭhānaṃ olokento – ‘‘idaṃ dāni pacchimadassanaṃ, puna āgamanaṃ natthī’’ti pañcasatabhikkhuparivuto bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā etadavoca –
“ 我现在就要被斩断了,世间庇护者、大牟尼啊;
没有来也没有去,这就是最后的礼敬。
我的寿命很短,从现在起再过七天就会结束。
我要把这具身体丢掉,就像卸下重担一样。
尊者,请世尊允许我;请善逝允许我。
我般涅槃的时候到了,寿命的造作已经放下。”巴利
‘‘Chinno dāni bhavissāmi, lokanātha mahāmuni; Gamanāgamanaṃ natthi, pacchimā vandanā ayaṃ. Jīvitaṃ appakaṃ mayhaṃ, ito sattāhamaccaye; Nikkhipeyyāmahaṃ dehaṃ, bhāravoropanaṃ yathā. Anujānātu me bhante, bhagavā, anujānātu sugato; Parinibbānakālo me, ossaṭṭho āyusaṅkhāro’’ti.
佛陀之所以两种话都不说,是因为:如果佛陀说“你般涅槃吧”,那就等于在赞叹死亡;如果佛陀说“你不要般涅槃”,那就等于在宣说轮回的好处。持邪见的人就会因此归咎。所以佛陀两种话都不说。因此,世尊对舍利弗说:“舍利弗,你将在哪里般涅槃?”舍利弗回答:“尊者,在摩揭陀国的那拉咖村,有我出生的房间,我将在那里般涅槃。”世尊听后说:“舍利弗,你现在自己知道时候到了。但今后,你的长幼兄弟们再想见到像你这样的比丘,就非常难得了。所以,你为他们说法吧。”巴利
Buddhā pana yasmā ‘‘parinibbāhī’’ti vutte maraṇasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ saṃvaṇṇenti nāma, ‘‘mā parinibbāhī’’ti vutte vaṭṭassa guṇaṃ kathentīti micchādiṭṭhikā dosaṃ āropessanti, tasmā tadubhayampi na vadanti. Tena naṃ bhagavā āha – ‘‘kattha parinibbāyissasi sāriputtā’’ti? ‘‘Atthi, bhante, magadhesu nāḷakagāme jātovarako, tatthāhaṃ parinibbāyissāmī’’ti vutte ‘‘yassa dāni tvaṃ, sāriputta, kālaṃ maññasi, idāni pana te jeṭṭhakaniṭṭhabhātikānaṃ tādisassa bhikkhuno dassanaṃ dullabhaṃ bhavissatīti desehi tesaṃ dhamma’’nti āha.
长老明白:“导师是希望我先展现神通变化,然后再说法。”于是他礼敬世尊,腾身升到一棵多罗树那么高,再降下来礼敬世尊,然后又升到七棵多罗树高的空中,示现神通变化,接着说法。整座城的人都聚集过来。长老从空中降下,礼敬世尊后说:“尊者,我该走了。”世尊说:“我要送一送这位法将。”便从法座起身,面向香室走去,站在宝石板上。长老向右绕了三圈,又在四个地方顶礼,然后说道:“世尊,在十万劫又无数劫以前,我曾在无上正自觉者阿诺玛达西的足下顶礼,发愿要见到您。这个愿望如今已经实现,我见到了您。那是第一次见您,这是最后一次见您。以后再也见不到您了。”说完,他合掌当胸,十指相合放出光明,面朝世尊一步步倒退而去,直到再也看不见世尊为止。随后他顶礼说:“从今以后,无论在哪里,都不会再有死亡与结生意义上的来去了。”便离去了。这时大地震动,一直震到水边。世尊对围在身边的比丘们说:“比丘们,去送送你们的长兄吧。”比丘们一直送到门楼那里。长老说:“诸位贤友,请留步,要住于不放逸。”便让他们回去,自己只带着随行的徒众离开了。人们悲叹道:“以前尊者出去游方还会回来,如今这一去,却再也不回来了。”于是一路跟随着送行。长老也让他们回去,说:“诸位贤友,要住于不放逸,诸行的本性就是如此。”巴利
Thero – ‘‘satthā mayhaṃ iddhivikubbanapubbaṅgamaṃ dhammadesanaṃ paccāsīsatī’’ti ñatvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā tālappamāṇaṃ abbhuggantvā puna oruyha bhagavantaṃ vanditvā sattatālappamāṇe antalikkhe ṭhito iddhivikubbanaṃ dassetvā dhammaṃ desesi. Sakalanagaraṃ sannipati. Thero oruyha bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ‘‘gamanakālo me, bhante’’ti āha. Bhagavā ‘‘dhammasenāpatiṃ paṭipādessāmī’’ti dhammāsanā uṭṭhāya gandhakuṭiabhimukho gantvā maṇiphalake aṭṭhāsi. Thero tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā catūsu ṭhānesu vanditvā – ‘‘bhagavā ito kappasatasahassādhikassa asaṅkhyeyyassa upari anomadassisammāsambuddhassa pādamūle nipatitvā tumhākaṃ dassanaṃ patthesiṃ. Sā me patthanā samiddhā, diṭṭhā tumhe, taṃ paṭhamadassanaṃ, idaṃ pacchimadassanaṃ. Puna tumhākaṃ dassanaṃ natthī’’ti – vatvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ paggayha yāva dassanavisayo, tāva abhimukhova paṭikkamitvā ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya cutipaṭisandhivasena kismiñci ṭhāne gamanāgamanaṃ nāma natthī’’ti vanditvā pakkāmi. Udakapariyantaṃ katvā mahābhūmicālo ahosi. Bhagavā parivāretvā ṭhite bhikkhū āha – ‘‘anugacchatha, bhikkhave, tumhākaṃ jeṭṭhabhātika’’nti. Bhikkhū yāva dvārakoṭṭhakā agamaṃsu. Thero – ‘‘tiṭṭhatha, tumhe āvuso, appamattā hothā’’ti nivattāpetvā attano parisāyeva saddhiṃ pakkāmi. Manussā – ‘‘pubbe ayyo paccāgamanacārikaṃ carati, idaṃ dāni gamanaṃ na puna paccāgamanāyā’’ti paridevantā anubandhiṃsu. Tepi ‘‘appamattā hotha āvuso, evaṃbhāvino nāma saṅkhārā’’ti nivattāpesi.
那时,具寿舍利弗在旅途中为了利益人们而停留了七天,傍晚到达那拉咖村,站在村门口的榕树根下。当时,长老的外甥名叫优波离瓦多,正往村外走,看见长老便上前顶礼,站在一旁。长老对他说:“你家里还有祖母吗?”他回答:“有的,尊者。”长老说:“你去把我们到了的消息告诉她。如果她问为什么来,你就说:‘听说今天要在村里住一天,请把出生的那间房收拾好,并为五百位比丘安排住处。’”他便回去对祖母说:“祖母,我舅舅来了。”祖母问:“现在在哪里?”他说:“在村门口。”
“他一个人,还是有别人一起来?”
“有五百位比丘。”
“为什么来?”他便把事情经过告诉了她。那位婆罗门女心想:“为什么要为这么多人安排住处?难道他年轻时出家,老了反倒想还俗做在家人吗?”尽管如此,她还是让人收拾好出生的那间房,为五百位比丘安排了住处,点亮了灯,然后派人去迎请长老。巴利
Atha kho āyasmā sāriputto antarāmagge sattāhaṃ manussānaṃ anuggahaṃ karonto sāyaṃ nāḷakagāmaṃ patvā gāmadvāre nigrodharukkhamūle aṭṭhāsi. Atha uparevato nāma therassa bhāgineyyo bahigāmaṃ gacchanto theraṃ disvā upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. Thero taṃ āha – ‘‘atthi gehe te ayyikā’’ti? Āma, bhanteti. Gaccha amhākaṃ idhāgatabhāvaṃ ārocehi. ‘‘Kasmā āgato’’ti ca vutte ‘‘ajja kira ekadivasaṃ antogāme bhavissati, jātovarakaṃ paṭijaggatha, pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ nivāsanaṭṭhānaṃ jānāthā’’ti. So gantvā ‘‘ayyike, mayhaṃ mātulo āgato’’ti āha. Idāni kuhinti? Gāmadvāreti. Ekakova, aññopi koci atthīti ? Atthi pañcasatā bhikkhūti. Kiṃ kāraṇā āgatoti? So taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Brāhmaṇī – ‘‘kiṃ nu kho ettakānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ paṭijaggāpeti , daharakāle pabbajitvā mahallakakāle gihī hotukāmo’’ti cintentī jātovarakaṃ paṭijaggāpetvā pañcasatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ kāretvā daṇḍadīpikāyo jāletvā therassa pāhesi.
长老和比丘们一起登上了楼阁。上去之后,他走进自己出生的房间坐下。刚一坐下,他就打发比丘们说:“你们回自己的住处去吧。”比丘们刚走,长老就得了重病,腹泻便血,濒死的痛苦受生起,一个容器进,一个容器出。那位婆罗门女心想:“我儿子的情况让我不满意。”就靠在通往自己住处的房门口站着。四大天王心想:“法将现在住在哪里?”他们观察后说:“他在那拉咖村出生的房间里,躺在般涅槃的床上,我们去见他最后一面吧。”于是前来顶礼,站在一旁。长老问:“你们是谁?”他们答:“是四大天王,尊者。”长老问:“为什么来?”他们答:“我们来当看护。”长老说:“不必了,已经有看护,你们回去吧。”就把他们打发走了。他们刚离开,帝释天神也以同样的方式来了;他走后,夜摩天等诸天神以及大梵天王也来了。长老同样把他们一一打发走了。巴利
Thero bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ pāsādaṃ abhiruhi. Abhiruhitvā ca jātovarakaṃ pavisitvā nisīdi. Nisajjeva – ‘‘tumhākaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gacchathā’’ti bhikkhū uyyojesi. Tesu gatamattesuyeva therassa kharo ābādho uppajji, lohitapakkhandikā māraṇantikā vedanā vattanti, ekaṃ bhājanaṃ pavisati, ekaṃ nikkhamati. Brāhmaṇī – ‘‘mama puttassa pavatti mayhaṃ na ruccatī’’ti attano vasanagabbhadvāraṃ nissāya aṭṭhāsi. Cattāro mahārājāno ‘‘dhammasenāpati kuhiṃ viharatī’’ti olokentā ‘‘nāḷakagāme jātovarake parinibbānamañce nipanno, pacchimadassanaṃ gamissāmā’’ti āgamma vanditvā aṭṭhaṃsu. Thero – ke tumheti? Mahārājāno, bhanteti. Kasmā āgatatthāti? Gilānupaṭṭhākā bhavissāmāti. Hotu, atthi gilānupaṭṭhāko, gacchatha tumheti uyyojesi. Tesaṃ gatāvasāne teneva nayena sakko devānamindo, tasmiṃ gate suyāmādayo mahābrahmā ca āgamiṃsu. Tepi tatheva thero uyyojesi.
婆罗门女看见众天神来了又走,心想:“这些是谁啊,礼拜了我儿子就走?”她走到长老的房门口,问:“孩子,春达,出什么事了?”春达把事情经过告诉她,然后对长老说:“尊者,大近事女来了。”长老问:“为什么不在合适的时间来?”她说:“孩子,是为了来看你。”接着又问:“孩子,最先来的是谁?”
答:“四大天王,近事女。”又问:“孩子,你比四大天王还伟大吗?”
答:“近事女,他们就像园民一样。从我们的导师入胎结生开始,他们就一直手持宝剑守护。”又问:“孩子,他们走了之后,谁来了?”
答:“帝释天神。”又问:“孩子,你比天王还伟大吗?”
答:“近事女,他就像替我们拿东西的沙弥。我们的导师从三十三天下来时,他拿着衣钵跟着下来。”又问:“孩子,他走了之后,那个像放光一样来的是谁?”
答:“近事女,那位就是你的世尊、导师,名叫大梵天王。”又问:“孩子,你比我的世尊大梵天王还伟大吗?”
答:“是的,近事女。听说我们的导师出生那天,四位大梵天王用金网接住了这位大人。”巴利
Brāhmaṇī devatānaṃ āgamanañca gamanañca disvā – ‘‘ke nu kho ete mama puttaṃ vanditvā gacchantī’’ti therassa gabbhadvāraṃ gantvā – ‘‘tāta, cunda, kā pavattī’’ti pucchi. So taṃ pavattiṃ ācikkhitvā – ‘‘mahāupāsikā, bhante āgatā’’ti āha. Thero kasmā avelāya āgatatthāti pucchi. Sā tuyhaṃ tāta dassanatthāyāti vatvā ‘‘tāta ke paṭhamaṃ āgatā’’ti pucchi. Cattāro mahārājāno, upāsiketi. Tāta, tvaṃ catūhi mahārājehi mahantataroti? Ārāmikasadisā ete upāsike, amhākaṃ satthu paṭisandhiggahaṇato paṭṭhāya khaggahatthā hutvā ārakkhaṃ akaṃsūti. Tesaṃ tāta, gatāvasāne ko āgatoti? Sakko devānamindoti. Devarājatopi tvaṃ tāta, mahantataroti? Bhaṇḍagāhakasāmaṇerasadiso esa upāsike, amhākaṃ satthu tāvatiṃsato otaraṇakāle pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā otiṇṇoti. Tassa tāta gatāvasāne jotamāno viya ko āgatoti? Upāsike tuyhaṃ bhagavā ca satthā ca mahābrahmā nāma esoti. Mayhaṃ bhagavato mahābrahmatopi tvaṃ tāta mahantataroti? Āma upāsike, ete nāma kira amhākaṃ satthu jātadivase cattāro mahābrahmāno mahāpurisaṃ suvaṇṇajālena paṭiggaṇhiṃsūti.
这时,婆罗门女心里想:“我儿子都有这样的威神力,那我儿子的世尊导师,威神力又该是怎样的呢?”她正这样想着,五种喜突然生起,遍满全身。长老心想:“母亲已经生起了喜与悦,现在正是说法的时候。”于是问道:“大近事女,您在想着什么呢?”她说:“孩子,我在想,我儿子都有这样的功德,他的导师又该有怎样的功德呢?”长老便说:“大近事女,我的导师在诞生时、大出家时、成正觉时、初转法轮时,一万个世界都震动了。在戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见方面,没有谁能与他等同,他就是这样一位世尊。”他这样详细地宣说了与佛功德相应的法。巴利
Atha brāhmaṇiyā – ‘‘puttassa tāva me ayaṃ ānubhāvo, kīdiso vata mayhaṃ puttassa bhagavato satthu ānubhāvo bhavissatī’’ti cintayantiyā sahasā pañcavaṇṇā pīti uppajjitvā sakalasarīre phari. Thero – ‘‘uppannaṃ me mātu pītisomanassaṃ, ayaṃ dāni kālo dhammadesanāyā’’ti cintetvā – ‘‘kiṃ cintesi mahāupāsike’’ti āha. Sā – ‘‘puttassa tāva me ayaṃ guṇo, satthu panassa kīdiso guṇo bhavissatīti idaṃ, tāta, cintemī’’ti āha. Mahāupāsike, mayhaṃ satthu jātakkhaṇe, mahābhinikkhamane, sambodhiyaṃ, dhammacakkappavattane ca dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha, sīlena samādhinā paññāya vimuttiyā vimuttiñāṇadassanena samo nāma natthi, itipi so bhagavāti vitthāretvā buddhaguṇappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhammadesanaṃ kathesi.
婆罗门女在儿子说法的结束时,证得入流果并安住其中,就对儿子说:“孩子,伍巴帝萨,你为什么要这样做?像这样不死的法,你竟然这么久都不给我。”长老心想:“现在我已经报答了母亲色舍利婆罗门女的养育之恩,这些就足够了。”于是说:“大近事女,您回去吧。”他打发婆罗门女走后,问:“春达,现在是什么时候?”春达回答:“天快亮了,尊者。”长老说:“那么,把比丘僧团集合起来吧。”春达说:“僧团已经集合了,尊者。”长老说:“春达,把我扶起来坐好。”春达就把他扶起来坐好。长老对比丘们说:“贤友们,你们跟我一起游行四十四年,如果我的身体或言语有让你们不满意的地方,请贤友们原谅。”比丘们说:“尊者,我们像影子一样跟着您,从来没有觉得有什么不满意。倒是请尊者原谅我们。”这时,曙光初现,长老以震动大地的声音,入无余涅槃而般涅槃。许多天和人纷纷为长老的般涅槃做了供养。巴利
Brāhmaṇī piyaputtassa dhammadesanāpariyosāne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāya puttaṃ āha – ‘‘tāta, upatissa, kasmā evamakāsi, evarūpaṃ nāma amataṃ mayhaṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ na adāsī’’ti. Thero – ‘‘dinnaṃ dāni me mātu rūpasāriyā brāhmaṇiyā posāvanikamūlaṃ, ettakena vaṭṭissatī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘gaccha mahāupāsike’’ti brāhmaṇiṃ uyyojetvā ‘‘cunda kā velā’’ti āha. Balavapaccūsakālo, bhanteti. Tena hi bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātehīti. Sannipatito, bhante, saṅghoti. Maṃ ukkhipitvā nisīdāpehi cundāti ukkhipitvā nisīdāpesi. Thero bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘āvuso catucattālīsaṃ vo vassāni mayā saddhiṃ vicarantānaṃ yaṃ me kāyikaṃ vā vācasikaṃ vā na rocetha, khamatha taṃ āvusoti. Ettakaṃ, bhante, amhākaṃ chāyā viya tumhe amuñcitvā vicarantānaṃ aruccanakaṃ nāma natthi, tumhe pana amhākaṃ khamathāti. Atha thero aruṇasikhāya paññāyamānāya mahāpathaviṃ unnādayanto anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi. Bahū devamanussā therassa parinibbāne sakkāraṃ kariṃsu.
具寿春达拿了长老的衣钵和滤水囊,前往祇园,带上阿难长老,一起去见世尊。世尊接过那滤水囊,用五百首偈颂讲说长老的功德,让人建起供奉舍利的塔庙,然后为了前往王舍城的事,给了阿难长老一个交代。长老转告了比丘们。世尊由大比丘僧团围绕,前往王舍城。到那里的时候,大目犍连长老已经般涅槃了。世尊收取他的舍利,让人建塔供奉,随后离开王舍城,一路渐次朝恒河方向走去,到了优迦支罗。在那里,世尊在恒河岸边,由比丘僧团围绕而坐,讲说了与舍利弗和目犍连般涅槃有关的经,然后离开优迦支罗,前往毗舍离。就这样到了之后,世尊在上午时分穿好下衣,拿着钵和衣,进入毗舍离城乞食。这就是这里事情的次第。巴利
Āyasmā cundo therassa pattacīvarañca dhātuparissāvanañca gahetvā jetavanaṃ gantvā ānandattheraṃ gahetvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkami. Bhagavā dhātuparissāvanaṃ gahetvā pañcahi gāthāsatehi therassa guṇaṃ kathetvā dhātucetiyaṃ kārāpetvā rājagahagamanatthāya ānandattherassa saññaṃ adāsi. Thero bhikkhūnaṃ ārocesi. Bhagavā mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivuto rājagahaṃ agamāsi. Tattha gatakāle mahāmoggallānatthero parinibbāyi. Bhagavā tassa dhātuyo gahetvā cetiyaṃ kārāpetvā rājagahato nikkhamitvā anupubbena gaṅgābhimukho gantvā ukkacelaṃ agamāsi. Tattha gaṅgātīre bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto nisīditvā tattha sāriputtamoggallānānaṃ parinibbānappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ suttaṃ desetvā ukkacelato nikkhamitvā vesāliṃ agamāsi. Evaṃ gate atha kho bhagavā pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā pattacīvaramādāya vesāliṃ piṇḍāya pāvisīti ayamettha anupubbī kathā.
这里说的“坐具”,指的是皮革片。“乌德那塔庙”,是指建在乌德那夜叉塔庙那里的寺院。乔达摩塔庙等也是同样的说法。“已修习”,就是已增长。“已多修习”,就是反复地做。“已作为车乘”,就是像套好的车乘那样去运用。“已作为基础”,就是从安立的意义上,像地基一样被确立。“已专注”,就是已决意确定。“已遍修习”,就是从各方面累积修习,已很好地增长。“善精勤”,就是已很好地精勤。巴利
Nisīdananti ettha cammakkhaṇḍaṃ adhippetaṃ. Udenacetiyanti udenayakkhassa cetiyaṭṭhāne katavihāro vuccati. Gotamakādīsupi eseva nayo. Bhāvitāti vaḍḍhitā. Bahulīkatāti punappunaṃ katā. Yānīkatāti yuttayānaṃ viya katā. Vatthukatāti patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vatthu viya katā. Anuṭṭhitāti adhiṭṭhitā. Paricitāti samantato citā suvaḍḍhitā. Susamāraddhāti suṭṭhu samāraddhā.
世尊先用不限定的话说过之后,又用限定的方式来说明,于是说出“如来的……”这一段。这里,“劫”指的是寿命劫。在某个时期,人们的寿命有多长,他就圆满地活到那么长的时间。或者说“劫的剩余部分”,就是像“少或更多”所说的那样,超过百岁以上的部分。不过玛哈斯瓦长老说:“诸佛不会说没有意义的话。就像他在韦楼瓦村生起致命剧痛时,用十个月把它镇伏一样,他也能一次又一次进入那种定,每次镇伏十个月,这样住世整个贤劫。那为什么没有住世呢?因为已执取的色身终究会被衰老等状况压倒,而诸佛不会等到衰老等状况出现,在寿命的第五个阶段,也就是大众还觉得可爱可意的时候,就般涅槃了。而且当诸佛和随佛证觉的大弟子们纷纷般涅槃后,他一个人就像树桩一样独自待着,或者只有年幼沙弥围绕,那时就会被人轻视:‘啊,这就是佛的弟子众吗!’所以世尊没有住世一劫。”虽然有这样的说法,但并不被采纳;注疏里只确定了“寿命劫”这个意思。巴利
Iti aniyamena kathetvā puna niyametvā dassento tathāgatassa khotiādimāha. Ettha ca kappanti āyukappaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāle yaṃ manussānaṃ āyuppamāṇaṃ hoti, taṃ paripuṇṇaṃ karonto tiṭṭheyya. Kappāvasesaṃ vāti – ‘‘appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.7; a. ni. 6.74) vuttavassasatato atirekaṃ vā. Mahāsīvatthero panāha – ‘‘buddhānaṃ aṭṭhāne gajjitaṃ nāma natthi. Yatheva hi veḷuvagāmake uppannaṃ māraṇantikaṃ vedanaṃ dasa māse vikkhambheti, evaṃ punappunaṃ taṃ samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā dasa dasa māse vikkhambhento imaṃ bhaddakappameva tiṭṭheyya, kasmā pana na ṭhitoti? Upādinnakasarīraṃ nāma khaṇḍiccādīhi abhibhuyyati, buddhā ca khaṇḍiccādibhāvaṃ apatvā pañcame āyukoṭṭhāse bahujanassa piyamanāpakāleyeva parinibbāyanti. Buddhānubuddhesu ca mahāsāvakesu parinibbutesu ekakeneva khāṇukena viya ṭhātabbaṃ hoti, daharasāmaṇeraparivāritena vā. Tato – ‘aho buddhānaṃ parisā’ti hīḷetabbataṃ āpajjeyya. Tasmā na ṭhito’’ti. Evaṃ vuttepi so na ruccati, ‘‘āyukappo’’ti idameva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ niyamitaṃ.
167 “就像那样,被魔罗缠住了心”:这里的“那样”只是个虚词。意思是:正如任何一个被魔罗缠住心、覆盖了心的凡夫都无法洞察,他也同样无法洞察。什么原因呢?因为魔罗会缠住那些十二种颠倒全都未断除的人的心。这位长老还有四种颠倒未断除,所以魔罗缠住了他的心。那么魔罗缠住他的心时,做些什么呢?他要么显现恐怖的色所缘,要么发出恐怖的声所缘。众生看到或听到之后,就丢掉正念,张着嘴巴发呆。魔罗便把手从他们嘴里伸进去,揉搓心脏,他们随即失去知觉,呆立在那里。可是对这位长老,魔罗能把他的手伸进长老嘴里吗?他只能显现恐怖的所缘罢了。长老看到之后,没能洞察相的光明。世尊明明知道,却还是问:“为什么叫了三次呢?”这是为了在后面阿难请求“请世尊住世吧,尊者”时,世尊用“这是你的过错,这是你的失误”来责备他,从而减轻阿难的悲伤。巴利
167.Yathā taṃ mārena pariyuṭṭhitacittoti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ. Yathā mārena pariyuṭṭhitacitto ajjhotthaṭacitto aññopi koci puthujjano paṭivijjhituṃ na sakkuṇeyya, evameva nāsakkhi paṭivijjhitunti attho. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Māro hi yassa sabbena sabbaṃ dvādasa vipallāsā appahīnā, tassa cittaṃ pariyuṭṭhāti. Therassa cattāro vipallāsā appahīnā, tenassa māro cittaṃ pariyuṭṭhāti. So pana cittapariyuṭṭhānaṃ karonto kiṃ karotīti? Bheravaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ vā dasseti, saddārammaṇaṃ vā sāveti, tato sattā taṃ disvā vā sutvā vā satiṃ vissajjetvā vivaṭamukhā honti. Tesaṃ mukhena hatthaṃ pavesetvā hadayaṃ maddati. Tato visaññāva hutvā tiṭṭhanti. Therassa panesa mukhena hatthaṃ pavesetuṃ kiṃ sakkhissati ? Bheravārammaṇaṃ pana dasseti. Taṃ disvā thero nimittobhāsaṃ na paṭivijjhi. Bhagavā jānantoyeva – ‘‘kimatthaṃ yāvatatiyaṃ āmantesī’’ti? Parato ‘‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante, bhagavā’’ti yācite ‘‘tuyhevetaṃ dukkaṭaṃ, tuyhevetaṃ aparaddha’’nti dosāropanena sokatanukaraṇatthaṃ.
对魔请求故事的注释巴利
Mārayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
168 魔罗、邪恶者:在这里,魔罗是指把众生拖进无益之事、加以杀害,所以叫魔罗。邪恶者是它的另一个称呼。因为它具足恶法,所以被称为邪恶者。黑、终结者、那目奇、放逸者的亲友,也都是它的名字。然而,这话已被说出:这是因为,世尊证得正觉后的第八个七日,还在菩提道场时,魔罗就来到世尊面前说:“世尊,您为了圆满诸巴拉密所追求的目标已经达成,一切知智已经通达,何必再思虑世间呢?”就像今天一样,他又请求:“尊者,世尊,请现在般涅槃。”世尊拒绝了,说:“我还不……”等。针对这件事,才说了“然而,这话已被说出,尊者”等话。巴利
168.Māro pāpimāti ettha māroti satte anatthe niyojento māretīti māro. Pāpimāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. So hi pāpadhammasamannāgatattā ‘‘pāpimā’’ti vuccati. Kaṇho, antako, namuci, pamattabandhūtipi tasseva nāmāni. Bhāsitā kho panesāti ayañhi bhagavato sambodhipattiyā aṭṭhame sattāhe bodhimaṇḍeyeva āgantvā – ‘‘bhagavā yadatthaṃ tumhehi pāramiyo pūritā, so vo attho anuppatto, paṭividdhaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, kiṃ te lokavicāraṇenā’’ti vatvā, yathā ajja , evameva ‘‘parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā’’ti yāci. Bhagavā cassa – ‘‘na tāvāha’’ntiādīni vatvā paṭikkhipi. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘bhāsitā kho panesā bhante’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“堪能”是指依圣道而堪能。他们同样已被调伏,也同样具足自信。“多闻”是指因掌握三藏而多闻,也就是他们广博地听闻了法,所以叫多闻。“能持那个法”是指持法者。或者也可以说,既在教法上多闻,也在通达上多闻;因为能持教法与通达法,所以叫持法者——这里的含义应当这样理解。“法随法行”是指已经修行随顺圣法的随法,也就是观等法。“正行”是指已经修行适当的行为。“随法行者”是指有随法而行之习惯的人。“自己的师说”是指自己老师的论说。“将说示”等,全都是彼此的同义词。“以有法”是指以有因、有理由的言辞。“有神变”是指直到能使人趣向解脱而说法。巴利
Tattha viyattāti maggavasena viyattā. Tatheva vinītā tathā visāradā. Bahussutāti tepiṭakavasena bahu sutametesanti bahussutā. Tameva dhammaṃ dhārentīti dhammadharā. Athavā pariyattibahussutā ceva paṭivedhabahussutā ca. Pariyattipaṭivedhadhammānaṃyeva dhāraṇato dhammadharāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Dhammānudhammapaṭipannāti ariyadhammassa anudhammabhūtaṃ vipassanādhammaṃ paṭipannā. Sāmīcippaṭipannāti anucchavikapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannā. Anudhammacārinoti anudhammacaraṇasīlā. Sakaṃ ācariyakanti attano ācariyavādaṃ. Ācikkhissantītiādīni sabbāni aññamaññassa vevacanāni. Sahadhammenāti sahetukena sakāraṇena vacanena. Sappāṭihāriyanti yāva na niyyānikaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desessanti.
梵行:就是包含三学的全部教法梵行。成就:因为禅那的滋味而圆满。繁荣:已经成长起来,就像一切花果盛开那样,因为证得神通而繁荣。广布:已经广泛传播,在各方各地建立起来。众人所知:被众人知道、通达,因为大众的现观而成立。普遍存在:以一切方式达到普遍的状态。如何呢?乃至被天和人善加宣说:意思是,所有有智慧的天和人,都已经很好地宣说。巴利
Brahmacariyanti sikkhattayasaṅgahitaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Iddhanti samiddhaṃ jhānassādavasena. Phītanti vuddhippattaṃ sabbaphāliphullaṃ viya abhiññāya sampattivasena. Vitthārikanti vitthataṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ disābhāge patiṭṭhitavasena. Bāhujaññanti bahujanehi ñātaṃ paṭividdhaṃ mahājanābhisamayavasena. Puthubhūtanti sabbākāravasena puthulabhāvappattaṃ. Kathaṃ? Yāva devamanussehisuppakāsitanti yattakā viññujātikā devā ceva manussā ca atthi sabbehi suṭṭhu pakāsitanti attho.
“无所操心”就是无所执着。邪恶者,你从第八个七天开始,就到处叫喊着:“尊者,世尊现在般涅槃吧!善逝现在般涅槃吧!”从今天起,你该彻底死心了;不要再为我的般涅槃费力气了。巴利
Appossukkoti nirālayo. Tvañhi pāpima, aṭṭhamasattāhato paṭṭhāya – ‘‘parinibbātu dāni, bhante, bhagavā parinibbātu, sugato’’ti viravanto āhiṇḍittha. Ajja dāni paṭṭhāya vigatussāho hohi; mā mayhaṃ parinibbānatthaṃ vāyāmaṃ karohīti vadati.
舍寿行的注释巴利
Āyusaṅkhāraossajjanavaṇṇanā
169 具念、正知,舍弃了寿行:意思是把正念好好安立起来,用智慧判定之后,舍弃、放下了寿行。在这里,世尊并不是像用手扔土块那样舍弃寿行,而是入定三个月之后,生起了“此后我将不再入定”的心。针对这一点,才说“舍弃”。这个词也有读作“ussajjī”的。大地震:就是大地剧烈的震动。据说当时一万个世界都震动了。恐怖:就是令人害怕。天鼓也响了:天鼓发出声响,天空中响起旱雷,非时的闪电闪出,骤雨降下。巴利
169.Sato sampajāno āyusaṅkhāraṃ ossajīti satiṃ sūpaṭṭhitaṃ katvā ñāṇena paricchinditvā āyusaṅkhāraṃ vissajji, pajahi. Tattha na bhagavā hatthena leḍḍuṃ viya āyusaṅkhāraṃ ossaji, temāsamattameva pana samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā tato paraṃ na samāpajjissāmīti cittaṃ uppādesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘ossajī’’ti. ‘‘Ussajjī’’ti pi pāṭho. Mahābhūmicāloti mahanto pathavīkampo. Tadā kira dasasahassī lokadhātu kampittha. Bhiṃsanakoti bhayajanako. Devadundubhiyo ca phaliṃsūti devabheriyo phaliṃsu, devo sukkhagajjitaṃ gajji, akālavijjulatā nicchariṃsu, khaṇikavassaṃ vassīti vuttaṃ hoti.
他说出感兴语。为什么说出感兴语呢?也许有人会这样说:“世尊是因为被那些跟在后面不断跟随、恳求‘尊者,请般涅槃吧!尊者,请般涅槃吧!’的人所逼迫,因为害怕才舍弃了寿行。”为了说明“这种说法没有根据,害怕的人是不会说出感兴语的”,他是由喜悦之力自然流露而说出这感兴语。巴利
Udānaṃ udānesīti kasmā udānesi? Koci nāma vadeyya – ‘‘bhagavā pacchato pacchato anubandhitvā – ‘parinibbāyatha, bhante, parinibbāyatha, bhante’ti upadduto bhayena āyusaṅkhāraṃ vissajjesī’’ti. ‘‘Tassokāso mā hotu, bhītassa udānaṃ nāma natthī’’ti etassa dīpanatthaṃ pītivegavissaṭṭhaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
在这里,因为狗、豺狼等一切众生也都能直接体验到它,所以它是可以被衡量、被限定的,因此叫“可量”。那是什么?就是欲界业。没有别的世间业和“可量”相同或相似,所以叫“不可量”。那是什么?就是广大业。或者,欲界业和色界业是“可量”,无色界业是“不可量”。又或者,果报少的叫“可量”,果报多的叫“不可量”。“生起”是指成为生起的因,也就是造作积聚、造作堆集的意思。“有行”是指能让人再次投生的造作。“舍”就是舍弃。“牟尼”指佛陀牟尼。“内心喜悦”指在自己内心感到喜悦。“入定”指依靠近行定和安止定而住于定。“破如铠甲”就是像破开铠甲一样。“自身所生”指在自己身上生起的烦恼。这里要表达的意思是:以有果报的意义叫“生起”,以能形成后有、被称为“有行”的意义,把名为“可量和不可量”的世间业舍弃了。就像战场上的大战士破开铠甲一样,他内心喜悦、住于定,破除了从自身生起的烦恼。巴利
Tattha sabbesaṃ soṇasiṅgālādīnampi paccakkhabhāvato tulitaṃ paricchinnanti tulaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Kāmāvacarakammaṃ. Na tulaṃ, na vā tulaṃ sadisamassa aññaṃ lokiyaṃ kammaṃ atthīti atulaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Mahaggatakammaṃ. Athavā kāmāvacararūpāvacaraṃ tulaṃ, arūpāvacaraṃ atulaṃ. Appavipākaṃ vā tulaṃ, bahuvipākaṃ atulaṃ. Sambhavanti sambhavassa hetubhūtaṃ, piṇḍakārakaṃ rāsikārakanti attho. Bhavasaṅkhāranti punabbhavasaṅkhāraṇakaṃ. Avassajīti vissajjesi. Munīti buddhamuni. Ajjhattaratoti niyakajjhattarato. Samāhitoti upacārappanāsamādhivasena samāhito. Abhindi kavacamivāti kavacaṃ viya abhindi. Attasambhavanti attani sañjātaṃ kilesaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘savipākaṭṭhena sambhavaṃ, bhavābhisaṅkhāraṇaṭṭhena bhavasaṅkhāranti ca laddhanāmaṃ tulātulasaṅkhātaṃ lokiyakammañca ossaji. Saṅgāmasīse mahāyodho kavacaṃ viya attasambhavaṃ kilesañca ajjhattarato samāhito hutvā abhindī’’ti.
或者也可以这样理解:所谓“衡量”,就是正在衡量、正在审察。“不可衡量与生起”,就是指涅槃和生起。“有行”就是能导向存在的业。“牟尼舍弃了它”,意思是:佛陀这位牟尼,依照“五蕴是无常的,五蕴的灭尽——涅槃是常的”等等这样的理路,在衡量之中,看到了存在中的过患,也看到了涅槃中的功德;随后他以能令业灭尽的圣道,舍弃了那业——它既是诸蕴的根本,又能引生存在。那是怎样做到的呢?“内心喜悦”和“得定”,是说:他像击破铠甲一样,击破了在自身中生起的东西。也就是说,他从前行阶段开始,就以观的力量成为内心喜悦者,以止的力量成为得定者;他就这样以止和观的力量,击破了一切烦恼之网——这网像铠甲一样缠裹着自己这个身体,又因为是在自身中生起,所以名为“自身所生”。而且,烦恼既然不存在了,所作的业便不再结生,所以名为“已舍弃”。这样,他通过断除烦恼而舍弃了业;对已经断除烦恼的人来说,恐惧是不存在的,因此他无所畏惧地舍弃了寿行,并且为了表明自己无所畏惧而说出了优陀那。应当这样理解。巴利
Atha vā tulanti tulento tīrento. Atulañca sambhavanti nibbānañceva sambhavañca. Bhavasaṅkhāranti bhavagāmikammaṃ. Avassaji munīti ‘‘pañcakkhandhā aniccā, pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ nirodho nibbānaṃ nicca’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.38) nayena tulayanto buddhamuni bhave ādīnavaṃ, nibbāne ca ānisaṃsaṃ disvā taṃ khandhānaṃ mūlabhūtaṃ bhavasaṅkhārakammaṃ – ‘‘kammakkhayāya saṃvattatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.81) evaṃ vuttena kammakkhayakarena ariyamaggena avassaji. Kathaṃ? Ajjhattarato samāhito abhindi kavacamiva attani sambhavaṃ. So hi vipassanāvasena ajjhattarato samathavasena samāhitoti evaṃ pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya samathavipassanābalena kavacamiva attabhāvaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitaṃ, attani sambhavattā ‘‘attasambhava’’nti laddhanāmaṃ sabbakilesajālaṃ abhindi. Kilesābhāvena ca katakammaṃ appaṭisandhikattā avassaṭṭhaṃ nāma hotīti evaṃ kilesappahānena kammaṃ pajahi, pahīnakilesassa ca bhayaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā abhītova āyusaṅkhāraṃ ossaji, abhītabhāvañāpanatthañca udānaṃ udānesīti veditabbo.
大地震动的注释巴利
Mahābhūmicālavaṇṇanā
171 当大风刮起的时候,有时强风一吹起来,就会生起叫做“上扬风”的风。这些风吹动时,会截断那厚达九十六万由旬、能够维持住水的风,于是水就在空中散落下来;水散落时,大地也就散落、塌陷下去。另一种情况是,风靠自己的力量,像在水车内部搅动水一样,把水卷住、聚拢起来,于是水就向上涌起;水向上涌时,大地也就跟着隆起。这样,水的动荡就使大地震动。这种震动直到今天仍然存在,只是因为大地太厚重,所以那种下沉、上升的变化看不出来。巴利
171.Yaṃ mahāvātāti yena samayena yasmiṃ vā samaye mahāvātā vāyanti, mahāvātā vāyantāpi ukkhepakavātā nāma uṭṭhahanti, te vāyantā saṭṭhisahassādhikanavayojanasatasahassabahalaṃ udakasandhārakaṃ vātaṃ upacchindanti, tato ākāse udakaṃ bhassati, tasmiṃ bhassante pathavī bhassati. Puna vāto attano balena antodhamakaraṇe viya udakaṃ ābandhitvā gaṇhāti, tato udakaṃ uggacchati, tasmiṃ uggacchante pathavī uggacchati. Evaṃ udakaṃ kampitaṃ pathaviṃ kampeti. Etañca kampanaṃ yāva ajjakālāpi hotiyeva, bahalabhāvena pana na ogacchanuggacchanaṃ paññāyati.
有大神通、大威力:因为所成就的神通广大,所以叫有大神通;因为所体验的威力广大,所以叫有大威力。狭小,就是虚弱。无量,就是强大。他能震动这片大地:他生起神通之后,为了让人警醒而震动大地,就像大目犍连尊者那样;或者为了试探而震动大地,就像大那伽长老的外甥桑卡拉奇达沙弥那样。据说,这位尊者就在剃刀尖上证得了阿拉汉果,他心里想:有没有哪位比丘在出家当天就证得阿拉汉果,还曾经震动过最胜殿呢?然后他知道:没有这样的人。于是他想:我要震动它。他就以神通力站在最胜殿顶上,用脚踢,却没能让它动摇。这时,帝释天神的天女们对他说:孩子桑卡拉奇达,你想用这个还带着腐臭味的脑袋去震动最胜殿吗?亲爱的,这座宫殿建得非常牢固,你怎么可能震动得了呢?巴利
Mahiddhiko mahānubhāvoti ijjhanassa mahantatāya mahiddhiko, anubhavitabbassa mahantatāya mahānubhāvo. Parittāti dubbalā. Appamāṇāti balavā. So imaṃ pathaviṃ kampetīti so iddhiṃ nibbattetvā saṃvejento mahāmoggallāno viya, vīmaṃsanto vā mahānāgattherassa bhāgineyyo saṅgharakkhitasāmaṇero viya pathaviṃ kampeti. So kirāyasmā khuraggeyeva arahattaṃ patvā cintesi – ‘‘atthi nu kho koci bhikkhu, yena pabbajitadivaseyeva arahattaṃ patvā vejayanto pāsādo kampitapubbo’’ti? Tato – ‘‘natthi kocī’’ti ñatvā – ‘‘ahaṃ kampessāmī’’ti abhiññābalena vejayantamatthake ṭhatvā pādena paharitvā kampetuṃ nāsakkhi. Atha naṃ sakkassa nāṭakitthiyo āhaṃsu – ‘‘putta saṅgharakkhita, tvaṃ pūtigandheneva sīsena vejayantaṃ kampetuṃ icchasi, suppatiṭṭhito tāta pāsādo, kathaṃ kampetuṃ sakkhissasī’’ti?
沙弥心想:“这些天女在跟我嬉戏,可我却还没得到导师。我的导师——那位通晓海相的大那伽长老,如今在哪里呢?”他这样作意观察,知道长老在大海中化出一处水洞,正坐在里面作午后静坐。于是他去到那里,礼拜长老后站在一旁。长老便问他:“孩子桑卡拉奇达,你还没学好功夫就上战场了吗?”接着又问:“孩子,你没能震动最胜殿,是吧?”
“尊者,因为我还没得到导师。”于是长老对他说:“孩子,像你这样的人都不能震动它,还有谁能震动呢?孩子,你见过干牛粪块漂在水面上吗?孩子,那些煎陶片饼的人,用一根细线就能把它切开。你就靠这个比喻去领悟吧。”沙弥说:“尊者,光是这个比喻就足够了。”然后他决意:“愿宫殿坐落之处变成水!”随后便朝最胜殿走去。巴利
Sāmaṇero – ‘‘imā devatā mayā saddhiṃ keḷiṃ karonti, ahaṃ kho pana ācariyaṃ nālatthaṃ, kahaṃ nu kho me ācariyo sāmuddikamahānāgatthero’’ti āvajjento mahāsamudde udakaleṇaṃ māpetvā divāvihāraṃ nisinnoti ñatvā tattha gantvā theraṃ vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. Tato naṃ thero – ‘‘kiṃ, tāta saṅgharakkhita, asikkhitvāva yuddhaṃ paviṭṭhosī’’ti vatvā ‘‘nāsakkhi, tāta, vejayantaṃ kampetu’’nti pucchi. Ācariyaṃ, bhante, nālatthanti. Atha naṃ thero – ‘‘tāta tumhādise akampente ko añño kampessati. Diṭṭhapubbaṃ te, tāta, udakapiṭṭhe gomayakhaṇḍaṃ pilavantaṃ, tāta, kapallakapūvaṃ pacantā antantena paricchindanti, iminā opammena jānāhī’’ti āha. So – ‘‘vaṭṭissati, bhante, ettakenā’’ti vatvā pāsādena patiṭṭhitokāsaṃ udakaṃ hotūti adhiṭṭhāya vejayantābhimukho agamāsi.
天女们看见他,就说:“上次他羞得跑掉了,现在这沙弥又来了,又来了!”天王帝释说:“你们别跟我的儿子交谈。现在他已经找到导师了,一眨眼就能把宫殿震得晃动。”沙弥用大脚趾碰了一下宫殿的尖顶。宫殿立刻朝四个方向倾斜。天神们尖叫起来:“让它稳住,孩子,让宫殿稳住,孩子,让宫殿稳住啊!”沙弥把宫殿恢复原位,然后站在宫殿顶上,说出这样的感兴语:巴利
Devadhītaro taṃ disvā – ‘‘ekavāraṃ lajjitvā gato, punapi sāmaṇero eti, punapi etī’’ti vadiṃsu. Sakko devarājā – ‘‘mā mayhaṃ puttena saddhiṃ kathayittha, idāni tena ācariyo laddho, khaṇena pāsādaṃ kampessatī’’ti āha. Sāmaṇeropi pādaṅguṭṭhena pāsādathūpikaṃ pahari. Pāsādo catūhi disāhi oṇamati. Devatā – ‘‘patiṭṭhātuṃ dehi, tāta, pāsādassa patiṭṭhātuṃ dehi, tāta, pāsādassā’’ti viraviṃsu. Sāmaṇero pāsādaṃ yathāṭhāne ṭhapetvā pāsādamatthake ṭhatvā udānaṃ udānesi –
今天我才出家,今天我就证得了诸漏灭尽。
今天我把宫殿都震动了,佛陀的殊胜真是不可思议啊!
就在今天,我出家了……(中略)……啊,法的殊胜真是不可思议!
我就在今天出家了……(中略)……啊,僧伽真是殊胜!巴利
‘‘Ajjevāhaṃ pabbajito, ajja pattāsavakkhayaṃ; Ajja kampemi pāsādaṃ, aho buddhassuḷāratā. Ajjevāhaṃ pabbajito…pe… aho dhammassuḷāratā. Ajjevāhaṃ pabbajito…pe… aho saṅghassuḷāratāti.
关于此后六种地动,凡所应说者,在《大本行》中已说过。巴利
Ito paresu chasu pathavīkampesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ mahāpadāne vuttameva.
这八种地动分别是:第一种由界的扰动引起,第二种由神通威力引起,第三和第四种由福德之力引起,第五种由智慧之力引起,第六种由随喜赞叹引起,第七种由悲悯之心引起,第八种由哀泣引起。菩萨入母胎和出母胎时,大地因他的福德之力而震动。证悟正等觉时,大地被智慧之力冲击而震动。转法轮时,大地安住在随喜赞叹的状态中,给予赞叹而震动。舍弃寿行时,大地安住在悲悯的本性中,无法忍受心的激荡而震动。般涅槃时,大地被哀泣之力所冲击而震动。不过,这个道理应该从地居天神的层面来理解,而不是说四大种的地本身在震动,因为四大种没有心识。巴利
Iti imesu aṭṭhasu pathavīkampesu paṭhamo dhātukopena, dutiyo iddhānubhāvena, tatiyacatutthā puññatejena, pañcamo ñāṇatejena, chaṭṭho sādhukāradānavasena, sattamo kāruññabhāvena, aṭṭhamo ārodanena. Mātukucchiṃ okkamante ca tato nikkhamante ca mahāsatte tassa puññatejena pathavī akampittha. Abhisambodhiyaṃ ñāṇatejena abhihatā hutvā akampittha. Dhammacakkappavattane sādhukārabhāvasaṇṭhitā sādhukāraṃ dadamānā akampittha. Āyusaṅkhārossajjane kāruññasabhāvasaṇṭhitā cittasaṅkhobhaṃ asahamānā akampittha. Parinibbāne ārodanavegatunnā hutvā akampittha. Ayaṃ panattho pathavīdevatāya vasena veditabbo, mahābhūtapathaviyā panetaṃ natthi acetanattāti.
阿难,这些确实就是八种原因。这里说的“这些”,指的就是前面已经指出的那些。到这个时候,具寿阿难已经觉察到:“世尊今天确实舍弃了寿行。”可是世尊虽然知道他已觉察,却没有给他开口的机会,而是继续把另外八项也综合起来,说道:“阿难,有这八种……”等等。巴利
Ime kho, ānanda, aṭṭha hetūti ettha imeti niddiṭṭhanidassanaṃ. Ettāvatā ca panāyasmā ānando – ‘‘addhā ajja bhagavatā āyusaṅkhāro ossaṭṭho’’ti sallakkhesi. Bhagavā pana sallakkhitabhāvaṃ jānantopi okāsaṃ adatvāva aññānipi aṭṭhakāni sampiṇḍento – ‘‘aṭṭha kho imā’’tiādimāha.
八众的注释巴利
Aṭṭhaparisavaṇṇanā
172 172. 其中,“数百刹帝利众”是指像频婆娑罗王集会、亲族集会、离车族集会等那样的大众,而这类大众在其他轮围界也能见到。“曾有交谈”是指曾经有过对话交谈。“讨论”是指也曾进行过法的讨论。“他们的容貌如何”:他们有的白、有的黑、有的呈麦色,而导师是金色。不过这是就身形而说的。就身形来说,他们各自只看到自己的身形;世尊并不像边地人,也不佩戴宝珠耳环,而是以佛陀的威仪而坐。但他们看到的却是与自己相同的身形。“他们的声音如何”:他们有的声音嘶哑,有的声音咕噜作响,有的声音像乌鸦,而导师是梵音。不过这是就他们所说的方言而说的。因为即使导师坐在国王的座位上说法,他们也会觉得:“今天国王用美妙的声音在说法。”世尊说完法离开后,他们又看到国王出现,就会生起这样的探究:“这到底是谁?”这里“这到底是谁”的意思是:刚才用摩揭陀语、僧伽罗语,以美妙的方式说法后消失的那位,是天人,还是人?他们这样探究,却仍然不知道。那么,为什么为这些不知道的人说法呢?为了留下熏习。因为即使这样听闻的法,在未来也会成为助缘,所以是为未来而说法。“数百婆罗门众”等,也应从索纳丹达、俱答丹达等集会以及其他轮围界这两方面来理解其出现。巴利
172. Tattha anekasataṃ khattiyaparisanti bimbisārasamāgamañātisamāgalicchavīsamāgamādisadisaṃ, sā pana aññesu cakkavāḷesupi labbhateyeva. Sallapitapubbanti ālāpasallāpo katapubbo. Sākacchāti dhammasākacchāpi samāpajjitapubbā. Yādisako tesaṃ vaṇṇoti te odātāpi honti kāḷāpi maṅguracchavīpi, satthā suvaṇṇavaṇṇova. Idaṃ pana saṇṭhānaṃ paṭicca kathitaṃ. Saṇṭhānampi ca kevalaṃ tesaṃ paññāyatiyeva, na pana bhagavā milakkhusadiso hoti, nāpi āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalo, buddhaveseneva nisīdati. Te pana attano samānasaṇṭhānameva passanti. Yādisako tesaṃ saroti te chinnassarāpi honti gaggarassarāpi kākassarāpi, satthā brahmassarova. Idaṃ pana bhāsantaraṃ sandhāya kathitaṃ. Sacepi hi satthā rājāsane nisinno katheti, ‘‘ajja rājā madhurena sarena kathetī’’ti tesaṃ hoti. Kathetvā pakkante pana bhagavati puna rājānaṃ āgataṃ disvā – ‘‘ko nu kho aya’’nti vīmaṃsā uppajjati. Tattha ko nu kho ayanti imasmiṃ ṭhāne idāneva māgadhabhāsāya sīhaḷabhāsāya madhurenākārena kathento ko nu kho ayaṃ antarahito, kiṃ devo, udāhu manussoti evaṃ vīmaṃsantāpi na jānantīti attho. Kimatthaṃ panevaṃ ajānantānaṃ dhammaṃ desetīti? Vāsanatthāya . Evaṃ sutopi hi dhammo anāgate paccayo hoti yevāti anāgataṃ paṭicca deseti. Anekasataṃ brāhmaṇaparisantiādīnampi soṇadaṇḍakūṭadaṇḍasamāgamādivasena ceva aññacakkavāḷavasena ca sambhavo veditabbo.
世尊为什么要举出这八众呢?正是为了显示如来无所畏惧的状态。据说,世尊举出这八众之后这样说道:阿难,如来即使走近这八众说法,也不会有恐惧或怯弱;难道看见魔罗单独一人,如来就会害怕吗?谁能生起这样的想法呢?阿难,如来无所畏惧、毫不惊怖,具足正念正知,已经舍弃了寿行。巴利
Imā pana aṭṭha parisā bhagavā kimatthaṃ āhari? Abhītabhāvadassanatthameva. Imā kira āharitvā evamāha – ‘‘ānanda, imāpi aṭṭha parisā upasaṅkamitvā dhammaṃ desentassa tathāgatassa bhayaṃ vā sārajjaṃ vā natthi, māraṃ pana ekakaṃ disvā tathāgato bhāyeyyāti ko evaṃ saññaṃ uppādetumarahati. Abhīto, ānanda, tathāgato acchambhī, sato sampajāno āyusaṅkhāraṃ ossajī’’ti.
八胜处的注释巴利
Aṭṭhaabhibhāyatanavaṇṇanā
173 173. “胜处”是指能战胜的因。它们战胜什么?既战胜对立之法,也战胜所缘。因为它们以对治的方式战胜对立之法,又因为修行者的智慧超胜而战胜所缘。巴利
173.Abhibhāyatanānīti abhibhavanakāraṇāni. Kiṃ abhibhavanti? Paccanīkadhammepi ārammaṇānipi. Tāni hi paṭipakkhabhāvena paccanīkadhamme abhibhavanti, puggalassa ñāṇuttariyatāya ārammaṇāni.
在“内有色想”等说法里,所谓“内有色想”,是指以内在自身的色法作为修习所缘来作遍作修习。因为修青遍的人,是在头发、胆汁或眼珠上修;修黄遍的人,是在脂肪、皮肤、手足背面或眼中黄色的地方修;修赤遍的人,是在肌肉、血液、舌头或眼中红色的地方修;修白遍的人,是在骨、牙齿、指甲或眼中白色的地方修。不过,他们所取的并不是极青、极黄、极赤、极白,而只是不纯净的所缘而已。巴利
Ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññītiādīsu pana ajjhattarūpe parikammavasena ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī nāma hoti. Ajjhattañhi nīlaparikammaṃ karonto kese vā pitte vā akkhitārakāya vā karoti. Pītaparikammaṃ karonto mede vā chaviyā vā hatthapādapiṭṭhesu vā akkhīnaṃ pītakaṭṭhāne vā karoti. Lohitaparikammaṃ karonto maṃse vā lohite vā jivhāya vā akkhīnaṃ rattaṭṭhāne vā karoti. Odātaparikammaṃ karonto aṭṭhimhi vā dante vā nakhe vā akkhīnaṃ setaṭṭhāne vā karoti. Taṃ pana sunīlaṃ supītaṃ sulohitakaṃ suodātakaṃ na hoti, avisuddhameva hoti.
有人虽然是在自己身内修准备定,但取相却在外面,这就是以内准备作意与外安止之力而说“内有色想,一人在外看色”。所谓“小”,是指没有扩大。所谓“金色、难看色”,是说那些色要么是金色的,要么是难看的。应当知道,这个胜处只是就“小”来说的。所谓“胜过那些色”,就像有人消化力强,得到一匙量的饭食,心想“这里面有什么可吃的”,于是把它捏成一团;同样,智慧超胜、智慧清明的人想:“在这种微小的所缘上有什么可入定的?这对我来说不是负担。”于是他胜过那些色而入定。这里的意思是:就在相生起的同时,他就达到了安止。所谓“我知道、我看见”,这里说的是出定之后的作意。而且这只是对出定者说的,不是在定中。所谓“有这样想”,是说无论是以作意想,还是以禅那想,他都是这样想。因为他在定中也有胜伏想,而作意想则只是出定之后才有。巴利
Eko bahiddhā rūpāni passatīti yassevaṃ parikammaṃ ajjhattaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, nimittaṃ pana bahiddhā, so evaṃ ajjhattaṃ parikammassa bahiddhā ca appanāya vasena – ‘‘ajjhattaṃ rūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passatī’’ti vuccati. Parittānīti avaḍḍhitāni. Suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānīti suvaṇṇāni vā honti, dubbaṇṇāni vā. Parittavaseneva idaṃ abhibhāyatanaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tāni abhibhuyyāti yathā nāma sampannagahaṇiko kaṭacchumattaṃ bhattaṃ labhitvā – ‘‘kiṃ ettha bhuñjitabbaṃ atthī’’ti saṅkaḍḍhitvā ekakabaḷameva karoti, evameva ñāṇuttariko puggalo visadañāṇo – ‘‘kiṃ ettha parittake ārammaṇe samāpajjitabbaṃ atthi, nāyaṃ mama bhāro’’ti tāni rūpāni abhibhavitvā samāpajjati, saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ pāpetīti attho. Jānāmipassāmīti iminā panassa ābhogo kathito. So ca kho samāpattito vuṭṭhitassa, na antosamāpattiyaṃ. Evaṃsaññī hotīti ābhogasaññāyapi jhānasaññāyapi evaṃsaññī hoti. Abhibhavanasaññā hissa antosamāpattiyampi atthi, ābhogasaññā pana samāpattito vuṭṭhitasseva.
“无量”是指已经扩展了它的量,也就是“广大”的意思。而“胜伏”在这里是说:就像一个大胃王得到满满一钵饭,心里想“再来点也行,这点饭对我算什么”,他根本不觉得这算多。同样,智慧更胜、智慧清明的人,心想“在这里有什么好入定的?这不算无量,要让我的心达到一境性,对我来说根本不是负担”,于是胜伏了那些色法而入定。这里的意思是:就在所缘相生起的同时,他就能达到安止。巴利
Appamāṇānīti vaḍḍhitappamāṇāni, mahantānīti attho. Abhibhuyyāti ettha pana yathā mahagghaso puriso ekaṃ bhattavaḍḍhitakaṃ labhitvā – ‘‘aññampi hotu, kiṃ etaṃ mayhaṃ karissatī’’ti taṃ na mahantato passati, evameva ñāṇuttaro puggalo visadañāṇo ‘‘kiṃ ettha samāpajjitabbaṃ, nayidaṃ appamāṇaṃ, na mayhaṃ cittekaggatākaraṇe bhāro atthī’’ti tāni abhibhavitvā samāpajjati, saha nimittuppādenevettha appanaṃ pāpetīti attho.
没有内在色想,是因为没有获得,或是因为不感兴趣,所以缺乏对内在色的遍作想。巴利
Ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññīti alābhitāya vā anatthikatāya vā ajjhattarūpe parikammasaññāvirahito.
对于他来说,准备工作相和似相都只在外在生起,他就依外在的准备工作相和安止定,被称为“内无色想,独自在外观看诸色”。这里其余的内容,和第四胜处所说的方式相同。在这四种胜处当中,“小”是依寻行者的性格而说的,“无量”是依痴行者的性格而说的,“胜色”是依嗔行者的性格而说的,“劣色”是依贪行者的性格而说的。因为这些对那些人各自都是适合的。而它们之所以适合,详细说明见于《清净道论》中辨别性格的部分。巴利
Eko bahiddhā rūpāni passatīti yassa parikammampi nimittampi bahiddhāva uppannaṃ, so evaṃ bahiddhā parikammassa ceva appanāya ca vasena – ‘‘ajjhattaṃ arūpasaññī eko bahiddhā rūpāni passatī’’ti vuccati. Sesamettha catutthābhibhāyatane vuttanayameva. Imesu pana catūsu parittaṃ vitakkacaritavasena āgataṃ, appamāṇaṃ mohacaritavasena, suvaṇṇaṃ dosacaritavasena, dubbaṇṇaṃ rāgacaritavasena. Etesañhi etāni sappāyāni. Sā ca nesaṃ sappāyatā vitthārato visuddhimagge caritaniddese vuttā.
在第五胜处等当中,“青”是从总括一切的角度说的。“青色”是从颜色的角度说的。“青现”是从显现的角度说的,意思是说,那些布织纹细密不见缝隙,颜色不混杂,看上去就是一片纯青。“青辉”则是从光泽的角度说的,意思是带有青色的光辉、放射青色光芒。以此显示它们的清净。因为这四种胜处正是依清净的颜色而说的。“如乌摩花”:这种花润泽柔软,即便在看的时候也完全是青色的。而耳环花等花,在看的时候却会显出白色的成分。所以这里只取乌摩花,不取那些花。“波罗奈产的”:指产于波罗奈的布。据说那里的棉花柔软,纺纱的女工和织匠都手艺精湛,连水也洁净润泽。因此那块布两面都经过平整处理;无论从哪一面看,都显得平滑、柔软、润泽。巴利
Pañcamaabhibhāyatanādīsu nīlānīti sabbasaṅgāhakavasena vuttaṃ. Nīlavaṇṇānīti vaṇṇavasena. Nīlanidassanānīti nidassanavasena, apaññāya mānavivarāni asambhinnavaṇṇāni ekanīlāneva hutvā dissantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Nīlanibhāsānīti idaṃ pana obhāsavasena vuttaṃ, nīlobhāsāni nīlappabhāyuttānīti attho. Etena nesaṃ visuddhataṃ dasseti. Visuddhavaṇṇavaseneva hi imāni cattāri abhibhāyatanāni vuttāni. Umāpupphanti etañhi pupphaṃ siniddhaṃ mudu, dissamānampi nīlameva hoti. Girikaṇṇikapupphādīni pana dissamānāni setadhātukāneva honti. Tasmā idameva gahitaṃ, na tāni. Bārāṇaseyyakanti bārāṇasisambhavaṃ. Tattha kira kappāsopi mudu, suttakantikāyopi tantavāyāpi chekā, udakampi suci siniddhaṃ. Tasmā taṃ vatthaṃ ubhatobhāgavimaṭṭhaṃ hoti; dvīsupi passesu maṭṭhaṃ mudu siniddhaṃ khāyati.
在“黄”等之中,也应依照同样的方法来理解它的含义。不过,关于“修习青遍的人,在青色中执取相——或者在花中、或者在布中、或者在色元素中”等等,这里遍的修作、遍作修习以及安止的方法,在《清净道论》中都已经详细说过了。这八胜处,也只是为了显示无畏的状态才被引述出来的。据说,世尊说了这些之后,这样说道:“阿难,对于能这样入于等至、又从中出定的如来,既没有恐惧,也没有怯畏。如来见到魔罗单独一人,难道就会害怕吗?谁能生起这样的想法呢?阿难,如来无所畏惧,没有怖畏,具足正念正知,已经舍弃了寿行。”巴利
Pītānītiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. ‘‘Nīlakasiṇaṃ uggaṇhanto nīlasmiṃ nimittaṃ gaṇhāti pupphasmiṃ vā vatthasmiṃ vā vaṇṇadhātuyā vā’’tiādikaṃ panettha kasiṇakaraṇañca parikammañca appanāvidhānañca sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vitthārato vuttameva. Imānipi aṭṭha abhibhāyatanāni abhītabhāvadassanatthameva ānītāni. Imāni kira vatvā evamāha – ‘‘ānanda, evarūpāpi samāpattiyo samāpajjantassa ca vuṭṭhahantassa ca tathāgatassa bhayaṃ vā sārajjaṃ vā natthi, māraṃ pana ekakaṃ disvā tathāgato bhāyeyyāti ko evaṃ saññaṃ uppādetumarahati. Abhīto, ānanda, tathāgato acchambhī, sato sampajāno āyusaṅkhāraṃ ossajī’’ti.
八解脱的注释巴利
Aṭṭhavimokkhavaṇṇanā
174 174. 解脱的讨论本身已经很清楚了。这八种解脱,也只是为了显示无畏而引述出来的。据说,说完这八种解脱之后,他这样说道:“阿难,对于进入这些等至又从中出来的如来,既没有恐惧,也没有怯畏……(中略)……舍弃了。”巴利
174. Vimokkhakathā uttānatthāyeva. Imepi aṭṭha vimokkhā abhītabhāvadassanatthameva ānītā. Imepi kira vatvā evamāha – ‘‘ānanda, etāpi samāpattiyo samāpajjantassa ca vuṭṭhahantassa ca tathāgatassa bhayaṃ vā sārajjaṃ vā natthi…pe… ossajī’’ti.
175 175. 现在,世尊仍然没有给阿难开口的机会,就以“曾有一时……”这种方式,开始了另一段开示。在这里,“初成正觉”的意思是:成为正自觉者之后,最初的那段时间,也就是在第八个七日里。巴利
175. Idānipi bhagavā ānandassa okāsaṃ adatvāva ekamidāhantiādinā nayena aparampi desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha paṭhamābhisambuddhoti abhisambuddho hutvā paṭhamameva aṭṭhame sattāhe.
177 “Ossaṭṭho”的意思是“被释放、被确定”。据说,他这样说了之后,接着说道:“因此,这一万个世界震动了。”巴利
177.Ossaṭṭhoti vissajjito paricchinno, evaṃ kira vatvā – ‘‘tenāyaṃ dasasahassī lokadhātu kampitthā’’ti āha.
阿难请求的说法巴利
Ānandayācanakathā
178 “Alaṃ”这句话是表示拒绝的说法。“Bodhi”指的是对四道智的透彻通达。“Saddahasi tvaṃ”是说“你相信如来所说的那样”。“Tasmātihānanda”(因此,阿难啊):正因为你相信这句话,所以这恰恰是你自己的过失——他就是这样指出的。巴利
178.Alanti paṭikkhepavacanametaṃ. Bodhinti catumaggañāṇapaṭiveghaṃ. Saddahasi tvanti evaṃ vuttabhāvaṃ tathāgatassa saddahasīti vadati. Tasmātihānandāti yasmā idaṃ vacanaṃ saddahasi, tasmā tuyhevetaṃ dukkaṭanti dasseti.
179 世尊为了消除悲伤,并以种种方式把过失归到那位长老身上,才开始宣说这段经文,一开口便是这番话:“我不只是在这里这样提醒你,过去也曾提醒过你,还示现了粗显的相,可你并没有领悟,这完全是你自己的过失。”巴利
179.Ekamidāhanti idaṃ bhagavā – ‘‘na kevalaṃ ahaṃ idheva taṃ āmantesiṃ, aññadāpi āmantetvā oḷārikaṃ nimittaṃ akāsiṃ, tampi tayā na paṭividdhaṃ, tavevāyaṃ aparādho’’ti evaṃ sokavinodanatthāya nānappakārato therasseva dosāropanatthaṃ ārabhi.
183 与所爱、所喜者指的是父母、兄弟、姐妹这一类人。因为出生,就有彼此分离;因为死亡,就有离别;因为存在,就有变异。这在此处怎能得到呢?意思是:正因为一切所爱、所喜者都必然分离,所以,即使圆满了十种巴拉密,证得了正觉,转动了法轮,示现了双神变,又从天上回到人间——凡是已生、已存在、有为、具有坏灭本性的事物,即便是如来的身体,也不可能不坏灭;纵然痛哭哀号,也无法让这件事不发生。又会再回来:已经舍弃、吐出的东西,它确实会再次被吞食。意思就是如此。巴利
183.Piyehi manāpehīti mātāpitābhātābhaginiādikehi jātiyā nānābhāvo, maraṇena vinābhāvo, bhavena aññathābhāvo. Taṃ kutettha labbhāti tanti tasmā, yasmā sabbeheva piyehi manāpehi nānābhāvo, tasmā dasa pāramiyo pūretvāpi, sambodhiṃ patvāpi, dhammacakkaṃ pavattetvāpi, yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ dassetvāpi, devorohaṇaṃ katvāpi, yaṃ taṃ jātaṃ bhūtaṃ saṅkhataṃ palokadhammaṃ, taṃ vata tathāgatassāpi sarīraṃ mā palujjīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati, rodantenāpi kandantenāpi na sakkā taṃ kāraṇaṃ laddhunti. Puna paccāvamissatīti yaṃ cattaṃ vantaṃ, taṃ vata puna paṭikhādissatīti attho.
184 “像这样的梵行”,就是指包含三学的教法梵行。“堪任长途”,就是能承受长途跋涉。“能长久住立”,是因为能长久持续运行,所以能长久住立。“四念处”等,全都是从世间和出世间的角度来说的。而这些菩提分法的详细抉择,在《清净道论》“行道智见清净”的解说中已经全面说明了。这里其余的内容都很容易理解。巴利
184.Yathayidaṃ brahmacariyanti yathā idaṃ sikkhāttayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Addhaniyanti addhānakkhamaṃ. Ciraṭṭhitikanti cirappavattivasena ciraṭṭhitikaṃ. Cattāro satipaṭṭhānātiādi sabbaṃ lokiyalokuttaravaseneva kathitaṃ. Etesaṃ pana bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ vinicchayo sabbākārena visuddhimagge paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiniddese vutto. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.
龙视的注释巴利
Nāgāpalokitavaṇṇanā
186 象视:普通人的骨头是尖对尖顶着的,独觉佛的骨头也是这样,像钩尖一样;但佛陀的骨头不是这样。佛陀的骨头像锁链一样连成一体,所以往后看的时候,没办法转动脖子。就像一头大象想回头看后面时,必须整个身体转过去,佛陀也要这样转身。那时,世尊站在城门口,心里刚生起“我要回头看看毗舍离”的念头,大地就像陶工的轮盘一样转动起来,让世尊面朝毗舍离城,因为“世尊,在圆满无数千劫巴拉密的期间,您从未做过转动脖子回头看的事”。这段话说的就是这件事。巴利
186.Nāgāpalokitanti yathā hi mahājanassa aṭṭhīni koṭiyā koṭiṃ āhacca ṭhitāni paccekabuddhānaṃ, aṅkusakalaggāni viya, na evaṃ buddhānaṃ. Buddhānaṃ pana saṅkhalikāni viya ekābaddhāni hutvā ṭhitāni, tasmā pacchato apalokanakāle na sakkā hoti gīvaṃ parivattetuṃ. Yathā pana hatthināgo pacchābhāgaṃ apaloketukāmo sakalasarīreneva parivattati, evaṃ parivattitabbaṃ hoti. Bhagavato pana nagaradvāre ṭhatvā – ‘‘vesāliṃ apalokessāmī’’ti citte uppannamatte – ‘‘bhagavā anekāni kappakoṭisahassāni pāramiyo pūrentehi tumhehi na gīvaṃ parivattetvā apalokanakammaṃ kata’’nti ayaṃ pathavī kulālacakkaṃ viya parivattetvā bhagavantaṃ vesālinagarābhimukhaṃ akāsi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
难道只在毗舍离才是这样吗?在舍卫城、王舍城、那烂陀、巴咤厘村、国提村、那提迦村等地,世尊每次从那些地方离开时,那也都是最后一次回望。那为什么在那些地方没有作象视呢?因为不稀奇。在那些地方,转身回望并不稀奇,所以世尊没有作。再说,毗舍离的国王们快要灭亡了,三年之后就会覆灭。他们会在城门那里建一座叫“象视”的塔庙,用香、花鬘等来供养,这会给他们带来长久的利益和安乐。出于对他们的慈悯,世尊才作了象视。巴利
Nanu ca na kevalaṃ vesāliyāva, sāvatthirājagahanāḷandapāṭaligāmakoṭigāmanātikagāmakesupi tato tato nikkhantakāle taṃ taṃ sabbaṃ pacchimadassanameva, tattha tattha kasmā nāgāpalokitaṃ nāpalokesīti? Anacchariyattā. Tattha tattha hi nivattetvā apalokentassetaṃ na acchariyaṃ hoti, tasmā nāpalokesi. Api ca vesālirājāno āsannavināsā, tiṇṇaṃ vassānaṃ upari vinassissanti. Te taṃ nagaradvāre nāgāpalokitaṃ nāma cetiyaṃ katvā gandhamālādīhi pūjessanti, taṃ nesaṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya bhavissatīti tesaṃ anukampāya apalokesi.
他是轮回之苦的终结者。所谓“具眼者”,就是具足五种眼的人。所谓“已般涅槃”,就是通过烦恼的般涅槃而般涅槃。巴利
Dukkhassantakaroti vaṭṭadukkhassa antakaro. Cakkhumāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā. Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto.
四大教法的注释巴利
Catumahāpadesavaṇṇanā
187 “大教法”是指在宏大的场合,或者指重大的依据,也就是以佛陀等伟大圣者作为权威依据而说出的重大理由,这就是它的意思。巴利
187.Mahāpadeseti mahāokāse, mahāapadese vā, buddhādayo mahante mahante apadisitvā vuttāni mahākāraṇānīti attho.
188 不应欢喜:意思是,不要事先就以欢喜喝彩的方式听受;因为一旦这样做了,后来被人说“这并不相符”时,他就会说“先前这是法,现在怎么就不是法了”,而不肯放弃自己的见解。不应排斥:意思是,不要事先就说“这个愚人在说什么”;因为一旦这样说了,即使该说的合适的话他也不会说了。所以经文说“不欢喜、不排斥”。文句:就是被称为“句”的字词。善学:在这里,就是要好好把握——此处诵出了经文,此处解释了义理,此处解说了上下文关联,此处说明了前后次第,如此善加把握。入于经:应置于经中。比对于律:应于律中比对。巴利
188.Neva abhinanditabbanti haṭṭhatuṭṭhehi sādhukāraṃ datvā pubbeva na sotabbaṃ, evaṃ kate hi pacchā ‘‘idaṃ na sametī’’ti vuccamāno – ‘‘kiṃ pubbeva ayaṃ dhammo, idāni na dhammo’’ti vatvā laddhiṃ na vissajjeti. Nappaṭikkositabbanti – ‘‘kiṃ esa bālo vadatī’’ti evaṃ pubbeva na vattabbaṃ, evaṃ vutte hi vattuṃ yuttampi na vakkhati. Tenāha – ‘‘anabhinanditvā appaṭikkositvā’’ti. Padabyañjanānīti padasaṅkhātāni byañjanāni. Sādhukaṃ uggahetvāti imasmiṃ ṭhāne pāḷi vuttā, imasmiṃ ṭhāne attho vutto, imasmiṃ ṭhāne anusandhi kathito, imasmiṃ ṭhāne pubbāparaṃ kathitanti suṭṭhu gahetvā. Sutte osāretabbānīti sutte otāretabbāni. Vinaye sandassetabbānīti vinaye saṃsandetabbāni.
这里,“经”指的是律。就像所说的:“在哪里被禁止?在舍卫城的《经分别》中。”而“律”指的是犍度。就像所说的:“在律的违犯中。”这样一来,律藏也没有被完全涵盖。但如果把《二部分别》算作经,把犍度和附随算作律,这样就完全涵盖了律藏。或者,把经藏算作经,把律藏算作律,这样就只涵盖了两藏。又或者,把经藏和论藏算作经,把律藏算作律,这样三藏也还是没有被完全涵盖。因为确实存在不叫“经”的佛语,比如:本生、无碍解道、义释、经集、法句、自说、如是语、天宫事、饿鬼事、长老偈、长老尼偈、譬喻。巴利
Ettha ca suttanti vinayo. Yathāha – ‘‘kattha paṭikkhittaṃ? Sāvatthiyaṃ suttavibhaṅge’’ti (cuḷava. 457). Vinayoti khandhako. Yathāha – ‘‘vinayātisāre’’ti. Evaṃ vinayapiṭakampi na pariyādiyati. Ubhatovibhaṅgā pana suttaṃ, khandhakaparivārā vinayoti evaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ pariyādiyati. Athavā suttantapiṭakaṃ suttaṃ, vinayapiṭakaṃ vinayoti evaṃ dveyeva piṭakāni pariyādiyanti. Suttantābhidhammapiṭakāni vā suttaṃ, vinayapiṭakaṃ vinayoti evampi tīṇi piṭakāni na tāva pariyādiyanti. Asuttanāmakañhi buddhavacanaṃ nāma atthi. Seyyathidaṃ – jātakaṃ, paṭisambhidā, niddeso, suttanipāto, dhammapadaṃ, udānaṃ, itivuttakaṃ, vimānavatthu, petavatthu, theragāthā, therīgāthā, apadānanti.
不过,苏丁那长老反驳说:“并不存在所谓‘不属于经’的佛语。”他把上面这些说法全都否定了,然后说:“三藏都是经,而律才是判定的依据。”为了说明这个依据,他引了下面这部经。巴利
Sudinnatthero pana – ‘‘asuttanāmakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ na atthī’’ti taṃ sabbaṃ paṭipakkhipitvā – ‘‘tīṇi piṭakāni suttaṃ, vinayo pana kāraṇa’’nti āha. Tato taṃ kāraṇaṃ dassento idaṃ suttamāhari –
果达弥,如果你知道某些法导向贪染而不是离贪,导向结缚而不是解缚,导向积聚而不是消散,导向多欲而不是少欲,导向不知足而不是知足,导向群聚而不是独处,导向懈怠而不是精进,导向难养而不是易养,那么,果达弥,你就应当毫无疑问地认定:这不是法,这不是律,这不是导师的教导。果达弥,如果你知道某些法导向离贪而不是贪染,导向解缚而不是结缚,导向消散而不是积聚,导向少欲而不是多欲,导向知足而不是不知足,导向独处而不是群聚,导向精进而不是懈怠,导向易养而不是难养,那么,果达弥,你就应当毫无疑问地认定:这是法,这是律,这是导师的教导。巴利
‘‘Ye kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi, ime dhammā sarāgāya saṃvattanti no virāgāya, saññogāya saṃvattanti no visaññogāya, ācayāya saṃvattanti no apacayāya, mahicchatāya saṃvattanti no appicchatāya, asantuṭṭhiyā saṃvattanti no santuṭṭhiyā, saṅgaṇikāya saṃvattanti no pavivekāya, kosajjāya saṃvattanti no vīriyārambhāya, dubbharatāya saṃvattanti no subharatāya. Ekaṃsena, gotami, dhāreyyāsi – ‘neso dhammo, neso vinayo, netaṃ satthusāsana’nti. Ye ca kho tvaṃ, gotami, dhamme jāneyyāsi, ime dhammā virāgāya saṃvattanti no sarāgāya, visaññogāya saṃvattanti no saññogāya, apacayāya saṃvattanti no ācayāya, appicchatāya saṃvattanti no mahicchatāya, santuṭṭhiyā saṃvattanti no asantuṭṭhiyā, pavivekāya saṃvattanti no saṅgaṇikāya , vīriyārambhāya saṃvattanti no kosajjāya, subharatāya saṃvattanti no dubbharatāya. Ekaṃsena, gotami, dhāreyyāsi – ‘eso dhammo, eso vinayo, etaṃ satthusāsana’nti’’ (a. ni. 8.53).
所以,对于“经”,它们也应该被归入三藏中的佛语;对于“律”,则应该拿来与能调伏贪等烦恼的律法相对照——这就是这里的含义。“不入于经”的意思是:它们在经典的次第中哪里都找不到,像是脱离了传承,被认为是从隐秘的《韦桑德拉》、隐秘的《宝行》、隐秘的《律》、隐秘的《方广》等藏中的某一部传出来的。凡是这样传出来的法,如果也看不出有调伏贪等烦恼的作用,就应当舍弃。因此才说:“诸比丘,你们应当舍弃这个。”用这个方法,就能理解一切处的含义。巴利
Tasmā sutteti tepiṭake buddhavacane otāretabbāni. Vinayeti etasmiṃ rāgādivinayakāraṇe saṃsandetabbānīti ayamettha attho. Na ceva sutte osarantīti suttapaṭipāṭiyā katthaci anāgantvā challiṃ uṭṭhapetvā guḷhavessantara-guḷhaummagga-guḷhavinaya-vedallapiṭakānaṃ aññatarato āgatāni paññāyantīti attho. Evaṃ āgatāni hi rāgādivinaye ca na paññāyamānāni chaḍḍetabbāni honti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘iti hetaṃ, bhikkhave, chaḍḍeyyāthā’’ti. Etenupāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo.
比丘们,你们应当受持这第四大教法。意思是:你们应当把这法的第四安立依据受持下来。巴利
Idaṃ, bhikkhave, catutthaṃ mahāpadesaṃ dhāreyyāthāti idaṃ catutthaṃ dhammassa patiṭṭhānokāsaṃ dhāreyyātha.
不过在这里,还应当知道这些附带的内容:经中的四大教法、犍度中的四大教法、四种问答解释、经、随顺经、老师之说、自己的见解,以及三次结集。巴利
Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne imaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sutte cattāro mahāpadesā, khandhake cattāro mahāpadesā, cattāri pañhabyākaraṇāni, suttaṃ, suttānulomaṃ, ācariyavādo, attanomati, tisso saṅgītiyoti.
在这里,当涉及“这是法、这是律”的判定时,这四大教法是准绳。其中,凡是与之相符的,才应当采纳;不相符的,即使是大声叫喊者所说的,也不应当采纳。巴利
Tattha – ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ vinayo’’ti dhammavinicchaye patte ime cattāro mahāpadesā pamāṇaṃ. Yaṃ ettha sameti tadeva gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ viravantassapi na gahetabbaṃ.
遇到“这是允许的,这是不允许的”这类判断允许不允许的问题时,要以《犍度》中所说的四大教法为准。也就是《大品》第305段那种方式:“诸比丘,凡是我没有禁止、没有说‘这是不允许的’,如果它随顺不允许而排斥允许,那对你们来说就是不允许的。”关于这四大教法的判定解说,见于《一切善见》。按照那里所说的方式,凡是随顺允许的,才是允许的;另一类则是不允许的。应当这样作出断定。巴利
‘‘Idaṃ kappati, idaṃ na kappatī’’ti kappiyākappiyavinicchaye patte – ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, mayā idaṃ na kappatīti appaṭikkhittaṃ, taṃ ce akappiyaṃ anulometi, kappiyaṃ paṭibāhati, taṃ vo na kappatī’’tiādinā (mahāva. 305) nayena khandhake vuttā cattāro mahāpadesā pamāṇaṃ. Tesaṃ vinicchayakathā samantapāsādikāyaṃ vuttā. Tattha vuttanayena yaṃ kappiyaṃ anulometi, tadeva kappiyaṃ, itaraṃ akappiyanti evaṃ sanniṭṭhānaṃ kātabbaṃ.
问题有四种回答方式:一向回答、分别回答、反问后回答、搁置不答。
其中,如果有人问“眼是无常的吗”,就应该直接回答:“是的,是无常的。”对耳等也是这样。这是一向回答的问题。
如果有人问“所谓无常,指的就是眼吗”,就应该分开来说:“不只是眼,耳也是无常的,鼻也是无常的。”这样分别回答。这是分别回答的问题。
如果有人问“就像眼那样,耳也是这样;就像耳那样,眼也是这样吗”,就应该先反问:“你是从哪个角度问的?”如果他说“我是从‘看’这个作用来问的”,就应该回答“不是”;如果他说“我是从‘无常’这个角度来问的”,就应该回答“是的”。这是反问后回答的问题。
如果有人问“命就是身体”这类问题,就应该把它搁在一边,说“世尊对这个问题没有记说”,这类问题不应该回答。这是搁置不答的问题。
因此,遇到问题的时候,这四种回答方式就是标准,应该按照它们来回答。巴利
Ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyo pañho, vibhajjabyākaraṇīyo pañho, paṭipucchābyākaraṇīyo pañho, ṭhapanīyo pañhoti imāni cattāri pañhabyākaraṇāni nāma. Tattha ‘‘cakkhuṃ anicca’’nti puṭṭhena – ‘‘āma anicca’’nti ekaṃseneva byākātabbaṃ . Esa nayo sotādīsu. Ayaṃ ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyo pañho. ‘‘Aniccaṃ nāma cakkhu’’nti puṭṭhena – ‘‘na cakkhumeva, sotampi aniccaṃ ghānampi anicca’’nti evaṃ vibhajitvā byākātabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vibhajjabyākaraṇīyo pañho. ‘‘Yathā cakkhu tathā sotaṃ, yathā sotaṃ tathā cakkhu’’nti puṭṭhena ‘‘kenaṭṭhena pucchasī’’ti paṭipucchitvā ‘‘dassanaṭṭhena pucchāmī’’ti vutte ‘‘na hī’’ti byākātabbaṃ, ‘‘aniccaṭṭhena pucchāmī’’ti vutte āmāti byākātabbaṃ. Ayaṃ paṭipucchābyākaraṇīyo pañho. ‘‘Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīra’’ntiādīni puṭṭhena pana ‘‘abyākatametaṃ bhagavatā’’ti ṭhapetabbo, esa pañho na byākātabbo. Ayaṃ ṭhapanīyo pañho. Iti tenākārena pañhe sampatte imāni cattāri pañhabyākaraṇāni pamāṇaṃ. Imesaṃ vasena so pañho byākātabbo.
在经等之中,所谓“经”,就是指三次结集所收录的三藏。“随顺经”,是指与经相顺、可以接受的内容。“师说”,是指义注。“自意”,是指通过掌握方法而领悟到的个人见解。其中,经是不可违逆的;违逆经的人,就等于违逆了佛陀。至于随顺经,只有与经相符的才应当采纳,不相符的不应采纳。师说也一样,只有与经相符的才应当采纳,不相符的不应采纳。自意则最为无力,同样只有与经相符的才应当采纳,不相符的不应采纳。所谓三次结集,就是五百结集、七百结集和一千结集。只有这三次结集中所传的经才是标准;其他那些应受指责的经不应采纳。应当知道,即使有些词句看似能融入,它们实际上既不在经中出现,也不在律中显现。巴利
Suttādīsu pana suttaṃ nāma tisso saṅgītiyo ārūḷhāni tīṇi piṭakāni. Suttānulomaṃ nāma anulomakappiyaṃ. Ācariyavādo nāma aṭṭhakathā. Attanomati nāma nayaggāhena anubuddhiyā attano paṭibhānaṃ. Tattha suttaṃ appaṭibāhiyaṃ, taṃ paṭibāhantena buddhova paṭibāhito hoti. Anulomakappiyaṃ pana suttena samentameva gahetabbaṃ, na itaraṃ. Ācariyavādopi suttena samentoyeva gahetabbo, na itaro. Attanomati pana sabbadubbalā, sāpi suttena samentāyeva gahetabbā, na itarā. Pañcasatikā, sattasatikā, sahassikāti imā pana tisso saṅgītiyo. Suttampi tāsu āgatameva pamāṇaṃ, itaraṃ gārayhasuttaṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Tattha otarantānipi hi padabyañjanāni na ceva sutte otaranti, na ca vinaye sandissantīti veditabbāni.
铁匠之子春达的故事注释巴利
Kammāraputtacundavatthuvaṇṇanā
189 “铁匠之子”是指金匠的儿子。据说他是个有钱的大户人家之主,第一次见到世尊时就证得了入流果,然后在自己的芒果园里建了一座精舍,奉献给世尊。经文里说的“芒果园”,就是指这件事。巴利
189.Kammāraputtassāti suvaṇṇakāraputtassa. So kira aḍḍho mahākuṭumbiko bhagavato paṭhamadassaneneva sotāpanno hutvā attano ambavane vihāraṃ kārāpetvā niyyātesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘ambavane’’ti.
所谓“软猪肉”,是指一头既不太幼小、也不太衰老的成年猪身上现成的肉。据说这种肉又柔软又肥润,意思是让人把它准备好,再仔细烹调。有些人说:“所谓‘软猪肉’,其实是一种用五种牛乳汤煮软米饭的烹调方法的名称,就像有一种煮法叫‘牛饮’一样。”还有些人说:“‘软猪肉’是一种延命药方,记载在延命医书中;春达为了祈愿‘愿世尊不要般涅槃’,特意准备了这种延命药。”而在那里,在被两千座岛屿环绕的四大洲上,天神们都往里面注入了营养精华。巴利
Sūkaramaddavanti nātitaruṇassa nātijiṇṇassa ekajeṭṭhakasūkarassa pavattamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ kira mudu ceva siniddhañca hoti, taṃ paṭiyādāpetvā sādhukaṃ pacāpetvāti attho. Eke bhaṇanti – ‘‘sūkaramaddavanti pana muduodanassa pañcagorasayūsapācanavidhānassa nāmetaṃ, yathā gavapānaṃ nāma pākanāma’’nti. Keci bhaṇanti – ‘‘sūkaramaddavaṃ nāma rasāyanavidhi, taṃ pana rasāyanasatthe āgacchati, taṃ cundena – ‘bhagavato parinibbānaṃ na bhaveyyā’ti rasāyanaṃ paṭiyatta’’nti. Tattha pana dvisahassadīpaparivāresu catūsu mahādīpesu devatā ojaṃ pakkhipiṃsu.
他说“我不”这句话,是为了什么而发出这样的狮子吼呢?是为了免除他人的指责。因为如果有人想指责说:“他自己吃剩的东西,既不布施给比丘们,也不施给其他人,却让人挖坑埋掉、毁弃了。”为了让这些想指责的人听到之后,再也找不到开口的机会,所以他是为了免除他人的指责而发出狮子吼。巴利
Nāhaṃ tanti imaṃ sīhanādaṃ kimatthaṃ nadati? Parūpavādamocanatthaṃ. Attanā paribhuttāvasesaṃ neva bhikkhūnaṃ, na manussānaṃ dātuṃ adāsi, āvāṭe nikhaṇāpetvā vināsesīti hi vattukāmānaṃ idaṃ sutvā vacanokāso na bhavissatīti paresaṃ upavādamocanatthaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadatīti.
190 他吃了猪肉软食之后才发病,并不是因为吃了东西才发病。如果是在没吃东西的时候发病,那就会非常剧烈。不过,因为他吃的是滋润的食物,所以苦受很轻微,正因如此他才能步行。所谓“泄血”,就是一直在排出脓血。他说这话,是为了在自己期望的地方般涅槃。应当知道,这些偈颂是结集法的长老们所安立的。巴利
190.Bhuttassa ca sūkaramaddavenāti bhuttassa udapādi, na pana bhuttapaccayā. Yadi hi abhuttassa uppajjissatha, atikharo bhavissati. Siniddhabhojanaṃ bhuttattā panassa tanuvedanā ahosi. Teneva padasā gantuṃ asakkhi. Virecamānoti abhiṇhaṃ pavattalohitavirecanova samāno . Avocāti attanā patthitaṭṭhāne parinibbānatthāya evamāha. Imā pana dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi ṭhapitagāthāyoti veditabbā.
取水注释巴利
Pānīyāharaṇavaṇṇanā
191 Iṅgha 是表示催促的语气词。Acchodakā 指清澈的水。Sātodakā 指甘甜的水。Sītodakā 指微清凉的水。Setakā 指没有污泥。Suppatitthā 指渡口很好。巴利
191.Iṅghāti codanatthe nipāto. Acchodakāti pasannodakā. Sātodakāti madhurodakā. Sītodakāti tanusītalasalilā. Setakāti nikkaddamā. Suppatitthāti sundaratitthā.
弗居娑·末罗子的事迹注释巴利
Pukkusamallaputtavatthuvaṇṇanā
192 普库萨是他的名字。末罗子是末罗国王的儿子。据说末罗人轮流执政,还没轮到他们当王的时候,他们就做买卖。他也是在做买卖,套好了五百辆车。刮逆风时,他走在前面;刮顺风时,他让商队首领走在前面,自己跟在后面。那时刮的是顺风,所以他就让商队首领先走,自己坐在装饰着各种宝物的车上,从拘尸那罗出发,心想“我要去波婆”,就上路了。因此经中说:“他从拘尸那罗出发,踏上了通往波婆的路。”巴利
192.Pukkusoti tassa nāmaṃ. Mallaputtoti mallarājaputto. Mallā kira vārena rajjaṃ kārenti. Yāva nesaṃ vāro na pāpuṇāti, tāva vaṇijjaṃ karonti. Ayampi vaṇijjameva karonto pañca sakaṭasatāni yojāpetvā dhuravāte vāyante purato gacchati, pacchā vāte vāyante satthavāhaṃ purato pesetvā sayaṃ pacchā gacchati. Tadā pana pacchā vāto vāyi, tasmā esa purato satthavāhaṃ pesetvā sabbaratanayāne nisīditvā kusinārato nikkhamitvā ‘‘pāvaṃ gamissāmī’’ti maggaṃ paṭipajji. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘kusinārāya pāvaṃ addhānamaggappaṭipanno hotī’’ti.
阿罗罗是他的名字。据说他身材修长、肤色黄褐,因此得名阿罗罗。迦罗摩是他的族姓。yatra hi nāma 的意思是“那个所谓的”。neva dakkhati 就是没有看见。不过,因为和 yatra 这个词连用,这里是就未来时态来说的。在这样类似的场合,语法规则确实就是如此。巴利
Āḷāroti tassa nāmaṃ. Dīghapiṅgalo kireso, tenassa āḷāroti nāmaṃ ahosi. Kālāmoti gottaṃ. Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma. Neva dakkhatīti na addasa. Yatrasaddayuttattā panetaṃ anāgatavasena vuttaṃ. Evarūpañhi īdisesu ṭhānesu saddalakkhaṇaṃ.
193 “Niccharantīsū”是说正在走动的时候。“Asaniyā phalantiyā”是说当九种霹雳像碎裂一样发出巨大吼声的时候。九种霹雳是:无想霹雳、独轮霹雳、百叶霹雳、轰鸣霹雳、猴头霹雳、鱼跃霹雳、鸡形霹雳、犁形霹雳、干霹雳。其中,无想霹雳让人失去知觉;独轮霹雳变成一个轮子;百叶霹雳像百叶一样落下来;轰鸣霹雳轰隆隆地落下来;猴头霹雳落下来时像猴子扬起眉毛;鱼跃霹雳像鱼在翻腾跳跃;鸡形霹雳像鸡一样落下来;犁形霹雳像犁一样落下来;干霹雳把落下的地方彻底摧毁。巴利
193.Niccharantīsūti vicarantīsu. Asaniyā phalantiyāti navavidhāya asaniyā bhijjamānāya viya mahāravaṃ ravantiyā. Navavidhā hi asaniyo – asaññā, vicakkā, saterā, gaggarā, kapisīsā, macchavilolikā, kukkuṭakā, daṇḍamaṇikā, sukkhāsanīti. Tattha asaññā asaññaṃ karoti. Vicakkā ekaṃ cakkaṃ karoti. Saterā saterasadisā hutvā patati. Gaggarā gaggarāyamānā patati. Kapisīsā bhamukaṃ ukkhipento makkaṭo viya hoti. Macchavilolikā vilolitamaccho viya hoti. Kukkuṭakā kukkuṭasadisā hutvā patati. Daṇḍamaṇikā naṅgalasadisā hutvā patati. Sukkhāsanī patitaṭṭhānaṃ samugghāṭeti.
天打旱雷,是指雷声干响、雨时断时续地下。依阿兔摩而住,是指依靠阿兔摩住着。打谷场的小屋,就是指打谷场上的棚屋。此处此人,是指因为这个缘故,这一大群人聚集在这里。在哪里,是指曾在何处。尊者,您就是那位。巴利
Devevassanteti sukkhagajjitaṃ gajjitvā antarantarā vassante. Ātumāyanti ātumaṃ nissāya viharāmi. Bhusāgāreti khalasālāyaṃ. Etthesoti etasmiṃ kāraṇe eso mahājanakāyo sannipatito. Kva ahosīti kuhiṃ ahosi. So taṃ bhanteti so tvaṃ bhante.
194 “Siṅgīvaṇṇaṃ”是指像黄金一样颜色的布。“Yugamaṭṭhaṃ”是指柔软的一对,也就是细软的两件一套的衣服。“Dhāraṇīyaṃ”是指应当由我间隔着穿、应当由我披着的意思。据说他只在像节日那样的日子才穿它,其余时间就收起来。世尊就是针对这一套最上等的吉祥衣物而说的。“Anukampaṃ upādāya”是出于对我的怜悯。“Acchādehi”这是一种委婉说法,意思是“给我一件,给阿难一件”。那么长老接受了吗?接受了。为什么?因为他的侍者职责已经达到顶点。虽然他曾经为了履行侍者职责而拒绝过这样的利养,但他的侍者工作此时已经圆满,所以接受了。再者,为了防止有人这样说:“阿难恐怕并不是一位值得供养的人吧——他侍奉世尊二十五年,却从未从世尊那里得到过任何东西”,为了堵住这种说法的口实,他也接受了。此外,世尊知道:“阿难即使接受了,也不会自己穿,只会拿来供养我。而末罗人供养阿难时,僧团也就得到了供养,这样他就会获得巨大的福德聚。”因此世尊让长老接受一件,长老也正是因为这个原因而接受了。“Dhammiyā kathāyā”是指随喜衣物的开示。巴利
194.Siṅgīvaṇṇanti siṅgīsuvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ. Yugamaṭṭhanti maṭṭhayugaṃ, saṇhasāṭakayugaḷanti attho. Dhāraṇīyanti antarantarā mayā dhāretabbaṃ, paridahitabbanti attho. Taṃ kira so tathārūpe chaṇadivaseyeva dhāretvā sesakāle nikkhipati. Evaṃ uttamaṃ maṅgalavatthayugaṃ sandhāyāha. Anukampaṃ upādāyāti mayi anukampaṃ paṭicca. Acchādehīti upacāravacanametaṃ – ekaṃ mayhaṃ dehi, ekaṃ ānandassāti attho. Kiṃ pana thero taṃ gaṇhīti? Āma gaṇhi. Kasmā? Matthakappattakiccattā. Kiñcāpi hesa evarūpaṃ lābhaṃ paṭikkhipitvā upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ paṭipanno. Taṃ panassa upaṭṭhākakiccaṃ matthakaṃ pattaṃ. Tasmā aggahesi. Ye cāpi evaṃ vadeyyuṃ – ‘‘anārādhako maññe ānando pañcavīsati vassāni upaṭṭhahantena na kiñci bhagavato santikā tena laddhapubba’’nti. Tesaṃ vacanokāsacchedanatthampi aggahesi. Api ca jānāti bhagavā – ‘‘ānando gahetvāpi attanā na dhāressati, mayhaṃyeva pūjaṃ karissati. Mallaputtena pana ānandaṃ pūjentena saṅghopi pūjito bhavissati, evamassa mahāpuññarāsi bhavissatī’’ti therassa ekaṃ dāpesi. Theropi teneva kāraṇena aggahesīti. Dhammiyā kathāyāti vatthānumodanakathāya.
195 把布献给世尊的身体,意思是把布贴近世尊的身体,准备给他当内衣和上衣穿。世尊于是拿了一件穿上,一件披上。就像火炭一样,意思是说,就像火炭只在内部燃烧发光,外面却没有光焰;同样地,世尊的身体被衣服遮住后,光芒也隐没不显,就是这个意思。巴利
195.Bhagavato kāyaṃ upanāmitanti nivāsanapārupanavasena allīyāpitaṃ. Bhagavāpi tato ekaṃ nivāsesi, ekaṃ pārupi. Hataccikaṃ viyāti yathā hatacciko aṅgāro antanteneva jotati, bahi panassa pabhā natthi, evaṃ bahi paṭicchannappabhaṃ hutvā khāyatīti attho.
阿难,为什么偏偏在这两个时候会这样呢?因为饮食特别殊胜,加上极强的欢喜心。在这两个时候,整个轮围世界的天神都把营养精华注入食物里,那些精妙的美食进到肚子里,就生出清净的色法。因为饮食所生的色法清净,以意为第六的六根就变得极其明亮耀眼。在成等正觉那天,他这样作意:“我在无数百千俱胝劫里积攒的烦恼堆,今天终于彻底断尽了!”于是生起极强的欢喜,心变得澄净;心澄净了,血液就澄净;血液澄净了,以意为第六的六根就变得极其明亮耀眼。在般涅槃那天,他也这样作意:“今天我要进入那无数百千诸佛所进入的不死大涅槃城了!”于是生起极强的欢喜,心变得澄净;心澄净了,血液就澄净;血液澄净了,以意为第六的六根就变得极其明亮耀眼。所以应当知道,正是由于饮食特别殊胜和极强的欢喜心,在这两个时候才会这样。Upavattane 指东边拐弯处的娑罗树林。Antarena yamakasālānaṃ 指两棵双娑罗树的中间。巴利
Imesu kho, ānanda, dvīsupi kālesūti kasmā imesu dvīsu kālesu evaṃ hoti? Āhāravisesena ceva balavasomanassena ca. Etesu hi dvīsu kālesu sakalacakkavāḷe devatā āhāre ojaṃ pakkhipanti, taṃ paṇītabhojanaṃ kucchiṃ pavisitvā pasannarūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Āhārasamuṭṭhānarūpassa pasannattā manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni ativiya virocanti. Sambodhidivase cassa – ‘‘anekakappakoṭisatasahassasañcito vata me kilesarāsi ajja pahīno’’ti āvajjantassa balavasomanassaṃ uppajjati, cittaṃ pasīdati, citte pasanne lohitaṃ pasīdati, lohite pasanne manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni ativiya virocanti. Parinibbānadivasepi – ‘‘ajja, dānāhaṃ, anekehi buddhasatasahassehi paviṭṭhaṃ amatamahānibbānaṃ nāma nagaraṃ pavisissāmī’’ti āvajjantassa balavasomanassaṃ uppajjati, cittaṃ pasīdati, citte pasanne lohitaṃ pasīdati, lohite pasanne manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni ativiya virocanti. Iti āhāravisesena ceva balavasomanassena ca imesu dvīsu kālesu evaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Upavattaneti pācīnato nivattanasālavane. Antarena yamakasālānanti yamakasālarukkhānaṃ majjhe.
“Siṅgīvaṇṇa”这些偈颂是在结集的时候安立下来的。巴利
Siṅgīvaṇṇanti gāthā saṅgītikāle ṭhapitā.
196 196. 沐浴并饮水之后,在这里是指:据说那时世尊正在沐浴,河里的鱼和鳖、两岸的树林,一切都呈现出金色。芒果园是指那条河岸边的芒果园。具寿春达是指:据说当时阿难尊者正在拧干浴衣,落在了后面,而春达尊者在近旁。于是世尊吩咐他。巴利
196.Nhatvāca pivitvā cāti ettha tadā kira bhagavati nahāyante antonadiyaṃ macchakacchapā ca ubhatotīresu vanasaṇḍo ca sabbaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇameva hoti. Ambavananti tassāyeva nadiyā tīre ambavanaṃ. Āyasmantaṃ cundakanti tasmiṃ kira khaṇe ānandatthero udakasāṭakaṃ pīḷento ohīyi, cundatthero samīpe ahosi. Taṃ bhagavā āmantesi.
佛陀前往迦古陀河后,这些偈颂也是在结集时就已安立了。其中,“pavattā bhagavā idha dhamme”是说:世尊在此教法中使法运转,也就是转动了八万四千法蕴。“Pamukhe nisīdīti”是说坐在世尊面前。到这时,长老已经到了。长老就这样到来之后,世尊便招呼阿难尊者。巴利
Gantvāna buddho nadikaṃ kakudhanti imāpi gāthā saṅgītikāleyeva ṭhapitā. Tattha pavattā bhagavā idha dhammeti bhagavā idha sāsane dhamme pavattā, caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni pavattānīti attho. Pamukhe nisīdīti satthu puratova nisīdi. Ettāvatā ca thero anuppatto. Evaṃ anuppattaṃ atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesi.
197 非利得是指:别人那些可以称为布施功德利益的利得,对这个人来说却成了非利得。难得是说:即使凭某种殊胜功德而得到了人身,这人身也算是难得。对于你、你的是指对于你、属于你的。谁知道那是未煮的生米,还是煮得太烂的饭呢?不管怎样,如来吃了最后那一顿团食之后就般涅槃了,别人一定会说,你供养的不管是怎样的东西,反正也就是那样吧。利得是指可称为现世利益和来世利益的布施功德。善得是说,你这个人身是善得。果报平等是指从一切方面来说果报都相同。巴利
197.Alābhāti ye aññesaṃ dānānisaṃsasaṅkhātā lābhā honti, te alābhā. Dulladdhanti puññavisesena laddhampi manussattaṃ dulladdhaṃ. Yassa teti yassa tava. Uttaṇḍulaṃ vā atikilinnaṃ vā ko jānāti, kīdisampi pacchimaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjitvā tathāgato parinibbuto, addhā te yaṃ vā taṃ vā dinnaṃ bhavissatīti. Lābhāti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikadānānisaṃsasaṅkhātā lābhā. Suladdhanti tuyhaṃ manussattaṃ suladdhaṃ. Samasamaphalāti sabbākārena samānaphalā.
有人会问:如来是吃了善生女供养的团食才证得正觉的,那时他还有贪、有嗔、有痴;而春达供养的这餐团食,是在如来已经离贪、离嗔、离痴的时候吃的。那为什么说这两次供养的果报是一样的呢?因为般涅槃相等、等至相等、随念相等。
世尊吃了善生女供养的团食后,以有余涅槃界般涅槃;吃了春达供养的团食后,以无余涅槃界般涅槃。这就是般涅槃相等,所以果报相同。
在成正觉那天,世尊进入了二十四万亿次等至;在般涅槃那天,他也进入了所有这些等至。这就是等至相等,所以果报相同。
善生女后来听说:“那位原来不是树神,而是菩萨!他吃了那团食后,证得了无上正等正觉,就靠那一餐维持了七七四十九天。”她听到这话后,随念道:“我真是得到了大利益!”心中生起了强烈的喜悦。
春达后来也听说:“最后的团食原来是我供养的,我抓住了法的头绪!导师吃了我的团食后,以无余涅槃界般涅槃了。”他随念道:“我真是得到了大利益!”也生起了强烈的喜悦。
这就是随念相等,应当知道二者的果报是相同的。巴利
Nanu ca yaṃ sujātāya dinnaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ bhuñjitvā tathāgato abhisambuddho, so sarāgasadosasamohakāle paribhutto, ayaṃ pana cundena dinno vītarāgavītadosavītamohakāle paribhutto, kasmā ete samaphalāti? Parinibbānasamatāya ca samāpattisamatāya ca anussaraṇasamatāya ca. Bhagavā hi sujātāya dinnaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjitvā saupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbuto, cundena dinnaṃ paribhuñjitvā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutoti evaṃ parinibbānasamatāyapi samaphalā. Abhisambujjhanadivase ca catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā samāpattiyo samāpajji, parinibbānadivasepi sabbā tā samāpajjīti evaṃ samāpattisamatāyapi samaphalā. Sujātā ca aparabhāge assosi – ‘‘na kiresā rukkhadevatā, bodhisatto kiresa, taṃ kira piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho , sattasattāhaṃ kirassa tena yāpanaṃ ahosī’’ti. Tassā idaṃ sutvā – ‘‘lābhā vata me’’ti anussarantiyā balavapītisomanassaṃ udapādi. Cundassāpi aparabhāge – ‘‘avasānapiṇḍapāto kira mayā dinno, dhammasīsaṃ kira me gahitaṃ, mayhaṃ kira piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjitvā satthā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbuto’’ti sutvā ‘‘lābhā vata me’’ti anussarato balavasomanassaṃ udapādīti evaṃ anussaraṇasamatāyapi samaphalāti veditabbā.
导向名声的即是导向随从众。导向主宰地位的即是导向长老身份。巴利
Yasasaṃvattanikanti parivārasaṃvattanikaṃ. Ādhipateyyasaṃvattanikanti jeṭṭhakabhāvasaṃvattanikaṃ.
“制御”是指:以戒律约束自己而制御的人,也就是安住在防护中的人。怨仇不会积集,意思是五种怨仇不会增长。“善巧者舍弃恶法”是说:具足智慧的善巧者,以圣道把一切恶的、低劣的、不善的法毫无剩余地舍弃掉。由于贪、嗔、痴的灭尽,他证得涅槃——也就是他舍弃了这些恶法之后,因为贪等烦恼的灭尽,以烦恼的寂灭而般涅槃。就这样,他观察到春达的供养以及自己作为应供者的圆满功德,于是说出了感兴的偈颂。巴利
Saṃyamatoti sīlasaṃyamena saṃyamantassa, saṃvare ṭhitassāti attho. Veraṃ na cīyatīti pañcavidhaṃ veraṃ na vaḍḍhati. Kusalo ca jahāti pāpakanti kusalo pana ñāṇasampanno ariyamaggena anavasesaṃ pāpakaṃ lāmakaṃ akusalaṃ jahāti. Rāgadosamohakkhayā sa nibbutoti so imaṃ pāpakaṃ jahitvā rāgādīnaṃ khayā kilesanibbānena nibbutoti. Iti cundassa ca dakkhiṇaṃ, attano ca dakkhiṇeyyasampattiṃ sampassamāno udānaṃ udānesīti.
双娑罗树注释巴利
Yamakasālāvaṇṇanā
198 “被大比丘众围绕”这里,比丘的人数没有限量。因为从在竹林村压制病痛开始,大家听说“世尊不久就要般涅槃了”,于是从各处赶来的比丘中,没有一位比丘中途离开。所以僧团人数多得无法计算。“末罗族的娑罗树林,在邻近处”——就像从葛兰跋河此岸经王母寺大门前往塔园,要从东边走过去再折向北边;从希拉尼雅瓦提河彼岸到娑罗树园也是这样。又像阿努拉德普勒城的塔园那样,拘尸那罗城的这座园林也是如此。正如从塔园南门入城的路,先朝东走再折向北,从园林到娑罗树林也是先朝东再折向北,因此这里叫作“邻近处”。“在双娑罗树之间,头朝北”——据说那张床的头部方向有一排娑罗树,脚部方向也有一排。其中有一棵幼娑罗树靠近头部,一棵靠近脚部。另外,“双娑罗树”是指根、干、枝、叶互相交织在一起而站立的娑罗树。“把床铺好”——据说那座园林里有一张王族的睡床,世尊就是指着它说“铺好”。长老阿难把那张床铺好,交给了世尊。巴利
198.Mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhinti idha bhikkhūnaṃ gaṇanaparicchedo natthi. Veḷuvagāme vedanāvikkhambhanato paṭṭhāya hi – ‘‘na cirena bhagavā parinibbāyissatī’’ti sutvā tato tato āgatesu bhikkhūsu ekabhikkhupi pakkanto nāma natthi. Tasmā gaṇanavītivatto saṅgho ahosi. Upavattanaṃ mallānaṃ sālavananti yatheva hi kalambanadītīrato rājamātuvihāradvārena thūpārāmaṃ gantabbaṃ hoti, evaṃ hiraññavatiyā pārimatīrato sālavanuyyānaṃ, yathā anurādhapurassa thūpārāmo, evaṃ taṃ kusinārāyaṃ hoti. Yathā thūpārāmato dakkhiṇadvārena nagaraṃ pavisanamaggo pācīnamukho gantvā uttarena nivatto, evaṃ uyyānato sālavanaṃ pācīnamukhaṃ gantvā uttarena nivattaṃ. Tasmā taṃ – ‘‘upavattana’’nti vuccati. Antarena yamakasālānaṃuttarasīsakanti tassa kira mañcakassa ekā sālapanti sīsabhāge hoti, ekā pādabhāge. Tatrāpi eko taruṇasālo sīsabhāgassa āsanno hoti, eko pādabhāgassa. Api ca yamakasālā nāma mūlakhandhaviṭapapattehi aññamaññaṃ saṃsibbitvā ṭhitasālāti vuttaṃ. Mañcakaṃ paññapehīti tasmiṃ kira uyyāne rājakulassa sayanamañco atthi, taṃ sandhāya paññapehīti āha. Theropi taṃyeva paññapetvā adāsi.
阿难,我累了,我要躺下。因为如来的……巴利
Kilantosmi, ānanda, nipajjissāmīti tathāgatassa hi –
“ 行境象、迦罗波象、恒河象、宾伽罗象、山岳象,
雪山象、铜色象、曼达基尼象、伍波萨他象,
六牙象是第十种,这些就是象中最殊胜的。”巴利
‘‘Gocari kaḷāpo gaṅgeyyo, piṅgalo pabbateyyako; Hemavato ca tambo ca, mandākini uposatho; Chaddantoyeva dasamo, ete nāgānamuttamā’’ti. –
这里,十头被称为“行处”的普通象的力量,才等于一头迦罗波象的力量。按这样以十倍递增来算,其力量相当于百亿头普通象的力气。而这一切,从春达供养的饭食被吃下之后,就像倒进滤水器里的水一样,全部耗尽了。从波婆城到拘尸那罗城有三俱卢舍的路程,在这段路中间,世尊在二十五个地方坐下来休息,虽然以极大的努力赶路,还是在太阳落山的时候、傍晚时分进入了娑罗林。疾病就是这样压倒一切健康而来的。世尊仿佛为了显示这个道理,说出让整个世间生起警惧的话:“阿难,我累了,我要躺下来。”巴利
Ettha yaṃ dasannaṃ gocarisaṅkhātānaṃ pakatihatthīnaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa kaḷāpassāti. Evaṃ dasaguṇavaḍḍhitāya gaṇanāya pakatihatthīnaṃ koṭisahassabalappamāṇaṃ balaṃ, taṃ sabbampi cundassa piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuttakālato paṭṭhāya caṅgavāre pakkhittaudakaṃ viya parikkhayaṃ gataṃ. Pāvānagarato tīṇi gāvutāni kusinārānagaraṃ, etasmiṃ antare pañcavīsatiyā ṭhānesu nisīditvā mahatā ussāhena āgacchantopi sūriyassa atthaṅgamitavelāyaṃ sañjhāsamaye bhagavā sālavanaṃ paviṭṭho. Evaṃ rogo sabbaṃ ārogyaṃ maddanto āgacchati. Etamatthaṃ dassento viya sabbalokassa saṃvegakaraṃ vācaṃ bhāsanto – ‘‘kilantosmi, ānanda, nipajjissāmī’’ti āha.
那么,世尊为什么以这么大的努力来到这个地方呢?难道在别的地方就不能般涅槃吗?其实,般涅槃并不是在哪里做不到。不过,世尊是因为三个原因才来到这里的。世尊是这样看到的:“如果我在别的地方般涅槃,《大善见王经》的因缘就不会出现。而在拘尸那罗般涅槃的话,我本来要在天界享受的成就,已经在人间享受了,我要用两个诵分的篇幅把它修饰好并宣说。人们听了之后,就会觉得应该去修善。”巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavā evaṃ mahantena ussāhena idhāgato, kiṃ aññattha na sakkā parinibbāyitunti? Parinibbāyituṃ nāma na katthaci na sakkā, tīhi pana kāraṇehi idhāgato, idañhi bhagavā evaṃ passati – ‘‘mayi aññattha parinibbāyante mahāsudassanasuttassa atthuppatti na bhavissati, kusinārāyaṃ pana parinibbāyante yamahaṃ devaloke anubhavitabbaṃ sampattiṃ manussalokeyeva anubhaviṃ, taṃ dvīhi bhāṇavārehi maṇḍetvā desessāmi, taṃ me sutvā bahū janā kusalaṃ kātabbaṃ maññissantī’’ti.
他又看到另一种情况:如果我在别的地方般涅槃,苏跋达就见不到我。他是只有佛陀才能度化的人,不是声闻弟子能度化的;声闻弟子们没办法调伏他。但如果我是在拘尸那罗般涅槃,他就会来亲近我,向我提问;等我把问题解答完,他就会皈依三宝,在我面前出家并受达上,领受禅修业处,而且就在我还住世的时候证得阿拉汉果,成为最后一位声闻弟子。巴利
Aparampi passati – ‘‘maṃ aññattha parinibbāyantaṃ subhaddo na passissati, so ca buddhaveneyyo , na sāvakaveneyyo; na taṃ sāvakā vinetuṃ sakkonti. Kusinārāyaṃ parinibbāyantaṃ pana maṃ so upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchissati, pañhāvissajjanapariyosāne ca saraṇesu patiṭṭhāya mama santike pabbajjañca upasampadañca labhitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā mayi dharamāneyeva arahattaṃ patvā pacchimasāvako bhavissatī’’ti.
他又看到另一种情况:如果我在别的地方般涅槃,分舍利的时候就会发生大争吵,血流得像河一样。如果我在拘尸那罗般涅槃,多纳婆罗门就会平息那场争论,把舍利分好。应当知道,正是由于这三个原因,世尊才以这么大的决心来到这个地方。巴利
Aparampi passati – ‘‘mayi aññattha parinibbāyante dhātubhājanīye mahākalaho bhavissati, lohitaṃ nadī viya sandissati. Kusinārāyaṃ parinibbute doṇabrāhmaṇo taṃ vivādaṃ vūpasametvā dhātuyo vibhajissatī’’ti. Imehi tīhi kāraṇehi bhagavā evaṃ mahantena ussāhena idhāgatoti veditabbo.
在这里,“狮子卧”指的是四种卧法:享欲者的卧法、饿鬼的卧法、狮子卧和如来卧。巴利
Sīhaseyyanti ettha kāmabhogīseyyā, petaseyyā, sīhaseyyā, tathāgataseyyāti catasso seyyā.
在这里,“享欲者的卧法”是指:“比丘们,享受欲乐的有情大多数是左侧而卧。”因为在这些人当中,几乎找不到右侧而卧的。巴利
Tattha – ‘‘yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, kāmabhogī sattā vāmena passena sentī’’ti ayaṃ kāmabhogīseyyā. Tesu hi yebhuyyena dakkhiṇena passena sayantā nāma natthi.
比丘们,饿鬼大多数都是仰面躺着的,这就是饿鬼卧。因为饿鬼血肉极少,骨架纠缠在一起,没办法侧身躺着,只能仰面躺着。巴利
‘‘Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, petā uttānā sentī’’ti ayaṃ petaseyyā. Appamaṃsalohitattā hi petā aṭṭhisaṅghāṭajaṭitā ekena passena sayituṃ na sakkonti, uttānāva senti.
比丘们,兽王狮子右胁而卧……心生欢喜。这就是狮子卧。因为狮子作为兽王,威德极为炽盛,它把两只前脚放在同一个位置,两只后脚放在同一个位置,尾巴收进大腿内侧,确认前脚、后脚和尾巴各自安放的位置,然后把头枕在两只前脚上面躺下。即使躺了一整天,醒来时也不会惊慌失措地醒来,而是抬起头,查看前脚等部位所放的位置。如果发现某个部位移动了、偏离了原位,它就很不高兴,心想:这可不配你的出身和勇猛气概。于是就地继续躺着,不出去觅食。如果一切都没有偏离原位,它就欢欢喜喜地起身,做一个狮子伸展的动作,抖擞鬃毛,发出三遍狮子吼,然后才出去觅食。巴利
‘‘Sīho, bhikkhave, migarājā dakkhiṇena passena seyyaṃ kappeti…pe… attamano hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.246) ayaṃ sīhaseyyā. Tejussadattā hi sīho migarājā dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne, pacchimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi pakkhipitvā purimapādapacchimapādanaṅguṭṭhānaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkhetvā dvinnaṃ purimapādānaṃ matthake sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā sayati. Divasaṃ sayitvāpi pabujjhamāno na utrasanto pabujjhati, sīsaṃ pana ukkhipitvā purimapādādīnaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkheti. Sace kiñci ṭhānaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitaṃ hoti – ‘‘na yidaṃ tuyhaṃ jātiyā sūrabhāvassa ca anurūpa’’nti anattamano hutvā tattheva sayati, na gocarāya pakkamati. Avijahitvā ṭhite pana – ‘‘tuyhaṃ jātiyā ca sūrabhāvassa ca anurūpamida’’nti haṭṭhatuṭṭho uṭṭhāya sīhavijambhitaṃ vijambhitvā kesarabhāraṃ vidhunitvā tikkhattuṃ sīhanādaṃ naditvā gocarāya pakkamati.
“第四禅卧”则被称为“如来卧”(《增支部》4.246)。在这些卧法当中,这里说的是狮子卧。因为这种姿势威德炽盛,所以被称为最上等的卧法。巴利
‘‘Catutthajjhānaseyyā pana tathāgatassa seyyāti vuccati’’ (a. ni. 4.246). Tāsu idha sīhaseyyā āgatā. Ayañhi tejussadairiyāpathattā uttamaseyyā nāma.
两脚相叠,是指把右脚放在左脚上。稍为错开,是指稍微移过去一点,不要完全对齐地放着。因为如果脚踝碰着脚踝,或者膝盖碰着膝盖,互相挤压碰撞,就会不断生起苦受,心没办法专一,躺卧也就不舒服。反过来,如果不让它们相碰,像这样错开一点放着,就不会生起苦受,心就能专一,躺卧也就舒服。所以世尊这样躺着。不过这里因为已经进入不再起身的卧姿,所以经里没有说“作意起身想”。这里就身体而言,应理解为不起身;但就睡眠来说,那一夜世尊根本没有落入有分心的机会。初夜时,他为末罗族人说法;中夜时,教诲了苏跋达;后夜时,教导比丘僧团;到了黎明时分,便入般涅槃。巴利
Pāde pādanti dakkhiṇapāde vāmapādaṃ. Accādhāyāti atiādhāya, īsakaṃ atikkamma ṭhapetvā. Gopphakena hi gopphake, jāṇunā vā jāṇumhi saṅghaṭṭiyamāne abhiṇhaṃ vedanā uppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ na hoti, seyyā aphāsukā hoti. Yathā pana na saṅghaṭṭeti, evaṃ atikkamma ṭhapite vedanā nuppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, seyyā phāsu hoti. Tasmā evaṃ nipajji. Anuṭṭhānaseyyaṃ upagatattā panettha – ‘‘uṭṭhānasaññaṃ manasi karitvā’’ti na vuttaṃ. Kāyavasena cettha anuṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ, niddāvasena pana taṃ rattiṃ bhagavato bhavaṅgassa okāsoyeva nāhosi. Paṭhamayāmasmiñhi mallānaṃ dhammadesanā ahosi, majjhimayāme subhaddassa pacchimayāme bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ovadi, balavapaccūse parinibbāyi.
所有树都开满了花,从根部一直到树梢,四面八方全被花覆盖,连成一片。不只是那两棵双娑罗树,其他所有树木也都开满了花。而且不只是在那座园林里,整个一万个轮围世界当中,该开花的都开了花,该结果的都结了果。所有树的树干上绽放出树干莲花,树枝上绽放出树枝莲花,藤蔓上绽放出藤蔓莲花,虚空中出现虚空莲花,还有从地面裂开涌出的茎干莲花。整个大海洋被五色莲花完全覆盖。广达三千由旬的雪山,也变得极其美丽悦目,就像扎紧的孔雀尾羽束,像连绵不断的花环串,像精心压紧的鲜花耳饰,又像装得满满的花篮。巴利
Sabbaphāliphullāti sabbe samantato pupphitā mūlato paṭṭhāya yāva aggā ekacchannā ahesuṃ, na kevalañca yamakasālāyeva, sabbepi rukkhā sabbapāliphullāva ahesuṃ. Na kevalañhi tasmiṃyeva uyyāne, sakalañhipi dasasahassacakkavāḷe pupphūpagā pupphaṃ gaṇhiṃsu, phalūpagā phalaṃ gaṇhiṃsu, sabbarukkhānaṃ khandhesu khandhapadumāni, sākhāsu sākhāpadumāni, vallīsu vallipadumāni, ākāsesu ākāsapadumāni pathavītalaṃ bhinditvā daṇḍapadumāni pupphiṃsu. Sabbo mahāsamuddo pañcavaṇṇapadumasañchanno ahosi. Tiyojanasahassavitthato himavā ghanabaddhamorapiñchakalāpo viya, nirantaraṃ mālādāmagavacchiko viya, suṭṭhu pīḷetvā ābaddhapupphavaṭaṃsako viya, supūritaṃ pupphacaṅkoṭakaṃ viya ca atiramaṇīyo ahosi.
那些双娑罗树被地居天人们摇动树干、树枝和树梢,把花散落在如来遗体上,意思是花朵飘落在遗体上方。“遍洒”是说散洒时像覆盖上去一样。“再三散洒”是说一遍又一遍、不停地散洒。“天界的”是指这些花产在天界的难陀池,颜色金黄,花瓣有伞盖那么大,花粉有葫芦那么大。而且不只是曼陀罗花,还有其他天界的波利质多树花、黑檀花等等,也被站在铁围山口、三十三天乃至梵天界的天众们装进金匣,从空中纷纷撒下。“如来遗体”是说这些花哪里都不落,一到来,就用花瓣、花丝、花粉、花末,专门散洒在如来遗体上。巴利
Te tathāgatassa sarīraṃ okirantīti te yamakasālā bhummadevatāhi sañcalitakhandhasākhaviṭapā tathāgatassa sarīraṃ avakiranti, sarīrassa upari pupphāni vikirantīti attho. Ajjhokirantīti ajjhottharantā viya kiranti. Abhippakirantīti abhiṇhaṃ punappunaṃ pakirantiyeva. Dibbānīti devaloke nandapokkharaṇīsambhavāni, tāni honti suvaṇṇavaṇṇāni paṇṇacchattappamāṇapattāni, mahātumbamattaṃ reṇuṃ gaṇhanti. Na kevalañca mandāravapupphāneva, aññānipi pana dibbāni pāricchattakakoviḷārapupphādīni suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭakāni pūretvā cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyampi tidasapurepi brahmalokepi ṭhitāhi devatāhi paviṭṭhāni, antalikkhā patanti. Tathāgatassa sarīranti antarā avikiṇṇāneva āgantvā pattakiñjakkhareṇucuṇṇehi tathāgatassa sarīrameva okiranti.
天界的栴檀粉末等,是指适合天众使用的栴檀粉末。不只是天众使用的,龙、金翅鸟和人类使用的栴檀粉末也包括在内。而且不只是栴檀粉末,还有黑沉香、紫栴檀等一切天界香粉,以及雌黄、眼药、金粉、银粉等;一切天界的香、涂香等种种制品,都装满在金银等容器里,由住在铁围山山口等处的天众带进来,中途丝毫不散落,只散洒在如来遗体上。巴利
Dibbānipicandanacuṇṇānīti devatānaṃ upakappanacandanacuṇṇāni. Na kevalañca devatānaṃyeva, nāgasupaṇṇamanussānampi upakappanacandanacuṇṇāni. Na kevalañca candanacuṇṇāneva, kāḷānusārikalohitacandanādisabbadibbagandhajālacuṇṇāni, haritālaañjanasuvaṇṇarajatacuṇṇāni sabbadibbagandhavāsavikatiyo suvaṇṇarajatādisamugge pūretvā cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiādīsu ṭhitāhi devatāhi paviṭṭhāni antarā avippakiritvā tathāgatasseva sarīraṃ okiranti.
天界的乐器等,是指适合天众使用的乐器。不光是那些,还应当知道:一万个轮围世界里所有天、龙、金翅鸟和人类所用的乐器,无论是弦乐器、皮膜乐器、打击乐器还是管乐器,全都聚集到一个轮围世界里,在虚空中奏响。巴利
Dibbānipi tūriyānīti devatānaṃ upakappanatūriyāni. Na kevalañca tāniyeva, sabbānipi tantibaddhacammapariyonaddhaghanasusirabhedāni dasasahassacakkavāḷesu devanāgasupaṇṇamanussānaṃ tūriyāni ekacakkavāḷe sannipatitvā antalikkhe vajjantīti veditabbāni.
天界的歌声也一样:据说有一类名叫婆楼那婆罗那的天神,是长寿的天众。她们听说“大丈夫将在人间受生,将来成佛”,就开始编花鬘,心想:“等他入母胎结生那天,我们拿上花鬘去。”她们正编着,又听说“大丈夫已经入母胎了”,有人问她们:“你们在为谁编花鬘?”她们说:“还没编完呢,等他出母胎那天我们再拿上去。”后来又听说“出母胎了”,她们说:“大出家那天我们去。”大丈夫在家住了二十九年,她们又听说“今天他大出家了”,就说:“成正等觉那天我们去。”他精勤修行六年,她们又听说“今天他成正等觉了”,就说:“转法轮那天我们去。”又听说“他在菩提场过了七个七天,然后去仙人堕处转了法轮”,就说:“示现双神变那天我们去。”又听说“今天他示现了双神变”,就说:“从天界下降那天我们去。”又听说“今天他从天界下降”,就说:“舍寿行那天我们去。”又听说“今天他舍了寿行”,就说:“还没编完呢,等般涅槃那天我们去。”后来听说:“今天世尊在双娑罗树之间,右胁而卧,正念正知,入狮子卧,将在黎明时分般涅槃。你们到底在为谁编花鬘?”她们这才说:“这是怎么回事?‘今天入母胎结生,今天出母胎,今天大出家,今天成佛,今天转法轮,今天示现双神变,今天从天界下降,今天舍寿行,今天就要般涅槃。’难道第二天连喝粥的时间都等不了吗?圆满十巴拉密而成佛的人,竟然连这点时间都等不及,这实在不相称啊!”于是她们连花鬘都没编完,就拿着赶来,在轮围世界里面找不到地方,就悬在轮围山口上,沿着轮围山口奔跑,手拉着手,脖子挨着脖子,称颂三宝,称颂三十二种大丈夫相,称颂六色光明,称颂十巴拉密,称颂五百五十则本生故事,称颂十四种佛陀智慧,每唱完一段就喊:“大名声啊!大名声啊!”就是因为这件事,才说:“天界的歌声也在虚空中回荡,作为对如来的供养。”巴利
Dibbānipi saṅgītānīti varuṇavāraṇadevatā kira nāmetā dīghāyukā devatā – ‘‘mahāpuriso manussapathe nibbattitvā buddho bhavissatī’’ti sutvā ‘‘paṭisandhiggahaṇadivase naṃ gahetvā gamissāmā’’ti mālaṃ ganthetumārabhiṃsu. Tā ganthamānāva – ‘‘mahāpuriso mātukucchiyaṃ nibbatto’’ti sutvā ‘‘tumhe kassa ganthathā’’ti vuttā ‘‘na tāva niṭṭhāti, kucchito nikkhamanadivase gaṇhitvā gamissāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Punapi ‘‘nikkhanto’’ti sutvā ‘‘mahābhinikkhamanadivase gamissāmā’’ti. Ekūnatiṃsavassāni ghare vasitvā ‘‘ajja mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhanto’’tipi sutvā ‘‘abhisambodhidivase gamissāmā’’ti. Chabbassāni padhānaṃ katvā ‘‘ajja abhisambuddho’’tipi sutvā ‘‘dhammacakkappavattanadivase gamissāmā’’ti. ‘‘Sattasattāhāni bodhimaṇḍe vītināmetvā isipatanaṃ gantvā dhammacakkaṃ pavattita’’ntipi sutvā ‘‘yamakapāṭihāriyadivase gamissāmā’’ti. ‘‘Ajja yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ karī’’tipi sutvā ‘‘devorohaṇadivase gamissāmā’’ti. ‘‘Ajja devorohaṇaṃ karī’’tipi sutvā ‘‘āyusaṅkhārossajjane gamissāmā’’ti. ‘‘Ajja āyusaṅkhāraṃ ossajī’’tipi sutvā ‘‘na tāva niṭṭhāti, parinibbānadivase gamissāmā’’ti. ‘‘Ajja bhagavā yamakasālānamantare dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno sīhaseyyaṃ upagato balavapaccūsasamaye parinibbāyissati. Tumhe kassa ganthathā’’ti sutvā pana – ‘‘kinnāmetaṃ, ‘ajjeva mātukucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi, ajjeva mātukucchito nikkhami, ajjeva mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhami, ajjeva buddho ahosi, ajjeva dhammacakkaṃ pavattayi, ajjeva yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ akāsi, ajjeva devalokā otiṇṇo, ajjeva āyusaṅkhāraṃ ossaji, ajjeva kira parinibbāyissatī’ti. Nanu nāma dutiyadivase yāgupānakālamattampi ṭhātabbaṃ assa. Dasa pāramiyo pūretvā buddhattaṃ pattassa nāma ananucchavikameta’’nti apariniṭṭhitāva mālāyo gahetvā āgamma anto cakkavāḷe okāsaṃ alabhamānā cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ lambitvā cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyāva ādhāvantiyo hatthena hatthaṃ gīvāya gīvaṃ gahetvā tīṇi ratanāni ārabbha dvattiṃsa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni chabbaṇṇarasmiyo dasa pāramiyo aḍḍhachaṭṭhāni jātakasatāni cuddasa buddhañāṇāni ārabbha gāyitvā tassa tassa avasāne ‘‘mahāyaso, mahāyaso’’ti vadanti. Idametaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ – ‘‘dibbānipi saṅgītāni antalikkhe vattanti tathāgatassa pūjāyā’’ti.
199 世尊在双娑罗树之间,右胁而卧,看见从地面直到铁围山缺口、又从铁围山缺口直到梵天界聚集而来的大众如此踊跃,便告诉了尊者阿难。因此经中说:“那时,世尊对尊者阿难……以供养如来。”这样显示了盛大的恭敬之后,为了说明即便如此,自己仍未被真正恭敬,便说“阿难,不仅如此……”等话。巴利
199. Bhagavā pana yamakasālānaṃ antarā dakkhiṇena passena nipannoyeva pathavītalato yāva cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyā, cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭito ca yāva brahmalokā sannipatitāya parisāya mahantaṃ ussāhaṃ disvā āyasmato ānandassa ārocesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ…pe… tathāgatassa pūjāyā’’ti. Evaṃ mahāsakkāraṃ dassetvā tenāpi attano asakkatabhāvameva dassanto na kho, ānanda, ettāvatātiādimāha.
这里要表达的意思是:阿难,当我在燃灯佛足下躺卧,汇集八种法而发起大愿时,我发愿并不是为了花鬘、香料、音乐和歌唱这些东西,也不是为了这些才圆满诸巴拉密。所以,我并不是因为这种供养而成为被供养的人。巴利
Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘ānanda, mayā dīpaṅkarapādamūle nipannena aṭṭha dhamme samodhānetvā abhinīhāraṃ karontena na mālāgandhatūriyasaṅgītānaṃ atthāya abhinīhāro kato, na etadatthāya pāramiyo pūritā. Tasmā na kho ahaṃ etāya pūjāya pūjito nāma homī’’ti.
那么,世尊为什么在别的地方说,哪怕只是摘一朵亚麻花,忆念佛的功德来作供养,这种供养的果报连佛的智慧都衡量不了,还加以赞叹,可在这里却拒绝这么盛大的供养呢?这是为了护念在场的大众,也是希望教法能长久住世。因为如果世尊不这样拒绝,将来的人在该持戒的时候就不会圆满持戒,在该修定的时候就不会圆满修定,在该修观的时候就不会令观智成熟。他们只会嘱咐侍者,一味地做物质供养来过日子。而这种物质供养,其实连让教法多住一天、多留一顿粥的时间都做不到。就算有一千座像大寺那样的寺院、一千座像大塔庙那样的塔庙,也撑不住教法。谁造的业,就归谁承受。只有正确地修行,才是与如来相称的供养。这种供养既是如来所期望的,也能让教法长久住世。所以,为了说明这一点,世尊才说了“阿难,若有比丘……”等这段话。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavā aññattha ekaṃ umāpupphamattampi gahetvā buddhaguṇe āvajjetvā katāya pūjāya buddhañāṇenāpi aparicchinnaṃ vipākaṃ vaṇṇetvā idha evaṃ mahantaṃ pūjaṃ paṭikkhipatīti? Parisānuggahena ceva sāsanassa ca ciraṭṭhitikāmatāya. Sace hi bhagavā evaṃ na paṭikkhipeyya, anāgate sīlassa āgataṭṭhāne sīlaṃ na paripūressanti, samādhissa āgataṭṭhāne samādhiṃ na paripūressanti, vipassanāya āgataṭṭhāne vipassanāgabbhaṃ na gāhāpessanti. Upaṭṭhāke samādapetvā pūjaṃyeva kārentā viharissanti. Āmisapūjā ca nāmesā sāsanaṃ ekadivasampi ekayāgupānakālamattampi sandhāretuṃ na sakkoti. Mahāvihārasadisañhi vihārasahassaṃ mahācetiyasadisañca cetiyasahassampi sāsanaṃ dhāretuṃ na sakkonti. Yena kammaṃ kataṃ, tasseva hoti. Sammāpaṭipatti pana tathāgatassa anucchavikā pūjā. Sā hi tena patthitā ceva, sakkoti sāsanañca sandhāretuṃ, tasmā taṃ dassento yo kho ānandātiādimāha.
在这里,“法随法行者”是指:为了九种出世间法,修行与法相应的前行道。而这条前行道本身,因为很契合,所以称为“正行”。修行这条正行的人,就叫“正行行者”。他实践并圆满那被称为前行道的随法,所以叫“随法行者”。巴利
Tattha dhammānudhammappaṭipannoti navavidhassa lokuttaradhammassa anudhammaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno . Sāyeva pana paṭipadā anucchavikattā ‘‘sāmīcī’’ti vuccati. Taṃ sāmīciṃ paṭipannoti sāmīcippaṭipanno. Tameva pubbabhāgapaṭipadāsaṅkhātaṃ anudhammaṃ carati pūretīti anudhammacārī.
所谓“前行道”,应当理解为:从戒、威仪规定、受持头陀支,一直到种姓地之前的正行道。因此,如果一位比丘立足于六种不恭敬,违越规定,以不正当的方式谋生,他就不是法随法行者。但如果他对自己所受的学处——胜者的时限、胜者的界限、胜者的黑绳——连极微小的程度都不违犯,这才叫法随法行者。比丘尼也是同样的道理。如果一位近事男受持五种怖畏、十种不善业道,随顺而行,他就不是法随法行者。但如果他在三皈依、五戒、十戒上圆满行持,每月守八次斋戒,行布施,作香供养、花鬘供养,奉养父母,侍奉如法的沙门和婆罗门,这才叫法随法行者。近事女也是同样的道理。巴利
Pubbabhāgapaṭipadāti ca sīlaṃ ācārapaññatti dhutaṅgasamādānaṃ yāva gotrabhuto sammāpaṭipadā veditabbā. Tasmā yo bhikkhu chasu agāravesu patiṭṭhāya paññattiṃ atikkamati, anesanāya jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ na dhammānudhammappaṭipanno. Yo pana sabbaṃ attano paññattaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ jinavelaṃ jinamariyādaṃ jinakāḷasuttaṃ aṇumattampi na vītikkamati, ayaṃ dhammānudhammappaṭipanno nāma. Bhikkhuniyāpi eseva nayo. Yo upāsako pañca verāni dasa akusalakammapathe samādāya vattati appeti, ayaṃ na dhammānudhammappaṭipanno. Yo pana tīsu saraṇesu, pañcasupi sīlesu, dasasu sīlesu paripūrakārī hoti, māsassa aṭṭha uposathe karoti, dānaṃ deti, gandhapūjaṃ mālāpūjaṃ karoti, mātaraṃ pitaraṃ upaṭṭhāti, dhammike samaṇabrāhmaṇe upaṭṭhāti, ayaṃ dhammānudhammappaṭipanno nāma. Upāsikāyapi eseva nayo.
“以最上的供养”,就是以最殊胜的供养。因为这种供养叫做离染的供养,它能够护持我的教法。这就是说:只要这四众弟子用这种供养来供养我,我的教法就会像天空中的满月一样,光明照耀。巴利
Paramāyapūjāyāti uttamāya pūjāya. Ayañhi nirāmisapūjā nāma sakkoti mama sāsanaṃ sandhāretuṃ. Yāva hi imā catasso parisā maṃ imāya pūjessanti, tāva mama sāsanaṃ majjhe nabhassa puṇṇacando viya virocissatīti dasseti.
伍巴瓦那长老的注释巴利
Upavāṇattheravaṇṇanā
200 “Apasāresi”的意思是让他离开;“Apehi”的意思是走开。长老一听这话,就放下棕榈叶扇,站到一边。“侍者”等语,是世尊针对最初成道时还没有固定侍者的情况说的。长老这样说“尊者,这位是伍巴瓦那长老”之后,阿难便察觉到伍巴瓦那似乎有过失。世尊为了说明他其实没有过失,就说“阿难,大多数……”等等。这里的“大多数”,是考虑到无想有情天和无色界天神的缺席。“无触”就是没有接触,或者没有被充满。据说,在靠近世尊只有一根毫毛尖端那么小的地方,有十位十位大威力的天神,把身体变得极其微细而站立。再往外,有二十位二十位;再往外,有三十位三十位;再往外,有四十位四十位;再往外,有五十位五十位;再往外,有六十位六十位天神站立。他们彼此之间不用手、脚或衣服互相妨碍,根本不存在“让开,别碰我”这种需要说的话。正如《增支部》所说:“那些天神,无论是十位、二十位、三十位、四十位还是五十位,即使站在针尖触及之处,也不会互相妨碍。”这里说的就是这样的情形。“障蔽”就是遮挡。据说,这位长老本来就身材高大,像一头幼象。他披上粪扫衣后,显得格外巨大。巴利
200.Apasāresīti apanesi. Apehīti apagaccha. Thero ekavacaneneva tālavaṇṭaṃ nikkhipitvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Upaṭṭhākotiādi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ anibaddhupaṭṭhākabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha. Ayaṃ, bhante, āyasmā upavāṇoti evaṃ therena vutte ānando upavāṇassa sadosabhāvaṃ sallakkheti, ‘handassa niddosabhāvaṃ kathessāmī’ti bhagavā yebhuyyena ānandātiādimāha. Tattha yebhuyyenāti idaṃ asaññasattānañceva arūpadevatānañca ohīnabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Apphuṭoti asamphuṭṭho abharito vā. Bhagavato kira āsannapadese vālaggamatte okāse sukhumattabhāvaṃ māpetvā dasa dasa mahesakkhā devatā aṭṭhaṃsu. Tāsaṃ parato vīsati vīsati. Tāsaṃ parato tiṃsati tiṃsati. Tāsaṃ parato cattālīsaṃ cattālīsaṃ. Tāsaṃ parato paññāsaṃ paññāsaṃ. Tāsaṃ parato saṭṭhi saṭṭhi devatā aṭṭhaṃsu. Tā aññamaññaṃ hatthena vā pādena vā vatthena vā na byābādhenti. ‘‘Apehi maṃ, mā ghaṭṭehī’’ti vattabbākāraṃ nāma natthi. ‘‘Tā kho pana devatāyo dasapi hutvā vīsatipi hutvā tiṃsampi hutvā cattālīsampi hutvā paññāsampi hutvā āraggakoṭinitudanamattepi tiṭṭhanti, na ca aññamaññaṃ byābādhentī’’ti (a. ni. 1.37) vuttasadisāva ahesuṃ. Ovārentoti āvārento. Thero kira pakatiyāpi mahāsarīro hatthipotakasadiso. So paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ pārupitvā atimahā viya ahosi.
他们因为一直没能亲眼见到世尊的面容,才这样抱怨。“为见如来”就是指为了见到世尊的脸。那么,那些天神难道不能穿透长老的身体看到他吗?是的,不能。天神能穿透凡夫的身体看到另一边,却无法穿透漏尽者。而且,这位长老有大威力、光芒炽盛,他们连靠近都做不到。为什么偏偏这位长老的光芒如此炽盛,而不是其他阿拉汉呢?因为他过去曾是迦叶佛塔庙的守护天神。巴利
Tathāgataṃ dassanāyāti bhagavato mukhaṃ daṭṭhuṃ alabhamānā evaṃ ujjhāyiṃsu. Kiṃ pana tā theraṃ vinivijjha passituṃ na sakkontīti? Āma, na sakkonti. Devatā hi puthujjane vinivijjha passituṃ sakkonti, na khīṇāsave. Therassa ca mahesakkhatāya tejussadatāya upagantumpi na sakkonti. Kasmā pana therova tejussado, na aññe arahantoti? Yasmā kassapabuddhassa cetiye ārakkhadevatā ahosi.
据说,维巴斯正自觉者般涅槃后,人们为他那如同整块纯金般的舍利遗体,只建了一座塔。因为那些寿命长久的佛陀,都只有一座塔。人们用长一肘、宽一拃、厚两指的金砖,拿雌黄和雄黄当泥土用,拿芝麻油当水用,砌起了一座高一由旬的塔。接着,地居天神也砌了一由旬高;然后是空居天神,然后是热雨云天神,然后是积雨云天神,然后是四大王天之神,然后是三十三天之神,各砌一由旬高。这样,塔就成了七由旬高。当人们带着花环、香、衣物等前来时,守护天神就接过来,在他们眼前替他们供养这座塔。巴利
Vipassimhi kira sammāsambuddhe parinibbute ekagghanasuvaṇṇakkhandhasadisassa dhātusarīrassa ekameva cetiyaṃ akaṃsu, dīghāyukabuddhānañhi ekameva cetiyaṃ hoti. Taṃ manussā ratanāyāmāhi vidatthivitthatāhi dvaṅgulabahalāhi suvaṇṇiṭṭhakāhi haritālena ca manosilāya ca mattikākiccaṃ tilateleneva udakakiccaṃ sādhetvā yojanappamāṇaṃ uṭṭhapesuṃ. Tato bhummā devatā yojanappamāṇaṃ, tato ākāsaṭṭhakadevatā, tato uṇhavalāhakadevatā, tato abbhavalāhakadevatā, tato cātumahārājikā devatā, tato tāvatiṃsā devatā yojanappamāṇaṃ uṭṭhapesunti evaṃ sattayojanikaṃ cetiyaṃ ahosi. Manussesu mālāgandhavatthādīni gahetvā āgatesu ārakkhadevatā gahetvā tesaṃ passantānaṃyeva cetiyaṃ pūjesi.
那时,这位长老转生为一位大婆罗门,拿了一件黄色的衣服前去。天神从他手里接过衣服,用来供养塔庙。婆罗门看到这一幕,心生净信,发愿说:“愿我将来也能成为像这样的佛陀舍利塔的守护天神。”他从那里命终后,就投生到了天界。正当他在天界和人间之间不断流转时,迦叶世尊出现于世并般涅槃。迦叶佛同样只留下了遗骨舍利。人们收集舍利后,建了一座高一由旬的舍利塔,他就在那里做了守护天神。迦叶佛的教法隐没后,他又投生到天界。到了我们世尊的时代,他从天界命终,投生到一个大族之家,后来出家,证得了阿拉汉果。因此应当知道,正是因为他曾做过舍利塔的守护天神,这位长老才具有如此殊胜的光辉。巴利
Tadā ayaṃ thero brāhmaṇamahāsālo hutvā ekaṃ pītakaṃ vatthaṃ ādāya gato. Devatā tassa hatthato vatthaṃ gahetvā cetiyaṃ pūjesi. Brāhmaṇo taṃ disvā pasannacitto ‘‘ahampi anāgate evarūpassa buddhassa cetiye ārakkhadevatā homī’’ti patthanaṃ katvā tato cuto devaloke nibbatti. Tassa devaloke ca manussaloke ca saṃsarantasseva kassapo bhagavā loke uppajjitvā parinibbāyi. Tassāpi ekameva dhātusarīraṃ ahosi. Taṃ gahetvā yojanikaṃ cetiyaṃ kāresuṃ. So tattha ārakkhadevatā hutvā sāsane antarahite sagge nibbattitvā amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle tato cuto mahākule paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā nikkhamma pabbajitvā arahattaṃ patto. Iti cetiye ārakkhadevatā hutvā āgatattā thero tejussadoti veditabbo.
阿难,天神们在讥嫌。阿难,天神们确实在讥嫌,这是在表明我的儿子并没有别的什么过失。巴利
Devatā, ānanda, ujjhāyantīti iti ānanda, devatā ujjhāyanti, na mayhaṃ puttassa añño koci doso atthīti dasseti.
201 阿难问“然而,尊者,那些天神是什么样的情况呢?”——他为什么这样问呢?世尊,您说“天神们在抱怨”,那么您心里关注的究竟是些什么样的天神?她们是在同意、允许您的般涅槃吗?于是世尊为了表明她们并非同意,便说“我并不是在说同意之因”,接着讲出了“阿难,有……”等语。巴利
201.Kathaṃbhūtā pana, bhanteti kasmā āha? Bhagavā tumhe – ‘‘devatā ujjhāyantī’’ti vadatha, kathaṃ bhūtā pana tā tumhe manasi karotha , kiṃ tumhākaṃ parinibbānaṃ adhivāsentīti pucchati. Atha bhagavā – ‘‘nāhaṃ adhivāsanakāraṇaṃ vadāmī’’ti tāsaṃ anadhivāsanabhāvaṃ dassento santānandātiādimāha.
在这里,“于空中起地想”,是指在空中化现出一片大地,然后对那片地生起“这是大地”的认知。“哭叫”就是哭泣。“如被斩断般坠落”,是指像从中间被截断一样,从各处纷纷坠落。“回旋”,是指旋转着又回到刚才坠落的同一个地方。“翻滚”,是指从坠落的地方旋转着滚到另一边去。另外,伸开双腿,时而朝前、时而朝后、时而向左、时而向右,整个身体连连翻转打滚,这也叫“回旋翻滚”。阿难,有些天神在路上生起“地”想。据说,实际上真正的大地承载不了这些天神,她们会像手长者梵天神那样陷进地里去。因此世尊才说:“手长者,请你变化出一个粗显的身体吧。”(《增支部》3.128)所以,对于那些在路上化现出大地的天神,经中才说她们是“于路上起地想”。巴利
Tattha ākāse pathavīsaññiniyoti ākāse pathaviṃ māpetvā tattha pathavīsaññiniyo. Kandantīti rodanti. Chinnapātaṃ papatantīti majjhe chinnā viya hutvā yato vā tato vā papatanti. Āvaṭṭantīti āvaṭṭantiyo patitaṭṭhānameva āgacchanti. Vivaṭṭantīti patitaṭṭhānato parabhāgaṃ vaṭṭamānā gacchanti. Apica dve pāde pasāretvā sakiṃ purato sakiṃ pacchato sakiṃ vāmato sakiṃ dakkhiṇato saṃparivattamānāpi – ‘‘āvaṭṭanti vivaṭṭantī’’ti vuccanti. Santānanda, devatā pathaviyaṃ pathavīsaññiniyoti pakatipathavī kira devatā dhāretuṃ na sakkoti. Tattha hatthako brahmā viya devatā osīdanti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘oḷārikaṃ hatthaka, attabhāvaṃ abhinimmināhī’’ti (a. ni. 3.128). Tasmā yā devatā pathaviyaṃ pathaviṃ māpesuṃ, tā sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘pathaviyaṃ pathavīsaññiniyo’’ti.
已离染:指那些已经断除忧恼、像石柱一样不动摇的不来者和漏尽者天神。巴利
Vītarāgāti pahīnadomanassā silāthambhasadisā anāgāmikhīṇāsavadevatā.
四悚惧处的注释巴利
Catusaṃvejanīyaṭhānavaṇṇanā
202 202.“结束安居后”:据说,在佛陀住世的时候,比丘们会在两个时节聚集:一是临近入雨安居时,为了领受业处;二是安居结束后,为了报告依所领受的业处修行而证得的殊胜成果。就像佛陀住世时那样,在铜掌岛上也是如此:恒河此岸的比丘们在铜殿聚集,恒河彼岸的比丘们在提萨大寺聚集。其中,恒河此岸的比丘们拿着扫帚和畚箕,来到大寺集合,在塔庙做了粉刷工作,然后立下规矩:“结束安居后,大家到铜殿集合。”他们先住在舒适的地方,安居结束后便来到铜殿,在五部坛那里,巴利圣典读得熟的人就背诵巴利圣典,义注读得熟的人就背诵义注。如果有人背错了巴利圣典或义注,大家就问他:“你是在谁那里学的?”查清楚之后,把他纠正过来,让他正确掌握。恒河彼岸住在提萨大寺的比丘们也同样这么做。在这两个时节聚集的比丘当中,有些人是先前入安居时领受了业处就离开,现在回来报告所证得的殊胜成果。就是针对这类比丘,才说了“先前,尊者,结束安居出来的比丘……”等话。巴利
202.Vassaṃvuṭṭhāti buddhakāle kira dvīsu kālesu bhikkhū sannipatanti upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇatthaṃ, vuṭṭhavassā ca gahitakammaṭṭhānānuyogena nibbattitavisesārocanatthaṃ. Yathā ca buddhakāle, evaṃ tambapaṇṇidīpepi apāragaṅgāya bhikkhū lohapāsāde sannipatiṃsu, pāragaṅgāya bhikkhū tissamahāvihāre. Tesu apāragaṅgāya bhikkhū saṅkārachaḍḍakasammajjaniyo gahetvā āgantvā mahāvihāre sannipatitvā cetiye sudhākammaṃ katvā – ‘‘vuṭṭhavassā āgantvā lohapāsāde sannipatathā’’ti vattaṃ katvā phāsukaṭṭhānesu vasitvā vuṭṭhavassā āgantvā lohapāsāde pañcanikāyamaṇḍale, yesaṃ pāḷi paguṇā, te pāḷiṃ sajjhāyanti. Yesaṃ aṭṭhakathā paguṇā, te aṭṭhakathaṃ sajjhāyanti. Yo pāḷiṃ vā aṭṭhakathaṃ vā virādheti , taṃ – ‘‘kassa santike tayā gahita’’nti vicāretvā ujuṃ katvā gāhāpenti. Pāragaṅgāvāsinopi tissamahāvihāre evameva karonti. Evaṃ dvīsu kālesu sannipatitesu bhikkhūsu ye pure vassūpanāyikāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gatā visesārocanatthaṃ āgacchanti, evarūpe sandhāya ‘‘pubbe bhante vassaṃvuṭṭhā’’tiādimāha.
“意所修”是指由心意所修习、所恭敬的。或者说,是指那些以心修心、增长心、驱除贪等尘垢的人,这就是它的意思。据说,那位具足行仪的长老,见到年长的比丘时,会站得笔直,不先坐下;他起身迎接,从对方手中接过伞和衣钵,把座位拂净后让给对方,然后为坐在那里的人履行侍奉的义务,整理好坐卧处再交给他。见到新学比丘时,他则默然不语,不先坐下,而是站在旁边履行义务。他因为希望自己在这套行持上不退失,所以说了这句话。巴利
Manobhāvanīyeti manasā bhāvite sambhāvite. Ye vā mano manaṃ bhāventi vaḍḍhenti rāgarajādīni pavāhenti, evarūpeti attho. Thero kira vattasampanno mahallakaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā thaddho hutvā na nisīdati, paccuggamanaṃ katvā hatthato chattañca pattacīvarañca gahetvā pīṭhaṃ papphoṭetvā deti, tattha nisinnassa vattaṃ katvā senāsanaṃ paṭijaggitvā deti. Navakaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā tuṇhībhūto na nisīdati, samīpe ṭhatvā vattaṃ karoti. So tāya vattapaṭipattiyā aparihāniṃ patthayamāno evamāha.
这时,世尊心想:“阿难心想‘我将见不到那些能令心欢喜者’。”于是世尊思量:“来吧,我要告诉他一个能见到那些令心欢喜者的地方。他住在那里,不用从这里跑到那里,就能见到那些令心欢喜的比丘。”这样想过之后,便说出了“有四种……”这段内容。巴利
Atha bhagavā – ‘‘ānando manobhāvanīyānaṃ dassanaṃ na labhissāmī’’ti cinteti, handassa, manobhāvanīyānaṃ dassanaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhissāmi, yattha vasanto ito cito ca anāhiṇḍitvāva lacchati manobhāvanīye bhikkhū dassanāyāti cintetvā cattārimānītiādimāha.
其中,“有信”是指对佛等生起净信、行为具足的人,这种人从清晨开始,像打扫塔庙庭院等一切义务,都显得已经完成了。“值得瞻仰”是指值得拜见、应当前去拜见。“令人心生悚惧”是指能让人生起悚惧。“处”是指原因,或者就是指这些地方。巴利
Tattha saddhassāti buddhādīsu pasannacittassa vattasampannassa, yassa pāto paṭṭhāya cetiyaṅgaṇavattādīni sabbavattāni katāneva paññāyanti. Dassanīyānīti dassanārahāni dassanatthāya gantabbāni. Saṃvejanīyānīti saṃvegajanakāni. Ṭhānānīti kāraṇāni, padesaṭhānāneva vā.
“凡任何”这句话,是为了说明塔庙巡礼确实有利益。其中,“巡礼塔庙而四处行走”,说的是那些在各处打扫塔庙庭院、清洗座位、给菩提树浇水而往来奔走的人,对这些人自然不必多说;即使有人从某座寺院出来,心里怀着“我要去礼敬塔庙”的清净信心,却在半路上命终,也一定会毫无障碍地投生到天界。这句话就是为了显示这个道理。巴利
Ye hi kecīti idaṃ cetiyacārikāya satthakabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha cetiyacārikaṃ āhiṇḍantāti ye ca tāva tattha tattha cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjantā, āsanāni dhovantā bodhimhi udakaṃ siñcantā āhiṇḍanti, tesu vattabbameva natthi asukavihāre ‘‘cetiyaṃ vandissāmā’’ti nikkhamitvā pasannacittā antarā kālaṅkarontāpi anantarāyena sagge patiṭṭhahissanti yevāti dasseti.
阿难提问的注释巴利
Ānandapucchākathāvaṇṇanā
203 203.“不见,阿难!”——这里说的是:对女人不见,这就是在此事上最殊胜的行持。因为比丘关上门,坐在住处,即使有女人来到站在门口,只要他还没看见,他就一定不会生起贪欲,心也不会动摇。可是一旦看见了,这两样东西就会在他身上出现。所以世尊说:“不见,阿难!”阿难接着问:看见的时候该怎么办呢?意思是说,在托钵、走到某个地方等情况下看见了女人,应当怎么行持?于是世尊说:宁可跟一个手持宝剑站在那里的人说话——那人说“你要是跟我说话,我就在这里砍下你的头”——或者跟一个站在那里的女夜叉说话——她说“你要是跟我说话,我就在这里把你的肉嚼得嘎吱嘎吱响然后吃掉”——也胜过跟女人说话。为什么呢?因为那样最多只是这一期生命因此毁灭,还不至于在恶趣中感受无量的痛苦。可是跟女人交谈、闲聊,就会产生亲密;有了亲密,就会有可乘之机;心被侵入之后,就会导致戒律败坏,从而填满恶趣。所以世尊说:“不要交谈。”这一点也曾这样说过:巴利
203.Adassanaṃ, ānandāti yadetaṃ mātugāmassa adassanaṃ, ayamettha uttamā paṭipattīti dasseti. Dvāraṃ pidahitvā senāsane nisinno hi bhikkhu āgantvā dvāre ṭhitampi mātugāmaṃ yāva na passati, tāvassa ekaṃseneva na lobho uppajjati, na cittaṃ calati. Dassane pana satiyeva tadubhayampi assa. Tenāha – ‘‘adassanaṃ ānandā’’ti. Dassane bhagavā sati kathanti bhikkhaṃ gahetvā upagataṭṭhānādīsu dassane sati kathaṃ paṭipajjitabbanti pucchati. Atha bhagavā yasmā khaggaṃ gahetvā – ‘‘sace mayā saddhiṃ ālapasi, ettheva te sīsaṃ pātessāmī’’ti ṭhitapurisena vā, ‘‘sace mayā saddhiṃ ālapasi, ettheva te maṃsaṃ murumurāpetvā khādissāmī’’ti ṭhitayakkhiniyā vā ālapituṃ varaṃ. Ekasseva hi attabhāvassa tappaccayā vināso hoti, na apāyesu aparicchinnadukkhānubhavanaṃ. Mātugāmena pana ālāpasallāpe sati vissāso hoti, vissāse sati otāro hoti, otiṇṇacitto sīlabyasanaṃ patvā apāyapūrako hoti; tasmā anālāpoti āha. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 可与持剑者交谈,可与食人鬼交谈;
纵是噬人立毙之毒蛇,亦可近前。
但绝不可以一个男人单独和一位女人交谈。”巴利
‘‘Sallape asihatthena, pisācenāpi sallape; Āsīvisampi āsīde, yena daṭṭho na jīvati; Na tveva eko ekāya, mātugāmena sallape’’ti. (a. ni. 5.55);
所谓“开口说话”,是指:如果女人问今天是哪天,或者来求受戒,或者想听法,或者提出问题,又或者有出家人该为她做的事——在这种时候,如果不出声,她就会说:“这人是个哑巴,这人是个聋子,吃完东西就闭着嘴坐在那儿。”所以,一定得开口说话。那么,开口说话时该怎么做呢?阿难这样问。于是世尊引用这段教诫——“比丘们,你们对像母亲那样年纪的人,要提起母亲想;对像姊妹那样年纪的人,要提起姊妹想;对像女儿那样年纪的人,要提起女儿想”——然后说道:阿难,应当安住正念。巴利
Ālapantena panāti sace mātugāmo divasaṃ vā pucchati, sīlaṃ vā yācati, dhammaṃ vā sotukāmo hoti, pañhaṃ vā pucchati, tathārūpaṃ vā panassa pabbajitehi kattabbakammaṃ hoti, evarūpe kāle anālapantaṃ ‘‘mūgo ayaṃ, badhiro ayaṃ, bhutvāva baddhamukho nisīdatī’’ti vadati, tasmā avassaṃ ālapitabbaṃ hoti. Evaṃ ālapantena pana kathaṃ paṭipajjitabbanti pucchati. Atha bhagavā – ‘‘etha tumhe, bhikkhave, mātumattīsu mātucittaṃ upaṭṭhapetha, bhaginimattīsu bhaginicittaṃ upaṭṭhapetha, dhītumattīsu dhītucittaṃ upaṭṭhapethā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.127) imaṃ ovādaṃ sandhāya sati, ānanda, upaṭṭhapetabbāti āha.
204 不要忙碌:不要被紧紧绑住,要无所渴求地安住。要为坚实的利益而努力:要为最上的利益,也就是阿拉汉果,努力用功。要持续投入:为了证得那个果位而不断精勤修习。不要放逸:在那里不要丢失正念。要热忱:以精进的策励而热忱。要投身:对身体和生命都不眷恋,以这样的心专注安住。巴利
204.Abyāvaṭāti atantibaddhā nirussukkā hotha. Sāratthe ghaṭathāti uttamatthe arahatte ghaṭetha. Anuyuñjathāti tadadhigamāya anuyogaṃ karotha. Appamattāti tattha avippamuṭṭhasatī. Vīriyātāpayogena ātāpino. Kāye ca jīvite ca nirapekkhatāya pahitattā pesitacittā viharatha.
205 “尊者,那么该怎么做呢?”这是在问:那些刹帝利智者等人应当如何行事。他们肯定会来问我:“尊者阿难,对于如来的遗体,应当怎么做?”所以我问:“我该怎么回答他们?”世尊说:“用未经损坏的布”,就是用新的迦尸布。“用弹打过的棉花”,就是用充分弹打过的棉花。因为迦尸布太细软,不吸油,而棉花吸油,所以他说“用弹打过的棉花”。“用铁”,就是用金制的。这里所谓的“铁”,指的就是金。巴利
205.Kathaṃpana, bhanteti tehi khattiyapaṇḍitādīhi kathaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Addhā maṃ te paṭipucchissanti – ‘‘kathaṃ, bhante, ānanda tathāgatassa sarīre paṭipajjitabba’’nti; ‘‘tesāhaṃ kathaṃ paṭivacanaṃ demī’’ti pucchati. Ahatena vatthenāti navena kāsikavatthena. Vihatena kappāsenāti supothitena kappāsena. Kāsikavatthañhi sukhumattā telaṃ na gaṇhāti, kappāso pana gaṇhāti. Tasmā ‘‘vihatena kappāsenā’’ti āha. Āyasāyāti sovaṇṇāya. Sovaṇṇañhi idha ‘‘ayasa’’nti adhippetaṃ.
值得建塔的人的注释巴利
Thūpārahapuggalavaṇṇanā
206 转轮王——在这里,为什么世尊允许为在家生活期间去世的转轮王建塔供养,却不允许为持戒的凡夫比丘建塔呢?因为不稀有。如果允许为凡夫比丘建塔,那么在铜掌岛,光是塔就没有地方建了,其他地方也一样。所以,因为“他们不稀有”,就不允许。转轮王只出现一位,因此他的塔稀有。而对于像已般涅槃的比丘那样持戒的凡夫,即使做大供养也是应该的。巴利
206.Rājā cakkavattīti ettha kasmā bhagavā agāramajjhe vasitvā kālaṅkatassa rañño thūpārahataṃ anujānāti, na sīlavato puthujjanassa bhikkhussāti? Anacchariyattā. Puthujjanabhikkhūnañhi thūpe anuññāyamāne tambapaṇṇidīpe tāva thūpānaṃ okāso na bhaveyya, tathā aññesu ṭhānesu. Tasmā ‘‘anacchariyā te bhavissantī’’ti nānujānāti. Rājā cakkavattī ekova nibbattati, tenassa thūpo acchariyo hoti. Puthujjanasīlavato pana parinibbutabhikkhuno viya mahantampi sakkāraṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva.
阿难稀有法注释巴利
Ānandaacchariyadhammavaṇṇanā
207 “住在那里”是指进入那座圆坛讲堂式的住处。“门闩树”是指立在门柱边的那棵门闩树。“哭着站着”:据说那位尊者当时这样想:“导师已经给我讲了能让我生起警醒的住处,讲了巡礼佛塔的意义,解答了关于如何对待女人的问题,开示了观照自身身体的方法,还说了四种值得建塔的人。今天世尊一定会般涅槃。”他这样想的时候,心中生起了强烈的悲伤。接着他又想:“在世尊面前哭泣实在不合适。我该走到一边去,把悲伤平复下来。”他就那样做了。因此说“哭着站着”。巴利
207.Vihāranti idha maṇḍalamālo vihāroti adhippeto, taṃ pavisitvā. Kapisīsanti dvārabāhakoṭiyaṃ ṭhitaṃ aggaḷarukkhaṃ. Rodamāno aṭṭhāsīti so kirāyasmā cintesi – ‘‘satthārā mama saṃvegajanakaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ, cetiyacārikāya sātthakabhāvo kathito, mātugāme paṭipajjitabbapañho vissajjito, attano sarīre paṭipatti akkhātā, cattāro thūpārahā kathitā, dhuvaṃ ajja bhagavā parinibbāyissatī’’ti, tassevaṃ cintayato balavadomanassaṃ uppajji. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘bhagavato santike rodanaṃ nāma aphāsukaṃ, ekamantaṃ gantvā sokaṃ tanukaṃ karissāmī’’ti, so tathā akāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘rodamāno aṭṭhāsī’’ti.
“我也是这样的人”,也可读作“我确实就是那个人”。所谓“怜悯我的”,就是怜悯我、教导我的人。他心里悲叹:从明天起,我要给谁端洗脸水?给谁洗脚?给谁照料住处?又要拿起谁的钵和袈裟,四处随行呢?他就这样絮絮叨叨地悲叹了许多。所谓“吩咐”,是指世尊在比丘僧团中没看见那位长老,便开口询问。巴利
Ahañca vatamhīti ahañca vata amhi, ahaṃ vatamhītipi pāṭho. Yo mama anukampakoti yo maṃ anukampati anusāsati, sve dāni paṭṭhāya kassa mukhadhovanaṃ dassāmi, kassa pāde dhovissāmi, kassa senāsanaṃ paṭijaggissāmi, kassa pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vicarissāmīti bahuṃ vilapi. Āmantesīti bhikkhusaṅghassa antare theraṃ adisvā āmantesi.
以慈的身业:指由慈心推动而做的身业,比如给人递洗脸水等。有益的:指为了利益和增长而做。快乐的:指以喜悦和欢喜心而做,不是带着痛苦和忧愁去做,这就是它的含义。无二的:指不分成两半来做。就像有人只当面做、不在背后做,有人只在背后做、不当面做,不这样区别对待地去做,就叫无二。无量的:指没有限量。这说明:即使整个轮围山也显得太狭窄,即使有顶天也显得太低,你所做的身业才是广大的。巴利
Mettenakāyakammenāti mettacittavasena pavattitena mukhadhovanadānādikāyakammena. Hitenāti hitavuddhiyā katena. Sukhenāti sukhasomanasseneva katena, na dukkhinā dummanena hutvāti attho. Advayenāti dve koṭṭhāse katvā akatena. Yathā hi eko sammukhāva karoti na parammukhā, eko parammukhāva karoti na sammukhā evaṃ vibhāgaṃ akatvā katenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Appamāṇenāti pamāṇavirahitena. Cakkavāḷampi hi atisambādhaṃ, bhavaggampi atinīcaṃ, tayā kataṃ kāyakammameva bahunti dasseti.
以慈的语业,是指由慈心推动而说出的语业,比如告诉人洗脸的时间等等。另外,听了教诫之后说“萨度,尊者”,这样的话也属于慈的语业。以慈的意业,是指这样运作的意业:清早起来照料好身体,然后坐在僻静的地方,心里想:“愿导师无病、无恼、安乐。”所谓“你是已积福德的人”,是在说明你在百千劫中已经圆满了愿行。说“你是已积福德的人”,也是让你因此安心,不要放逸,而应当更加精勤修行。这样精勤修行,你很快就会成为无漏者,在法结集的时候证得阿拉汉果。这是在说明:像我这样的人所受的侍奉,是不可能没有果报的。巴利
Mettena vacīkammenāti mettacittavasena pavattitena mukhadhovanakālārocanādinā vacīkammena. Api ca ovādaṃ sutvā – ‘‘sādhu, bhante’’ti vacanampi mettaṃ vacīkammameva. Mettena manokammenāti kālasseva sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā vivittāsane nisīditvā – ‘‘satthā arogo hotu, abyāpajjo sukhī’’ti evaṃ pavattitena manokammena. Katapuññosīti kappasatasahassaṃ abhinīhārasampannosīti dasseti. Katapuññosīti ca ettāvatā vissattho mā pamādamāpajji, atha kho padhānamanuyuñja. Evañhi anuyutto khippaṃ hohisi anāsavo, dhammasaṅgītikāle arahattaṃ pāpuṇissasi. Na hi mādisassa katapāricariyā nipphalā nāma hotīti dasseti.
208 208. 这样说完之后,世尊就像在大地上铺展开来、像在虚空中扩展、像把铁围山沉下去、像把须弥山举起来、像抓住大阎浮树的树干摇晃一样,开始讲述具寿阿难的功德,然后对比丘们说。这里为什么没有说“比丘们,现在那些……”呢?因为其他佛陀并不存在。由此也可以知道:“即使在铁围山之间,也没有其他佛陀。”贤智者,就是聪慧的人。明慧者,就是在蕴、界、处等方面善巧的人。巴利
208. Evañca pana vatvā mahāpathaviṃ pattharanto viya ākāsaṃ vitthārento viya cakkavāḷagiriṃ osārento viya sineruṃ ukkhipento viya mahājambuṃ khandhe gahetvā cālento viya āyasmato ānandassa guṇakathaṃ ārabhanto atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi. Tattha ‘‘yepi te, bhikkhave, etarahī’’ti kasmā na vuttaṃ? Aññassa buddhassa natthitāya. Eteneva cetaṃ veditabbaṃ – ‘‘yathā cakkavāḷantarepi añño buddho natthī’’ti. Paṇḍitoti byatto. Medhāvīti khandhadhātuāyatanādīsu kusalo.
209 比丘众为了见阿难而来,说的是:那些想见世尊的人来亲近长老,以及那些听说了“具寿阿难周正端严、相貌殊妙、令人乐见、多闻、能庄严僧团”这些长老的功德之后才来的人,就是针对他们而说“比丘众为了见阿难而前来”。其他地方也照这个方式理解。满意,是说“听了之后觉得和我们的亲眼所见相符”,所以心里满意、欢喜。法,是指这样的问候法:“贤友,还堪忍吗?还能维持吗?你们是否以如理作意来做事?是否对老师和戒师尽到义务?”在这里,对比丘尼则说:“姊妹们,你们是否受持八敬法并照着实行?”这也是不同之处。如果有近事男来了,他不会这样问候:“居士,你的头或四肢疼吗?你的儿女兄弟都健康吗?”而是这样说:“居士们,你们怎样守护三皈依五戒?每月八日是否持守伍波萨他?是否尽到侍奉父母的义务?是否照顾如法的沙门婆罗门?”对近事女也是同样的方式。巴利
209.Bhikkhuparisā ānandaṃ dassanāyāti ye bhagavantaṃ passitukāmā theraṃ upasaṅkamanti, ye ca ‘‘āyasmā kirānando samantapāsādiko abhirūpo dassanīyo bahussuto saṅghasobhano’’ti therassa guṇe sutvā āgacchanti, te sandhāya ‘‘bhikkhuparisā ānandaṃ dassanāya upasaṅkamantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha. Attamanāti savanena no dassanaṃ sametīti sakamanā tuṭṭhacittā. Dhammanti ‘‘kacci, āvuso, khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci yoniso manasikārena kammaṃ karotha, ācariyupajjhāye vattaṃ pūrethā’’ti evarūpaṃ paṭisanthāradhammaṃ. Tattha bhikkhunīsu – ‘‘kacci, bhaginiyo, aṭṭha garudhamme samādāya vattathā’’ti idampi nānākaraṇaṃ hoti. Upāsakesu āgatesu ‘‘upāsaka, na te kacci sīsaṃ vā aṅgaṃ vā rujjati, arogā te puttabhātaro’’ti na evaṃ paṭisanthāraṃ karoti. Evaṃ pana karoti – ‘‘kathaṃ upāsakā tīṇi saraṇāni pañca sīlāni rakkhatha, māsassa aṭṭha uposathe karotha, mātāpitūnaṃ upaṭṭhānavattaṃ pūretha, dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇe paṭijaggathā’’ti. Upāsikāsupi eseva nayo.
现在,世尊为了把阿难长老和转轮王作对比,说了“诸比丘,有四种……”等话。其中,“刹帝利”指已经灌顶和尚未灌顶的刹帝利种姓的人。据说,他们听了“转轮王相貌端正、好看、令人欢喜,在空中行走,以如法之法王的身分治理国家”这些关于他功德的说法后,心里想“光是听到就等于见到了”,于是感到欢喜。“说”是指他在交谈时这样问候:“孩子们,你们怎样圆满王法、守护王统?”对婆罗门则这样问候:“老师们怎样教诵咒语?弟子们怎样学习咒语?有没有得到布施、衣服或迦毘罗牛?”对居士则这样问候:“孩子们,你们没有被王族用刑罚或强力逼迫吧?天有没有按时降雨?庄稼有没有丰收?”对沙门则这样问候:“尊者,出家人所需的资具容易得到吗?你们在沙门法上有没有放逸?”巴利
Idāni ānandattherassa cakkavattinā saddhiṃ upamaṃ karonto cattārome bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha khattiyāti abhisittā ca anabhisittā ca khattiyajātikā. Te kira – ‘‘rājā cakkavattī nāma abhirūpo dassanīyo pāsādiko ākāsena vicaranto rajjaṃ anusāsati dhammiko dhammarājā’’ti tassa guṇakathaṃ sutvā ‘‘savanena dassanampi sama’’nti attamanā honti. Bhāsatīti kathento – ‘‘kathaṃ, tātā, rājadhammaṃ pūretha, paveṇiṃ rakkhathā’’ti paṭisanthāraṃ karoti. Brāhmaṇesu pana – ‘‘kathaṃ ācariyā mante vācetha, kathaṃ antevāsikā mante gaṇhanti, dakkhiṇaṃ vā vatthāni vā kapilaṃ vā alatthā’’ti paṭisanthāraṃ karoti. Gahapatīsu – ‘‘kathaṃ tātā, na vo rājakulato daṇḍena vā balinā vā pīḷā atthi, sammā devo dhāraṃ anupavecchati, sassāni sampajjantī’’ti evaṃ paṭisanthāraṃ karoti. Samaṇesu – ‘‘kathaṃ, bhante, pabbajitaparikkhārā sulabhā, samaṇadhamme na pamajjathā’’ti evaṃ paṭisanthāraṃ karoti.
《大善见王经》讲说注释巴利
Mahāsudassanasuttadesanāvaṇṇanā
210 “小城”是指那些像城镇一样、拥挤狭窄的小城。“不平城”是指地势高低不平的小城。“枝城”是说,就像树的枝条是细小的那样,同样,那些如同其他大城市的枝条一般的小城,就叫枝城。“刹帝利大富豪”是指获得了大财富的大刹帝利。其余各处也都按同样的道理来理解。巴利
210.Khuddakanagaraketi nagarapatirūpake sambādhe khuddakanagarake. Ujjaṅgalanagaraketi visamanagarake. Sākhānagaraketi yathā rukkhānaṃ sākhā nāma khuddakā honti, evameva aññesaṃ mahānagarānaṃ sākhāsadise khuddakanagarake. Khattiyamahāsālāti khattiyamahāsārappattā mahākhattiyā. Esa nayo sabbattha.
其中,刹帝利大富豪是指这样一类人:他们把十亿乃至百亿的财富埋藏存放起来,一天的花费就要用掉一车咖哈巴那钱,而到了晚上又有两车钱进账。婆罗门大富豪是指这样一类人:他们存有八亿财富,一天的花费要用掉一罐咖哈巴那钱,到了晚上有一车钱进账。居士大富豪是指这样一类人:他们存有四亿财富,一天的花费要用掉五安巴那的咖哈巴那钱,到了晚上有一罐钱进账。巴利
Tesu khattiyamahāsālā nāma yesaṃ koṭisatampi koṭisahassampi dhanaṃ nikhaṇitvā ṭhapitaṃ, divasaparibbayo ekaṃ kahāpaṇasakaṭaṃ nigacchati, sāyaṃ dve pavisanti. Brāhmaṇamahāsālā nāma yesaṃ asītikoṭidhanaṃ nihitaṃ hoti, divasaparibbayo eko kahāpaṇakumbho nigacchati, sāyaṃ ekasakaṭaṃ pavisati. Gahapatimahāsālā nāma yesaṃ cattālīsakoṭidhanaṃ nihitaṃ hoti, divasaparibbayo pañca kahāpaṇambaṇāni nigacchanti, sāyaṃ kumbho pavisati.
阿难,不要这样说!阿难,不该这样说,不应该把这座城叫作“小城”。因为我要讲述这座城的富庶繁华,所以才先说了“我曾无数次或站或坐,以极大的热忱、极大的努力来到这里”,然后才说出“过去曾有”等语。“食物丰足”是指嚼食和啖食都很丰富。关于“象声”:当一头象发出叫声时,八万四千头象也一起叫起来,所以象声不断;马声也是如此。而这里的有福众生,乘坐套着四匹骏马的车,彼此前后相随,在大街小巷中穿行,所以车声不断。此外,这里的大鼓等乐器一直不停地演奏,所以鼓声等也从不间断。其中,“铙钹声”是指铜钹的声音。“拍手声”是指用手掌拍打方形木板的声音。也有人说是“罐鼓声”。巴利
Māhevaṃ, ānanda, avacāti ānanda, mā evaṃ avaca, na imaṃ ‘‘khuddakanagara’’nti vattabbaṃ. Ahañhi imasseva nagarassa sampattiṃ kathetuṃ – ‘‘anekavāraṃ tiṭṭhaṃ nisīdaṃ mahantena ussāhena, mahantena parakkamena idhāgato’’ti vatvā bhūtapubbantiādimāha. Subhikkhāti khajjabhojjasampannā. Hatthisaddenāti ekasmiṃ hatthimhi saddaṃ karonte caturāsītihatthisahassāni saddaṃ karonti, iti hatthisaddena avivittā, hoti, tathā assasaddena. Puññavanto panettha sattā catusindhavayuttehi rathehi aññamaññaṃ anubandhamānā antaravīthīsu vicaranti, iti rathasaddena avivittā hoti. Niccaṃ payojitāneva panettha bheriādīni tūriyāni, iti bherisaddādīhipi avivittā hoti. Tattha sammasaddoti kaṃsatāḷasaddo. Pāṇitāḷasaddoti pāṇinā caturassaambaṇatāḷasaddo. Kuṭabherisaddotipi vadanti.
“Asnāthapivatha khādatha”就是“吃吧,喝吧,嚼吧”的意思。这里简单来说,加上“bhuñjatha bho”(请享用,诸位)这第十种声音,这座城就没有安静过,声音从未间断。这是为了说明:在其他城市里,会有“倒垃圾”“拿锄头来”“拿篮子来”“我们要出远门了”“拿米袋来”“拿饭袋来”“把盾牌、武器这些都准备好”之类的声音,但这座城从来没有过这样的情况。巴利
Asnāthapivatha khādathāti asnātha pivatha khādatha. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo, bhuñjatha bhoti iminā dasamena saddena avivittā hoti anupacchinnasaddā. Yathā pana aññesu nagaresu ‘‘kacavaraṃ chaḍḍetha, kudālaṃ gaṇhatha, pacchiṃ gaṇhatha, pavāsaṃ gamissāma, taṇḍulapuṭaṃ gaṇhatha, bhattapuṭaṃ gaṇhatha, phalakāvudhādīni sajjāni karothā’’ti evarūpā saddā honti, na yidha evaṃ ahosīti dasseti.
世尊说完“以第十种声音”之后,接着讲完“阿难,拘舍婆提王都曾被七重城墙围绕”等,把整部《大善见王经》开示圆满,然后说:“阿难,你去吧”等等。其中,“abhikkamatha”是朝这边走过来的意思,也就是“过来”。“难道他们不知道世尊已经来了吗?”他们是知道的。因为佛陀所到之处,总会引起很大的动静,但他们因为有事坐在某个地方,所以没有过来。世尊心想:“他们过来后,会为比丘僧团安排好座位和住处,然后提供给(他们)。”于是即使不是合适的时间,世尊也派人到他们那里去。巴利
‘‘Dasamena saddenā’’ti ca vatvā ‘‘kusāvatī, ānanda, rājadhānī sattahi pākārehi parikkhittā ahosī’’ti sabbaṃ mahāsudassanasuttaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā gaccha tvaṃ ānandātiādimāha. Tattha abhikkamathāti abhimukhā kamatha, āgacchathāti attho. Kiṃ pana te bhagavato āgatabhāvaṃ na jānantīti? Jānanti. Buddhānaṃ gatagataṭṭhānaṃ nāma mahantaṃ kolāhalaṃ hoti, kenacideva karaṇīyena nisinnattā na āgatā. ‘‘Te āgantvā bhikkhusaṅghassa ṭhānanisajjokāsaṃ saṃvidahitvā dassantī’’ti tesaṃ santike avelāyampi bhagavā pesesi.
末罗人礼敬的注释巴利
Mallānaṃ vandanāvaṇṇanā
211 在“Amhākañca no”这一句里,“no”只是一个语气词。“Aghāvino”是指已经生起痛苦的人。“Dummanā”是指心里不高兴的人。“Cetodukkhasamappitā”是指被内心的忧苦所充满的人。“Kulaparivattaso kulaparivattaso ṭhapetvā”的意思是:把每一个家族组别、每一个家族分类,按街道的划分和巷道的划分,各自分开来安置。巴利
211.Amhākañca noti ettha no kāro nipātamattaṃ. Aghāvinoti uppannadukkhā. Dummanāti anattamanā. Cetodukkhasamappitāti domanassasamappitā. Kulaparivattaso kulaparivattaso ṭhapetvāti ekekaṃ kulaparivattaṃ kulasaṅkhepaṃ vīthisabhāgena ceva racchāsabhāgena ca visuṃ visuṃ ṭhapetvā.
苏跋达游方者故事的注释巴利
Subhaddaparibbājakavatthuvaṇṇanā
212 名叫苏跋达的游方者,是从北方婆罗门大富之家出家、衣着整齐的游方者。疑法就是心存疑惑的状态。他为什么今天会生起这样的想法呢?是因为有那样的亲依止缘。据说,过去造作福德的时候,有两兄弟。他们一起种一块田。其中哥哥心想:“这块田的庄稼,我要在九个时节布施最上等的部分。”于是播种时,他布施了叫作“种子最上”的那一份;孕穗时,他和弟弟商量说:“孕穗的时候,我们剥开谷苞来布施吧。”弟弟说:“你是想毁掉嫩庄稼啊。”哥哥知道弟弟不肯听从,就把田分开,从自己那份田里剥开谷苞,取出乳浆,调上熟酥和生酥后布施;炒扁米时,他做成炒扁米布施;收割时,布施收割中最上的部分;束把时,布施束把中最上的部分;成捆等步骤,布施成捆中最上的部分;打谷场中最上的部分、打谷场上粮食中最上的部分、谷仓中最上的部分——像这样,对一块田的庄稼,他在九个时节都布施了最上的施物。而弟弟则是等庄稼全部收完之后才布施。巴利
212.Subhaddonāma paribbājakoti udiccabrāhmaṇamahāsālakulā pabbajito channaparibbājako. Kaṅkhādhammoti vimatidhammo. Kasmā panassa ajja evaṃ ahosīti? Tathāvidhaupanissayattā. Pubbe kira puññakaraṇakāle dve bhātaro ahesuṃ. Te ekatova sassaṃ akaṃsu. Tattha jeṭṭhakassa – ‘‘ekasmiṃ sasse navavāre aggasassadānaṃ mayā dātabba’’nti ahosi. So vappakāle bījaggaṃ nāma datvā gabbhakāle kaniṭṭhena saddhiṃ mantesi – ‘‘gabbhakāle gabbhaṃ phāletvā dassāmā’’ti kaniṭṭho – ‘‘taruṇasassaṃ nāsetukāmosī’’ti āha. Jeṭṭho kaniṭṭhassa ananuvattanabhāvaṃ ñatvā khettaṃ vibhajitvā attano koṭṭhāsato gabbhaṃ phāletvā khīraṃ nīharitvā sappinavanītena saṃyojetvā adāsi, puthukakāle puthukaṃ kāretvā adāsi, lāyanakāle lāyanaggaṃ, veṇikaraṇe veṇaggaṃ, kalāpādīsu kalāpaggaṃ, khalaggaṃ, khalabhaṇḍaggaṃ, koṭṭhagganti evaṃ ekasasse navavāre aggadānaṃ adāsi. Kaniṭṭho pana uddharitvā adāsi.
在他们两人当中,哥哥转生成了阿若憍陈如长老。世尊观察“我该先为谁说法”时,看到“阿若憍陈如曾在一块田的庄稼上做过九次最上的布施,我要为他说这最上的法”,于是最先为他说法。阿若憍陈如与一亿八千万梵天众一起证入入流果。而弟弟因为后来才作布施,所以在导师即将般涅槃的时候,才这样想着,想见导师。巴利
Tesu jeṭṭhako aññāsikoṇḍaññatthero jāto. Bhagavā – ‘‘kassa nu kho ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ deseyya’’nti olokento ‘‘aññāsikoṇḍañño ekasmiṃ sasse nava aggadānāni adāsi, imaṃ aggadhammaṃ tassa desessāmī’’ti sabbapaṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ desesi. So aṭṭhārasahi brahmakoṭīhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāsi. Kaniṭṭho pana ohīyitvā pacchā dānassa dinnattā satthu parinibbānakāle evaṃ cintetvā satthāraṃ daṭṭhukāmo ahosi.
“不要烦扰如来。”据说,长老心里想:“这些外道只会执着自己的见解,世尊为了给他们解答而说很多话,身体和语言都会疲劳,何况世尊本来就已经很疲倦了。”所以才这样说。那位游方者心想:“这位比丘不给我机会,但对于有需要的人,应该顺着他的意思来办。”于是他顺从长老,第二次、第三次地说了。巴利
Mā tathāgataṃ viheṭhesīti thero kira – ‘‘ete aññatitthiyā nāma attano gahaṇameva gaṇhanti, tassa vissajjāpanatthāya bhagavato bahuṃ bhāsamānassa kāyavācāvihesā bhavissati, pakatiyāpi ca kilantoyeva bhagavā’’ti maññamāno evamāha. Paribbājako – ‘‘na me ayaṃ bhikkhu okāsaṃ karoti, atthikena pana anuvattitvā kāretabbo’’ti theraṃ anuvattanto dutiyampi tatiyampi āha.
213 “他听到了”是说:那人凭着自己平常的听力,就听到了站在布帘门口的阿难与苏跋达的对话。听完之后,因为他是为了苏跋达的利益、怀着极大的热忱赶来的,世尊才说“够了,阿难”等话。其中“alaṃ”这个词是表示拒绝的意思。“或者想要了解”是说怀着想要知道的心。“他们证知了”是说就像他们自己所声称的那样,他们确实了知了。这里要表达的是:如果他们的声称是能导向出离的,那他们全都证知了;如果不是,那就没有证知。因此,“他们的声称到底能导向出离还是不能”,这正是那个问题的含义。于是世尊说明他们的声称不能导向出离,既没有实义,也没有余地,便用“够了”加以拒绝,然后直接说法。原来世尊的计划是:初夜为末罗人说法,中夜为苏跋达说法,后夜教诫比丘僧团,在黎明时分入般涅槃,所以他才来到这里。巴利
213.Assosikhoti sāṇidvāre ṭhitassa bhāsato pakatisoteneva assosi, sutvā ca pana subhaddasseva atthāya mahatā ussāhena āgatattā alaṃ ānandātiādimāha. Tattha alanti paṭikkhepatthe nipāto. Aññāpekkhovāti aññātukāmova hutvā. Abbhaññiṃsūti yathā tesaṃ paṭiññā, tatheva jāniṃsu. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace nesaṃ sā paṭiññā niyyānikā, sabbe abbhaññaṃsu, no ce, na abbhaññaṃsu. Tasmā kiṃ tesaṃ paṭiññā niyyānikā, aniyyānikāti ayameva tassa pañhassa attho. Atha bhagavā tesaṃ aniyyānikabhāvakathanena atthābhāvato ceva okāsābhāvato ca ‘‘ala’’nti paṭikkhipitvā dhammameva desesi. Paṭhamayāmasmiñhi mallānaṃ dhammaṃ desetvā majjhimayāme subhaddassa, pacchimayāme bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ovaditvā balavapaccūsasamaye parinibbāyissāmicceva bhagavā āgato.
214 在那里也找不到沙门,意思是:在那里,连第一位沙门——入流者——都没有,第二位沙门——一来者——也没有,第三位沙门——不来者——也没有,第四位沙门——阿拉汉——也没有。世尊先前说“在这个……”时,是以不限定对象的方式说的,现在则明确限定自己的教法,因此说“外道的说法中,沙门是空的”:为了四种道而修观的人有四种,处于道位的人有四种,处于果位的人有四种,共十二种沙门,外道的说法中完全没有这些沙门,是空洞。“这些,苏跋达”指这十二位比丘。入流者将自己所证得的境界讲与他人,使对方也成为入流者,这便称为“正当安住”。此理亦适用于一来者等。处于入流道位者将另一人也令成为处于入流道位者,这便称为“正当安住”。此理亦适用于其余道位。为入流道而修观者将自己所熟练的业处讲与他人,使另一人也成为为入流道而修观者,这便称为“正当安住”。此理亦适用于其余为道而修观者。世尊即是针对此而说“正当安住”。世间不空于阿拉汉,犹如芦苇丛与箭草丛般稠密无间。巴利
214.Samaṇopi tattha na upalabbhatīti paṭhamo sotāpannasamaṇopi tattha natthi, dutiyo sakadāgāmisamaṇopi, tatiyo anāgāmisamaṇopi, catuttho arahattasamaṇopi tattha natthīti attho. ‘‘Imasmiṃ kho’’ti purimadesanāya aniyamato vatvā idāni attano sāsanaṃ niyamento āha. Suññā parappavādā samaṇebhīti catunnaṃ maggānaṃ atthāya āraddhavipassakehi catūhi, maggaṭṭhehi catūhi, phalaṭṭhehi catūhīti dvādasahi samaṇehi suññā parappavādā tucchā rittakā. Ime ca subhaddāti ime dvādasa bhikkhū. Sammā vihareyyunti ettha sotāpanno attano adhigataṭṭhānaṃ aññassa kathetvā taṃ sotāpannaṃ karonto sammā viharati nāma. Esa nayo sakadāgāmiādīsu. Sotāpattimaggaṭṭho aññampi sotāpattimaggaṭṭhaṃ karonto sammā viharati nāma. Esa nayo sesamaggaṭṭhesu. Sotāpattimaggatthāya āraddhavipassako attano paguṇaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā aññampi sotāpattimaggatthāya āraddhavipassakaṃ karonto sammā viharati nāma. Esa nayo sesamaggatthāya āraddhavipassakesu. Idaṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘sammā vihareyyu’’nti. Asuñño loko arahantehi assāti naḷavanaṃ saravanaṃ viya nirantaro assa.
“二十九岁”是指当时年龄二十九岁。“将出家”里的“将”只是个虚词。“寻求什么善”是指他在寻求、探求“什么是善”。这里所说的“什么是善”,指的是佛陀的一切知智,意思是他在追寻那个一切知智。“自从我……”是说从我出家那天起,到现在已经超过五十年了,这是在说明这一点。“如理之法”是指圣道之法。“行于局部”是指只在局部修观道的人。“此教法之外”是指在我的教法之外。“也没有沙门”是说连局部修观的沙门都没有,更不用说最初的入流沙门了。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Ekūnatiṃso vayasāti vayena ekūnatiṃsavasso hutvā. Yaṃ pabbajinti ettha yanti nipātamattaṃ. Kiṃ kusalānuesīti ‘‘kiṃ kusala’’nti anuesanto pariyesanto. Tattha – ‘‘kiṃ kusala’’nti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, taṃ gavesantoti attho. Yato ahanti yato paṭṭhāya ahaṃ pabbajito, etthantare samadhikāni paññāsa vassāni hontīti dasseti. Ñāyassa dhammassāti ariyamaggadhammassa. Padesavattīti padese vipassanāmagge pavattanto. Ito bahiddhāti mama sāsanato bahiddhā. Samaṇopinatthīti padesavattivipassakopi natthi, paṭhamasamaṇo sotāpannopi natthīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Ye etthā”的意思是“你们在这里”:也就是你们在这教法当中,被导师当面以弟子灌顶的方式授予了弟子之位,这对你们来说是获益,是善得。据说在外道传统里,如果阿阇梨对弟子说“让这个人出家,教诫这个人,教导这个人”,那个人就被放在了阿阇梨自己的位置上,因此他就获得了“让这个人出家,教诫这个人,教导这个人”这样的利益。苏跋达长老也是采用了外道的这种说法,才这样说的。巴利
Ye etthāti ye tumhe ettha sāsane satthārā sammukhā antevāsikābhisekena abhisittā, tesaṃ vo lābhā tesaṃ vo suladdhanti. Bāhirasamaye kira yaṃ antevāsikaṃ ācariyo – ‘‘imaṃ pabbājehi , imaṃ ovada, imaṃ anusāsā’’ti vadati, so tena attano ṭhāne ṭhapito hoti, tasmā tassa – ‘‘imaṃ pabbajehi, imaṃ ovada, imaṃ anusāsā’’ti ime lābhā honti. Therampi subhaddo tameva bāhirasamayaṃ gahetvā evamāha.
“他得到了”这句话,他是怎么得到的呢?据说,长老把他带到一边,用水罐里的水沾湿他的头,为他讲了以皮为对象的五种禅修业处,然后剃掉他的须发,让他穿上袈裟,授予三皈依,再带他到世尊面前。世尊为他授了具足戒,然后指示了禅修业处。他领受业处后,在园林的一角决意经行,精勤努力,增长观慧,最终连同无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果,回来顶礼世尊,坐在一旁。就是针对这件事,才说了“不久受具足戒……”等话。巴利
Alattha khoti kathaṃ alattha? Thero kira naṃ ekamantaṃ netvā udakatumbato pānīyena sīsaṃ temetvā tacapañcakakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā kesamassuṃ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni acchādāpetvā saraṇāni datvā bhagavato santikaṃ ānesi. Bhagavā upasampādetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhi. So taṃ gahetvā uyyānassa ekamante caṅkamaṃ adhiṭṭhāya ghaṭento vāyamanto vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhento saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patvā āgamma bhagavantaṃ vanditvā nisīdi. Taṃ sandhāya – ‘‘acirūpasampanno kho panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“他成了世尊最后一位亲证弟子”,这是结集者们说的话。其中,如果有人是在世尊还在世时出家,后来才受达上,得到业处后证得阿拉汉果;或者是在世尊还在世时就受了达上,后来得到业处后证得阿拉汉果;或者是在世尊还在世时就得到了业处,后来才证得阿拉汉果——所有这些人都是“最后亲证弟子”。但这一位,是在世尊还在世时,就已经出家、受达上、得到业处并证得阿拉汉果的。巴利
So ca bhagavato pacchimo sakkhisāvako ahosīti saṅgītikārakānaṃ vacanaṃ. Tattha yo bhagavati dharamāne pabbajitvā aparabhāge upasampadaṃ labhitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, upasampadampi vā dharamāneyeva labhitvā aparabhāge kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, kammaṭṭhānampi vā dharamāneyeva gahetvā aparabhāge arahattameva pāpuṇāti, sabbopi so pacchimo sakkhisāvako. Ayaṃ pana dharamāneyeva bhagavati pabbajito ca upasampanno ca kammaṭṭhānañca gahetvā arahattaṃ pattoti.
如来最后教诲的注释巴利
Tathāgatapacchimavācāvaṇṇanā
216 216. 现在开始对僧团作教诫。为了说明这一点,经文说“那时,世尊……”等。其中,“已教导、已制定”:法是已教导、已制定的,律也是已教导、已制定的。“已制定”就是已安立、已建立的意思。“那在我不在后”:意思是那法与律,在我不在世之后,就是你们的导师。因为我在世时就已经这样教导过:“这是轻罪,这是重罪;这是可补救的,这是不可补救的;这是世间罪,这是制罪;这种罪要在个人面前出罪,这种罪要在众人面前出罪,这种罪要在僧团面前出罪。”就这样,依照七类罪,针对所发生的情形,配上相应的犍度与附随,对比丘分别和比丘尼分别加以教导,这称为律。这整部律藏,在我般涅槃之后,将为你们承担导师的职责。巴利
216. Idāni bhikkhusaṅghassa ovādaṃ ārabhi, taṃ dassetuṃ atha kho bhagavātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha desito paññattoti dhammopi desito ceva paññatto ca, vinayopi desito ceva paññatto ca. Paññatto ca nāma ṭhapito paṭṭhapitoti attho. So vo mamaccayenāti so dhammavinayo tumhākaṃ mamaccayena satthā. Mayā hi vo ṭhiteneva – ‘‘idaṃ lahukaṃ, idaṃ garukaṃ, idaṃ satekicchaṃ, idaṃ atekicchaṃ, idaṃ lokavajjaṃ, idaṃ paṇṇattivajjaṃ, ayaṃ āpatti puggalassa santike vuṭṭhāti, ayaṃ āpatti gaṇassa santike vuṭṭhāti, ayaṃ saṅghassa santike vuṭṭhātī’’ti sattāpattikkhandhavasena otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ sakhandhakaparivāro ubhatovibhaṅgo vinayo nāma desito, taṃ sakalampi vinayapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati.
我在世时,就以这样的方式反复分析这些法,并宣说了经藏:“这些是四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八圣道。”这整部经藏,在我般涅槃之后,会代替我履行导师的职责。
我在世时,也以这样的方式反复分析这些法,并宣说了阿毗达摩藏:“这些是五蕴、十二处、十八界、四谛、二十二根、九因、四食、七触、七受、七想、七思、七心。其中,这些法属于欲界,这些属于色界,这些属于无色界;这些是包含在内的,这些是不包含在内的;这些是世间的,这些是出世间的。”这部阿毗达摩藏以二十四缘、无量门和《大论》为庄严。这整部阿毗达摩藏,在我般涅槃之后,会代替我履行导师的职责。巴利
Ṭhiteneva ca mayā – ‘‘ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañca indriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti tena tenākārena ime dhamme vibhajitvā vibhajitvā suttantapiṭakaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sakalampi suttantapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati. Ṭhiteneva ca mayā – ‘‘ime pañcakkhandhā, dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, cattāri saccāni, bāvīsatindriyāni, nava hetū, cattāro āhārā, satta phassā, satta vedanā, satta saññā, satta sañcetanā, satta cittāni. Tatrāpi ‘ettakā dhammā kāmāvacarā, ettakā rūpāvacarā, ettakā arūpāvacarā, ettakā pariyāpannā, ettakā apariyāpannā, ettakā lokiyā, ettakā lokuttarā’ti’’ ime dhamme vibhajitvā vibhajitvā catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānaanantanayamahāpaṭṭhānapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ desitaṃ, taṃ sakalampi abhidhammapiṭakaṃ mayi parinibbute tumhākaṃ satthukiccaṃ sādhessati.
从成就正觉直到般涅槃,这四十五年间所宣说、所讲述的一切——也就是“三藏、五部、九分教、八万四千法蕴”——就这样形成了广大的分类。这八万四千法蕴留存下来,而只有我一个人般涅槃。现在也只有我一个人在教诫、教导;我般涅槃之后,这八万四千法蕴会教诫你们、教导你们。世尊这样举出种种理由,教诫说“我不在以后,它就是你们的导师”,接着为了展示未来的行持,又说了“那么,以怎样的方式……”等等。巴利
Iti sabbampetaṃ abhisambodhito yāva parinibbānā pañcacattālīsavassāni bhāsitaṃ lapitaṃ – ‘‘tīṇi piṭakāni, pañca nikāyā, navaṅgāni, caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti evaṃ mahāpabhedaṃ hoti. Iti imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni tiṭṭhanti, ahaṃ ekova parinibbāyāmi. Ahañca kho pana dāni ekakova ovadāmi anusāsāmi, mayi parinibbute imāni caturāsīti dhammakkhandhasahassāni tumhe ovadissanti anusāsissantīti evaṃ bhagavā bahūni kāraṇāni dassento – ‘‘so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti ovaditvā puna anāgate cārittaṃ dassento yathā kho panātiādimāha.
在这里,“交往”就是交谈、打招呼的意思。不叫他们“新学比丘”,而是用名字来称呼,比如“帝萨、那伽”;或者用姓氏来称呼,比如“迦叶、乔达摩”;或者用“贤友”来称呼,比如“贤友帝萨、贤友迦叶”。也可以用“尊者”或“具寿”来称呼,比如“尊者帝萨、具寿帝萨”。“废除”的意思是,如果愿意就可以废除,如果想要就可以去掉。那为什么世尊不直接说“你们废除吧”,而是用留有余地的话来说呢?因为看到了大迦叶的坚定。世尊看到:“即使说了‘废除吧’,结集的时候迦叶也不会废除。”所以就用留有余地的话来说了。巴利
Tattha samudācarantīti kathenti voharanti. Nāmena vā gottena vāti navakāti avatvā ‘‘tissa, nāgā’’ti evaṃ nāmena vā, ‘‘kassapa, gotamā’’ti evaṃ gottena vā, ‘‘āvuso tissa, āvuso kassapā’’ti evaṃ āvusovādena vā samudācaritabbo. Bhanteti vā āyasmāti vāti bhante tissa, āyasmā tissāti evaṃ samudācaritabbo. Samūhanatūti ākaṅkhamāno samūhanatu, yadi icchati samūhaneyyāti attho. Kasmā pana samūhanathāti ekaṃseneva avatvā vikappavacaneneva ṭhapesīti? Mahākassapassa balaṃ diṭṭhattā. Passati hi bhagavā – ‘‘samūhanathāti vuttepi saṅgītikāle kassapo na samūhanissatī’’ti. Tasmā vikappeneva ṭhapesi.
在这里,有些长老这样说:“除了四条巴拉基格,其余的都是小小戒。”五百结集当中关于小小戒的讨论,就是按这种方式来的,它的判定在《一切善见》里已经说过。但也有人这样说:弥兰陀王问那先长老:“尊者那先,什么是小戒,什么是小小戒?”那先长老回答:“大王,恶作是小戒,恶说是小小戒。”因为他这样回答,所以那先长老是知道小小戒的。但大迦叶并不知道——巴利
Tattha – ‘‘ekacce therā evamāhaṃsu – cattāri pārājikāni ṭhapetvā avasesāni khuddānukhuddakānī’’tiādinā nayena pañcasatikasaṅgītiyaṃ khuddānukhuddakakathā āgatāva vinicchayo pettha samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto. Keci panāhu – ‘‘bhante, nāgasena, katamaṃ khuddakaṃ, katamaṃ anukhuddaka’’nti milindena raññā pucchito. ‘‘Dukkaṭaṃ, mahārāja, khuddakaṃ, dubbhāsitaṃ anukhuddaka’’nti vuttattā nāgasenatthero khuddānukhuddakaṃ jānāti. Mahākassapo pana taṃ ajānanto –
贤友们,请僧伽听我说:我们有些学处已经传到在家人那里,在家人也知道:“这些对你们释迦弟子沙门是允许的,这些是不允许的。”如果我们废除那些小小戒,就会有人出来指责说:“乔达摩沙门为弟子们制定的学处像烟一样短暂——导师还在世时,他们就依这些学处修学;导师一入涅槃,他们就不再依这些学处修学了。”如果僧伽觉得合适,僧伽就不应该制定未曾制定的,不应该废除已经制定的,而应该按照已经制定的学处来受持和实行。这就是提案。巴利
‘‘Suṇātu me, āvuso, saṅgho santamhākaṃ sikkhāpadāni gihigatāni, gihinopi jānanti – ‘‘idaṃ vo samaṇānaṃ sakyaputtiyānaṃ kappati, idaṃ vo na kappatī’’ti. Sace mayaṃ khuddānukhuddakāni sikkhāpadāni samūhanissāma, bhavissanti vattāro – ‘‘dhūmakālikaṃ samaṇena gotamena sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, yāva nesaṃ satthā aṭṭhāsi, tāvime sikkhāpadesu sikkhiṃsu, yato imesaṃ satthā parinibbuto, na dānime sikkhāpadesu sikkhantī’’ti. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho apaññattaṃ na paññapeyya, paññattaṃ na samucchindeyya, yathāpaññattesu sikkhāpadesu samādāya vatteyya. Esā ñattīti –
他宣读了甘马文。但不应该这样理解。因为那先长老是这样说的:“不要让外道有机可乘。”而大迦叶长老宣读甘马文,是说:“我不废除小小戒。”巴利
Kammavācaṃ sāvesīti. Na taṃ evaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Nāgasenatthero hi – ‘‘paravādino okāso mā ahosī’’ti evamāha. Mahākassapatthero ‘‘khuddānukhuddakāpattiṃ na samūhanissāmī’’ti kammavācaṃ sāvesi.
关于梵罚的讨论,因为在结集时已经提到过,所以《一切善见》里也作了判定。巴利
Brahmadaṇḍakathāpi saṅgītiyaṃ āgatattāsamantapāsādikāyaṃ vinicchitā.
“疑”就是犹豫不决。“惑”就是无法判定,比如心里冒出这样的怀疑:到底是佛吗?不是佛吗?到底是法吗?不是法吗?到底是僧吗?不是僧吗?到底是道吗?不是道吗?到底是修行之道吗?不是修行之道吗?对这样生起疑惑的人,我对你们说:“比丘们,问吧。”这就是这里的大意。如果你们因为敬重导师而不问——意思是:我们是在导师身边出家的,我们的四种资具也都只是导师的所有物,我们这么长时间都没有生起疑惑,我们今天这最后的时刻不配起疑(发问)。如果你们因为敬重导师而不问,那么,“比丘们,同伴也应该告诉同伴”,这是说:你们当中,谁和哪位比丘相熟、亲近,那个人就去告诉他,我来为那位比丘说法;听了他的说法之后,所有比丘都会远离疑惑。这是显示(表明)。巴利
Kaṅkhāti dveḷhakaṃ. Vimatīti vinicchituṃ asamatthatā, buddho nu kho, na buddho nu kho, dhammo nu kho, na dhammo nu kho, saṅgho nu kho, na saṅgho nu kho, maggo nu kho, na maggo nu kho, paṭipadā nu kho, na paṭipadā nu khoti yassa saṃsayo uppajjeyya, taṃ vo vadāmi ‘‘pucchatha bhikkhave’’ti ayamettha saṅkhepattho. Satthugāravenāpi na puccheyyāthāti mayaṃ satthusantike pabbajimha, cattāro paccayāpi no satthu santakāva, te mayaṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ kaṅkhaṃ akatvā na arahāma ajja pacchimakāle kaṅkhaṃ kātunti sace evaṃ satthari gāravena na pucchatha. Sahāyakopi bhikkhave sahāyakassa ārocetūti tumhākaṃ yo yassa bhikkhuno sandiṭṭho sambhatto, so tassa ārocetu, ahaṃ etassa bhikkhussa kathessāmi, tassa kathaṃ sutvā sabbe nikkaṅkhā bhavissathāti dasseti.
“这样确信”的意思是:我这样相信。“就是智”,是指使无疑状态得以现证之智本身;这里的意思是,对如来来说,并不只是单纯相信而已。“这些人”,阿难,是指在帷帐内坐着的五百位比丘。“最后那位”,是指在功德上排在最后的那位。这是针对阿难长老而说的。巴利
Evaṃ pasannoti evaṃ saddahāmi ahanti attho. Ñāṇamevāti nikkaṅkhabhāvapaccakkhakaraṇañāṇaṃyeva, ettha tathāgatassa na saddhāmattanti attho. Imesañhi, ānandāti imesaṃ antosāṇiyaṃ nisinnānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ. Yo pacchimakoti yo guṇavasena pacchimako. Ānandattheraṃyeva sandhāyāha.
218 “要以不放逸来成就”的意思是:不要丢失正念,要借此把一切该做的事都完成。就这样,世尊躺在般涅槃的床上,把四十五年间所给的教诫全部归入“不放逸”这一点之中,然后宣说了出来。“这是如来最后的话”——这一句则是结集者说的话。巴利
218.Appamādena sampādethāti satiavippavāsena sabbakiccāni sampādeyyātha. Iti bhagavā parinibbānamañce nipanno pañcacattālīsa vassāni dinnaṃ ovādaṃ sabbaṃ ekasmiṃ appamādapadeyeva pakkhipitvā adāsi. Ayaṃ tathāgatassa pacchimā vācāti idaṃ pana saṅgītikārakānaṃ vacanaṃ.
般涅槃的注释巴利
Parinibbutakathāvaṇṇanā
219 从此以后,世尊做完般涅槃前的准备工作就入了般涅槃。为了说明这件事,经中说了“那时,世尊进入初禅”等等。其中,“世尊已般涅槃了吗,尊者?”是因为看到进般涅槃尽定的世尊已经没有出息和入息才这样问的。“友,还没有。”——长老是怎么知道的呢?据说,长老跟着导师一起,次第进入各种等至,一直到从非想非非想处定出来,都随行到了那个阶段;现在他知道世尊已经进般涅槃尽定,而在灭尽定当中是不会有命终这回事的。巴利
219. Ito paraṃ yaṃ parinibbānaparikammaṃ katvā bhagavā parinibbuto, taṃ dassetuṃ atha kho bhagavā paṭhamaṃ jhānantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha parinibbuto bhanteti nirodhaṃ samāpannassa bhagavato assāsapassāsānaṃ abhāvaṃ disvā pucchati. Na āvusoti thero kathaṃ jānāti? Thero kira satthārā saddhiṃyeva taṃ taṃ samāpattiṃ samāpajjanto yāva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanā vuṭṭhānaṃ, tāva gantvā idāni bhagavā nirodhaṃ samāpanno, antonirodhe ca kālaṅkiriyā nāma natthīti jānāti.
那时,世尊从想受灭定出定后,进入非想非非想处……(中略)……从第三禅出定后,进入第四禅。在这里,世尊在二十四个所缘处进入初禅,在十三个所缘处进入第二禅,第三禅也是这样,在十五个所缘处进入第四禅。怎么讲呢?在十种不净、三十二身分、八种遍处、慈、悲、喜、入出息念、限定虚空——就在这二十四个所缘处进入初禅。除了三十二身分和十种不净之外,在其余十三个所缘处进入第二禅,也就在这些所缘处进入第三禅。而在八种遍处、舍梵住、入出息念、限定虚空、四种无色处——就在这十五个所缘处进入第四禅。这也只是简略的说法。然而,法主世尊在进入涅槃城时,先进入了整整二十四万亿种定,就像要远行的人拥抱亲人一样,把一切定中的安乐都体验了一遍,然后才入灭。巴利
Atha kho bhagavā saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpattiyā vuṭṭhahitvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpajji…pe… tatiyajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjīti ettha bhagavā catuvīsatiyā ṭhānesu paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajji, terasasu ṭhānesu dutiyajjhānaṃ, tathā tatiyajjhānaṃ, pannarasasu ṭhānesu catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajji. Kathaṃ? Dasasu asubhesu, dvattiṃsākāre aṭṭhasu kasiṇesu, mettākaruṇāmuditāsu, ānāpāne, paricchedākāseti imesu tāva catuvīsatiyā ṭhānesu paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajji. Ṭhapetvā pana dvattiṃsākārañca dasa asubhāni ca sesesu terasasu dutiyajjhānaṃ , tesuyeva ca tatiyajjhānaṃ samāpajji. Aṭṭhasu pana kasiṇesu, upekkhābrahmavihāre, ānāpāne, paricchedākāse, catūsu arūpesūti imesu pannarasasu ṭhānesu catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajji. Ayampi ca saṅkhepakathāva. Nibbānapuraṃ pavisanto pana bhagavā dhammassāmī sabbāpi catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā samāpattiyo pavisitvā videsaṃ gacchanto ñātijanaṃ āliṅgetvā viya sabbasamāpattisukhaṃ anubhavitvā paviṭṭho.
从第四禅出定之后,世尊紧接着就般涅槃了。这里说的“紧接着”有两种:一种是“禅那紧接着”,一种是“观察紧接着”。其中,从禅那出定后落入有分,就在那里般涅槃,这叫“禅那紧接着”;从禅那出定后再观察禅支,然后落入有分,就在那里般涅槃,这叫“观察紧接着”。这两种都只是“紧接着”而已。而世尊则是入禅那、出定、观察禅支之后,以无记的有分心、依苦谛而般涅槃。因为无论是诸佛、独觉佛、圣弟子,甚至小到蝼蚁,一切有情都是以无记的有分心、依苦谛而命终的。大地震动等事,如前所述。巴利
Catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhahitvā samanantarā bhagavā parinibbāyīti ettha jhānasamanantaraṃ, paccavekkhaṇāsamanantaranti dve samanantarāni. Tattha jhānā vuṭṭhāya bhavaṅgaṃ otiṇṇassa tattheva parinibbānaṃ jhānasamanantaraṃ nāma. Jhānā vuṭṭhahitvā puna jhānaṅgāni paccavekkhitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otiṇṇassa tattheva parinibbānaṃ paccavekkhaṇāsamanantaraṃ nāma. Imānipi dve samanantarāneva. Bhagavā pana jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā jhānā vuṭṭhāya jhānaṅgāni paccavekkhitvā bhavaṅgacittena abyākatena dukkhasaccena parinibbāyi. Ye hi keci buddhā vā paccekabuddhā vā ariyasāvakā vā antamaso kunthakipillikaṃ upādāya sabbe bhavaṅgacitteneva abyākatena dukkhasaccena kālaṅkarontīti. Mahābhūmicālādīni vuttanayānevāti.
220 已经存在的众生。没有能与之相比的人,是指没有能和他匹敌的人。达到力量,是指证得了十种智的力量。巴利
220.Bhūtāti sattā. Appaṭipuggaloti paṭibhāgapuggalavirahito. Balappattoti dasavidhañāṇabalaṃ patto.
221 具有生起与坏灭自性者,即那些有生有灭之法。它们的寂止,就是那些行的寂止,无为的涅槃,这才是乐。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
221.Uppādavayadhamminoti uppādavayasabhāvā. Tesaṃ vūpasamoti tesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ vūpasamo, asaṅkhataṃ nibbānameva sukhanti attho.
222 “没有出入息”是说:出入息没有生起。“不动”是说:因为不存在被称为渴爱的动摇,所以不动。“缘于寂静”是指以无余涅槃为所缘、依于它而说。“那位何时入灭”是指那位入灭的人。这里说的是:“贤友,我的导师佛陀牟尼,为了趣向寂静而入灭,也就是缘于寂静而入涅槃。那位如此安住于不动之心的如来,如今出入息没有生起,不存在,不再运转。”巴利
222.Nāhu assāsapassāsoti na jāto assāsapassāso. Anejoti taṇhāsaṅkhātāya ejāya abhāvena anejo. Santimārabbhāti anupādisesaṃ nibbānaṃ ārabbha paṭicca sandhāya. Yaṃ kālamakarīti yo kālaṃ akari. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘āvuso, yo mama satthā buddhamuni santiṃ gamissāmīti, santiṃ ārabbha kālamakari, tassa ṭhitacittassa tādino idāni assāsapassāso na jāto, natthi, nappavattatī’’ti.
以不退缩、不蜷缩、完全舒展的心。忍受感受,就是承受感受,而不是跟着感受跑,不在这里那里到处摇摆转动。解脱,就是不为任何法所障碍的解脱,彻底进入无施设的状态,变得像灯火熄灭一样。巴利
Asallīnenāti alīnena asaṅkuṭitena suvikasiteneva cittena. Vedanaṃ ajjhavāsayīti vedanaṃ adhivāsesi, na vedanānuvattī hutvā ito cito ca samparivatti. Vimokkhoti kenaci dhammena anāvaraṇavimokkho sabbaso apaññattibhāvūpagamo pajjotanibbānasadiso jāto.
223 “tadāsi”这句话,是就前面所说的“与般涅槃同时发生大地震”那个地震而说的。那个地震确实让人毛发直竖、心生恐惧。“sabbākāravarūpete”指具足一切最殊胜的因。巴利
223.Tadāsīti ‘‘saha parinibbānā mahābhūmicālo’’ti evaṃ heṭṭhā vuttaṃ bhūmicālameva sandhāyāha. Tañhi lomahaṃsanañca bhiṃsanakañca āsi. Sabbākāravarūpeteti sabbavarakāraṇūpete.
224 “未离贪”指的是凡夫,以及入流者和一来者。因为他们的忧还没有断除,所以他们也举起手臂哭喊。他们也是把双手放在头上哭泣——这一切都应当按前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
224.Avītarāgāti puthujjanā ceva sotāpannasakadāgāmino ca. Tesañhi domanassaṃ appahīnaṃ. Tasmā tepi bāhā paggayha kandanti. Ubhopi hatthe sīse ṭhapetvā rodantīti sabbaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
225 “她们讥嫌”是指她们这样说而讥嫌:“尊者自己都受不了,又怎么能安慰其他人呢?”那么,尊者,具寿阿那律是在忆念怎样的天神?尊者,具寿阿那律是在观察怎样的天神?那些天神能接受世尊的般涅槃吗?巴利
225.Ujjhāyantīti ‘‘ayyā attanāpi adhivāsetuṃ na sakkonti, sesajanaṃ kathaṃ samassāsessantī’’ti vadantiyo ujjhāyanti. Kathaṃbhūtā pana bhante āyasmā anuruddho devatā manasikarotīti devatā, bhante, kathaṃbhūtā āyasmā anuruddho sallakkheti, kiṃ tā satthu parinibbānaṃ adhivāsentīti?
接着,为了说明她们当时的情形,长老说出“santāvuso”等话。这些话的意思前面已经讲过。“Rattāvasesa”是指,因为世尊在黎明时分般涅槃,所以夜里剩下的时间已经很少了。“Dhammiyā kathāya”是说,并没有另外单独的一种法谈,他们就是以这样与死亡相关的话来度过时间,比如:“贤友,在这个有天神和人的世间,连无与伦比的导师死神都不放过,更何况世俗大众呢?”就在他们这样谈论的时候,转眼间天就亮了。巴利
Atha tāsaṃ pavattidassanatthaṃ thero santāvusotiādimāha. Taṃ vuttatthameva. Rattāvasesanti balavapaccūse parinibbutattā rattiyā avasesaṃ cullakaddhānaṃ. Dhammiyā kathāyāti aññā pāṭiyekkā dhammakathā nāma natthi, ‘‘āvuso sadevake nāma loke appaṭipuggalassa satthuno ayaṃ maccurājā na lajjati, kimaṅgaṃ pana lokiyamahājanassa lajjissatī’’ti evarūpāya pana maraṇapaṭisaṃyuttāya kathāya vītināmesuṃ. Tesañhi taṃ kathaṃ kathentānaṃ muhutteneva aruṇaṃ uggacchi.
226 那时,长老看见曙光后,就对那位长老这样说道。“正是应当做的那件事”:意思是说,在般涅槃的地方,应当用什么样的花鬘、香料等来作供养?应当为比丘僧团准备什么样的座位处所?应当备办什么样的嚼食和啖食?也就是说,凡是听闻世尊已经般涅槃之后所应当做的事,全都包括在这“应当做的那件事”里了。巴利
226.Atha khoti aruṇuggaṃ disvāva thero theraṃ etadavoca. Teneva karaṇīyenāti kīdisena nu kho parinibbānaṭṭhāne mālāgandhādisakkārena bhavitabbaṃ, kīdisena bhikkhusaṅghassa nisajjaṭṭhānena bhavitabbaṃ, kīdisena khādanīyabhojanīyena bhavitabbanti, evaṃ yaṃ bhagavato parinibbutabhāvaṃ sutvā kattabbaṃ teneva karaṇīyena.
佛陀舍利供养的注释巴利
Buddhasarīrapūjāvaṇṇanā
227 把所有的打击乐器都带上,也就是指全部乐器。叫他们集合起来,意思是敲鼓召集,让他们聚到一起。他们就照这样做了。在布幔厅堂里,指的是用布搭成的厅堂。正在准备,指的是正在布置。巴利
227.Sabbañca tāḷāvacaranti sabbaṃ tūriyabhaṇḍaṃ. Sannipātethāti bheriṃ carāpetvā samāharatha. Te tatheva akaṃsu. Maṇḍalamāḷeti dussamaṇḍalamāḷe. Paṭiyādentāti sajjentā.
往南边,就是朝着城市南边那一带的方向。往城外,就是不把舍利送进城里,而是从城外直接运到城市的外围。从城市的南边,意思是把舍利安放在阿努拉德普勒城南门那样的地方,做完供养和礼敬之后,我们将在类似祇园那样的地方把它火化。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Dakkhiṇena dakkhiṇanti nagarassa dakkhiṇadisābhāgeneva dakkhiṇadisābhāgaṃ. Bāhirena bāhiranti antonagaraṃ appavesetvā bāhireneva nagarassa bāhirapassaṃ haritvā. Dakkhiṇato nagarassāti anurādhapurassa dakkhiṇadvārasadise ṭhāne ṭhapetvā sakkārasammānaṃ katvā jetavanasadise ṭhāne jhāpessāmāti attho.
228 八位末罗族首领:指八位正值壮年、体力强健的末罗族国王。沐浴洗头后:就是洗过头、沐浴过之后。对阿那律尊者:因为这位长老以天眼通而闻名,所以尽管还有其他大长老在场,他们还是问这位长老,心想:这位会给我们讲得清清楚楚。尊者,诸天神的意图是怎样的呢?意思是:尊者,我们自己的意图我们当然知道,诸天神的意图又是怎样的呢?他们这样问。长老先指出他们的意图,说出你们的……等话。名为摩拘吒般檀那的末罗族塔庙,本是末罗国王们装饰庆典堂的名字。不过,因为它受到尊崇恭敬,所以称为塔庙。巴利
228.Aṭṭha mallapāmokkhāti majjhimavayā thāmasampannā aṭṭhamallarājāno. Sīsaṃ nhātāti sīsaṃ dhovitvā nahātā. Āyasmantaṃ anuruddhanti therova dibbacakkhukoti pākaṭo, tasmā te santesupi aññesu mahātheresu – ‘‘ayaṃ no pākaṭaṃ katvā kathessatī’’ti theraṃ pucchiṃsu. Kathaṃ pana, bhante, devatānaṃ adhippāyoti bhante, amhākaṃ tāva adhippāyaṃ jānāma. Devatānaṃ kathaṃ adhippāyoti pucchanti. Thero paṭhamaṃ tesaṃ adhippāyaṃ dassento tumhākaṃ khotiādimāha. Makuṭabandhanaṃ nāma mallānaṃ cetiyanti mallarājūnaṃ pasādhanamaṅgalasālāya etaṃ nāmaṃ. Cittīkataṭṭhena panesā ‘‘cetiya’’nti vuccati.
229 “直到墙缝、粪堆和垃圾堆”这里,墙缝指的是房屋的缝隙,粪堆指的是粪便堆积、污秽的排水沟之类,垃圾堆指的是堆放垃圾的地方。“以天和人的舞蹈”:上方有天众的舞蹈,下方有人间的舞蹈,歌曲等也是这样。此外,天众中间夹杂着人,人中间夹杂着天,他们就这样一边供养、一边礼拜地前行。“从城的正中间穿过”:当世尊的遗体这样被抬着走的时候,般陀罗将军的妻子,名叫玛离咖的女子,听说“正在抬运世尊的遗体”,就把自从丈夫去世后一直收着、再没佩戴过的、像毗舍佉的首饰那样华丽的大蔓藤宝饰取出来,说“我要用这个供养导师”,于是让人把宝饰打磨光亮,用香水洗净,然后站在门口。巴利
229.Yāvasandhisamalasaṅkaṭīrāti ettha sandhi nāma gharasandhi. Samalaṃ nāma gūtharāsiniddhamanapanāḷi. Saṅkaṭīraṃ nāma saṅkāraṭṭhānaṃ. Dibbehi ca mānusakehi ca naccehīti upari devatānaṃ naccāni honti, heṭṭhā manussānaṃ. Esa nayo gītādīsu. Apica devatānaṃ antare manussā, manussānaṃ antare devatāti evampi sakkarontā pūjentā agamaṃsu. Majjhena majjhaṃ nagarassa haritvāti evaṃ hariyamāne bhagavato sarīre bandhulamallasenāpatibhariyā mallikā nāma – ‘‘bhagavato sarīraṃ āharantī’’ti sutvā attano sāmikassa kālaṃ kiriyato paṭṭhāya aparibhuñjitvā ṭhapitaṃ visākhāya pasādhanasadisaṃ mahālatāpasādhanaṃ nīharāpetvā – ‘‘iminā satthāraṃ pūjessāmī’’ti taṃ majjāpetvā gandhodakena dhovitvā dvāre ṭhitā.
据说,那件宝饰只出现在两个女人和天授盗贼的家里这三个地方。当世尊的遗体被抬到门口时,她说:“孩子们,把世尊的遗体放下来。”说完就把那件宝饰戴到世尊的遗体上。那宝饰从头部开始戴上,一直覆盖到脚底。世尊金色的遗体被这件七宝大庄严饰装点后,显得格外璀璨夺目。她看到这一幕,心生欢喜,便发愿说:“世尊,只要我还在轮回中流转,愿我永远不需要另外佩戴饰品,愿我的身体始终像这样——就像佩戴着这件宝饰的佛身一样。”巴利
Taṃ kira pasādhanaṃ tāsañca dvinnaṃ itthīnaṃ, devadāniyacorassa geheti tīsuyeva ṭhānesu ahosi. Sā ca satthu sarīre dvāraṃ sampatte – ‘‘otāretha, tātā, satthusarīra’’nti vatvā taṃ pasādhanaṃ satthusarīre paṭimuñci. Taṃ sīsato paṭṭhāya paṭimukkaṃ yāvapādatalāgataṃ. Suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ bhagavato sarīraṃ sattaratanamayena mahāpasādhanena pasādhitaṃ ativiya virocittha. Taṃ sā disvā pasannacittā patthanaṃ akāsi – ‘‘bhagavā yāva vaṭṭe saṃsarissāmi, tāva me pāṭiyekkaṃ pasādhanakiccaṃ mā hotu, niccaṃ paṭimukkapasādhanasadisameva sarīraṃ hotū’’ti.
然后,他们把世尊的遗体用七宝做成的大装饰抬起来,从东门送出去,抬到城东末罗族那座称为“冠结”的塔庙,在那里安放了世尊的遗体。巴利
Atha bhagavantaṃ sattaratanamayena mahāpasādhanena ukkhipitvā puratthimena dvārena nīharitvā puratthimena nagarassa makuṭabandhanaṃ mallānaṃ cetiyaṃ, ettha bhagavato sarīraṃ nikkhipiṃsu.
大迦叶长老事迹的注释巴利
Mahākassapattheravatthuvaṇṇanā
231 从波婆城前往拘尸那罗途中:在波婆城托钵乞食后,他心想“我要去拘尸那罗”,于是走上了长途旅程。坐在树下——这里为什么不说是“日间住”呢?因为他不是为了日间住才坐下的。要知道,长老的随行比丘们全都是从小在安乐中长大、福德深厚的人。正午时分,地面热得像烧烫的石头,他们一步步走着,都累坏了。长老看到他们,心想:“比丘们累了,要去的地方也不远了,稍微休息一下,消除疲劳,傍晚时再到拘尸那罗去见十力世尊。”于是他离开道路,在一棵树下铺开桑喀帝衣,用水壶里的水把手脚冲凉,然后坐下。随行的比丘们也在树下坐下,如理作意地用功,称叹三宝的功德。正因为是为了消除疲劳才坐下,所以没有说是“日间住”。巴利
231.Pāvāyakusināranti pāvānagare piṇḍāya caritvā ‘‘kusināraṃ gamissāmī’’ti addhānamaggappaṭipanno hoti. Rukkhamūle nisīdīti ettha kasmā divāvihāranti na vuttaṃ? Divāvihāratthāya anisinnattā. Therassa hi parivārā bhikkhū sabbe sukhasaṃvaddhitā mahāpuññā. Te majjhanhikasamaye tattapāsāṇasadisāya bhūmiyā padasā gacchantā kilamiṃsu. Thero te disvā – ‘‘bhikkhū kilamanti, gantabbaṭṭhānañca na dūraṃ, thokaṃ vissamitvā darathaṃ paṭippassambhetvā sāyanhasamaye kusināraṃ gantvā dasabalaṃ passissāmī’’ti maggā okkamma aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle saṅghāṭiṃ paññapetvā udakatumbato udakena hatthapāde sītale katvā nisīdi. Parivārabhikkhūpissa rukkhamūle nisīditvā yoniso manasikāre kammaṃ kurumānā tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānā nisīdiṃsu. Iti darathavinodanatthāya nisinnattā ‘‘divāvihāra’’nti na vuttaṃ.
拿了曼陀罗花之后,他把一朵有锅盖那么大的花放在客杖上,像举着一把伞一样拿着。他确实看见了——他从远处看见那人正走过来。看见之后,他心里想:巴利
Mandāravapupphaṃ gahetvāti mahāpātippamāṇaṃ pupphaṃ āgantukadaṇḍake ṭhapetvā chattaṃ viya gahetvā. Addasa khoti āgacchantaṃ dūrato addasa. Disvā ca pana cintesi –
这个邪命外道手里明明拿着一朵曼陀罗花。这种花平时不会出现在人走的路上,只有当某个有神通的人施展神通的时候,或者一切知菩萨入母胎等特殊时刻,才会出现。可是今天并没有任何人施展神通,我的导师没有入母胎,也没有从母胎里出来;今天也不是他成就正等觉的日子,不是转法轮的日子,不是示现双神变的日子,不是从天下降的日子,也不是他舍寿的日子。但是我的导师年纪已经很大了,他一定已经般涅槃了。巴利
‘‘Etaṃ ājīvakassa hatthe mandāravapupphaṃ paññāyati, etañca na sabbadā manussapathe paññāyati, yadā pana koci iddhimā iddhiṃ vikubbati, tadā sabbaññubodhisattassa ca mātukucchiokkamanādīsu hoti. Na kho pana ajja kenaci iddhivikubbanaṃ kataṃ, na me satthā mātukucchiṃ okkanto, na kucchito nikkhamanto, nāpissa ajja abhisambodhi, na dhammacakkappavattanaṃ, na yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ, na devorohaṇaṃ, na āyusaṅkhārossajjanaṃ. Mahallako pana me satthā dhuvaṃ parinibbuto bhavissatī’’ti.
于是,他生起一个念头:“我该不该问呢?”接着又想:“如果我坐着不动就问,那就对导师不够恭敬了。”于是他起身,从站着的地方退开。就像六牙龙王披上宝珠般的皮囊一样,他披上那件十力世尊所赐、颜色如雨云的粪扫衣,把十指并拢、光洁明亮的合掌举到头顶,怀着对导师的恭敬,面向那位邪命外道,说道:“贤友,你知道我们的导师吗?”
他是在已经知道导师般涅槃的情况下还问,还是不知道才问的呢?有人说:漏尽者的了知要依靠作意才能生起,他因为没有作意,所以不知道才问。这位长老经常安住在等至中,在夜间住处、日间住处、山洞、讲堂等处,他总是靠着等至的力量度日;即使进入俗人居住的村落,也会在门前先入等至,出定之后才接受食物。据说长老心里想:“我要用这最后一生来利益大众——凡是布施我食物,或者用香花等供养我的人,愿他们都能得到大果报。”所以他这样做。因此,由于他经常安住在等至中,所以不知道。他们就说他只是因为不知道才问。但这种说法不应该接受。巴利
Tato – ‘‘pucchāmi na’’nti cittaṃ uppādetvā – ‘‘sace kho pana nisinnakova pucchāmi, satthari agāravo kato bhavissatī’’ti uṭṭhahitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānato apakkamma chaddanto nāgarājā maṇicammaṃ viya dasabaladattiyaṃ meghavaṇṇaṃ paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ pārupitvā dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalaṃ añjaliṃ sirasmiṃ patiṭṭhapetvā satthari katena gāravena ājīvakassa abhimukho hutvā – ‘‘āvuso, amhākaṃ satthāraṃ jānāsī’’ti āha. Kiṃ pana satthu parinibbānaṃ jānanto pucchi ajānantoti? Āvajjanapaṭibaddhaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ jānanaṃ, anāvajjitattā panesa ajānanto pucchīti eke. Thero samāpattibahulo, rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānaleṇamaṇḍapādīsu niccaṃ samāpattibaleneva yāpeti, kulasantakampi gāmaṃ pavisitvā dvāre samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā samāpattito vuṭṭhitova bhikkhaṃ gaṇhāti. Thero kira iminā pacchimena attabhāvena mahājanānuggahaṃ karissāmi – ‘‘ye mayhaṃ bhikkhaṃ vā denti gandhamālādīhi vā sakkāraṃ karonti, tesaṃ taṃ mahapphalaṃ hotū’’ti evaṃ karoti. Tasmā samāpattibahulatāya na jānāti. Iti ajānantova pucchatīti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.
这里其实并没有“不知情”这回事。世尊入般涅槃是有明显征兆的,比如一万个世界震动等等。不过,在长老的随行大众里,有些比丘以前见过世尊,有些没见过。见过的想再见,没见过的也想见。那些没见过世尊的人,因为太想见到,就会上前问:“世尊在哪里?”一听到“已经般涅槃了”,他们就承受不住,丢下衣和钵,有的只穿一件衣,有的衣衫不整,有的衣冠散乱,捶着胸口大哭。这时人们会说:“跟大迦叶长老一起来的这些粪扫衣者,自己哭得像女人一样,他们怎么能安慰我们?”于是把过错推到我身上。但这里是空寂的大森林,在这里不管他们怎么哭都没有过失。而且,如果提前听到消息,悲伤也会轻一些。所以,长老是为了让比丘们提起正念,明明知道却故意发问。巴利
Na hettha ajānanakāraṇaṃ atthi. Abhilakkhitaṃ satthu parinibbānaṃ ahosi, dasasahassilokadhātukampanādīhi nimittehi. Therassa pana parisāya kehici bhikkhūhi bhagavā diṭṭhapubbo, kehici na diṭṭhapubbo, tattha yehipi diṭṭhapubbo, tepi passitukāmāva, yehipi adiṭṭhapubbo, tepi passitukāmāva. Tattha yehi na diṭṭhapubbo, te atidassanakāmatāya gantvā ‘‘kuhiṃ bhagavā’’ti pucchantā ‘‘parinibbuto’’ti sutvā sandhāretuṃ nāsakkhissanti. Cīvarañca pattañca chaḍḍetvā ekavatthā vā dunnivatthā vā duppārutā vā urāni paṭipisantā parodissanti. Tattha manussā – ‘‘mahākassapattherena saddhiṃ āgatā paṃsukūlikā sayampi itthiyo viya parodanti, te kiṃ amhe samassāsessantī’’ti mayhaṃ dosaṃ dassanti. Idaṃ pana suññaṃ mahāaraññaṃ, idha yathā tathā rodantesu doso natthi. Purimataraṃ sutvā nāma sokopi tanuko hotīti bhikkhūnaṃ satuppādanatthāya jānantova pucchi.
今天,沙门乔达摩已经般涅槃七天了。意思是,沙门乔达摩到今天已经般涅槃满七天。我从那里得到了这个。意思是从沙门乔达摩般涅槃的地方得到了这个。巴利
Ajja sattāhaparinibbuto samaṇo gotamoti ajja samaṇo gotamo sattāhaparinibbuto. Tato me idanti tato samaṇassa gotamassa parinibbutaṭṭhānato.
232 有个叫苏跋达的老年出家者。“苏跋达”是他的名字。因为他是年老时才出家的,所以被称为“老年出家者”。那他为什么说那样的话呢?是因为对世尊起了嗔恨。据说,这位在《犍度》中提到的、以阿菟摩为事发地点的老年出家者,以前是给人理发的。当世尊从拘尸那罗出发,与一千二百五十位比丘组成的大比丘僧团一起前往阿菟摩时,他听说世尊要来了,就对还在做沙弥的两个儿子说:“孩子们,听说世尊要与一千二百五十位比丘组成的大比丘僧团一起来阿菟摩。你们去吧,带上理发工具,用杆秤挨家挨户去收集盐、油、米和嚼食,等世尊到了,我们来做粥饮。”他们就照做了。巴利
232.Subhaddo nāma vuḍḍhapabbajitoti ‘‘subhaddo’’ti tassa nāmaṃ. Vuḍḍhakāle pana pabbajitattā ‘‘vuḍḍhapabbajito’’ti vuccati. Kasmā pana so evamāha? Bhagavati āghātena. Ayaṃ kireso khandhake āgate ātumāvatthusmiṃ nahāpitapubbako vuḍḍhapabbajito bhagavati kusinārato nikkhamitvā aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ ātumaṃ āgacchante bhagavā āgacchatīti sutvā – ‘‘āgatakāle yāgupānaṃ karissāmī’’ti sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhite dve putte etadavoca – ‘‘bhagavā kira, tātā, ātumaṃ āgacchati mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ aḍḍhateḷasehi bhikkhusatehi; gacchatha tumhe, tātā, khurabhaṇḍaṃ ādāya nāḷiyāvāpakena anugharakaṃ anugharakaṃ āhiṇḍatha loṇampi telampi taṇḍulampi khādanīyampi saṃharatha bhagavato āgatassa yāgupānaṃ karissāmā’’ti (mahāva. 303). Te tathā akaṃsu.
人们看到那些孩子机灵可爱、善于应对,就算本来想让他们做,或本来不想让他们做,最后还是会让他们做。做完以后就问:“孩子们,你们要拿什么?”他们回答说:“我们不需要别的,只是父亲想在世尊来的时候供养粥。”人们听了这话,根本不计较,凡是能拿来的,全都给了;自己拿不动的,就派人送去。等世尊到了阿菟摩,走进糠仓之后,苏跋达傍晚来到村口,招呼大家说:“各位近事男,我不向你们求别的,我儿子们拿来的米等已经够僧团用了。你们有什么手艺活,就交给我吧。”他让人把各种工具都拿来,在寺院里砌好灶,下身穿一件黑色袈裟,上身也披一件同样的,整夜来回奔走,指挥着“做这个,做那个”,花掉了十万财物,让人备好可食粥和蜜丸。所谓可食粥,就是吃完后所喝的粥,里面放了酥油、蜂蜜、糖蜜、鱼肉、花果汁等,凡是能吃的都放进去,适合给想玩耍的人涂头,香气扑鼻。巴利
Manussā te dārake mañjuke paṭibhāneyyake disvā kāretukāmāpi akāretukāmāpi kārentiyeva. Katakāle – ‘‘kiṃ gaṇhissatha tātā’’ti pucchanti. Te vadanti – ‘‘na amhākaṃ aññena kenaci attho, pitā pana no bhagavato, āgatakāle yāgudānaṃ dātukāmo’’ti. Taṃ sutvā manussā aparigaṇetvāva yaṃ te sakkonti āharituṃ, sabbaṃ denti. Yampi na sakkonti, manussehi pesenti. Atha bhagavati ātumaṃ āgantvā bhusāgāraṃ paviṭṭhe subhaddo sāyanhasamayaṃ gāmadvāraṃ gantvā manusse āmantesi – ‘‘upāsakā, nāhaṃ tumhākaṃ santikā aññaṃ kiñci paccāsīsāmi, mayhaṃ dārakehi ābhatāni taṇḍulādīniyeva saṅghassa pahonti. Yaṃ hatthakammaṃ, taṃ me dethā’’ti. ‘‘Idañcidañca gaṇhathā’’ti sabbūpakaraṇāni gāhetvā vihāre uddhanāni kāretvā ekaṃ kāḷakaṃ kāsāvaṃ nivāsetvā tādisameva pārupitvā – ‘‘idaṃ karotha, idaṃ karothā’’ti sabbarattiṃ vicārento satasahassaṃ vissajjetvā bhojjayāguñca madhugoḷakañca paṭiyādāpesi. Bhojjayāgu nāma bhuñjitvā pātabbayāgu, tattha sappimadhuphāṇitamacchamaṃsapupphaphalarasādi yaṃ kiñci khādanīyaṃ nāma sabbaṃ pakkhipati kīḷitukāmānaṃ sīsamakkhanayoggā hoti sugandhagandhā.
这时,世尊清晨整理好身体,在比丘僧团的围绕下,朝阿菟摩城的方向出发去乞食。人们告诉他:“世尊正进村乞食,你这粥是为谁准备的?”他便穿着那身黑色袈裟,用一只手拿着长杓和短勺,像梵天神一样右膝跪在地上,顶礼之后说:“尊者,请世尊接受我的粥。”巴利
Atha bhagavā kālasseva sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto piṇḍāya carituṃ ātumanagarābhimukho pāyāsi. Manussā tassa ārocesuṃ – ‘‘bhagavā piṇḍāya gāmaṃ pavisati, tayā kassa yāgu paṭiyāditā’’ti. So yathānivatthapāruteheva tehi kāḷakakāsāvehi ekena hatthena dabbiñca kaṭacchuñca gahetvā brahmā viya dakkhiṇajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhapetvā vanditvā – ‘‘paṭiggaṇhātu me, bhante, bhagavā yāgu’’nti āha.
于是,世尊按照《犍度》中“如来虽已知,仍然发问”的记载方式,先问明情况、听了回答之后,呵责了那位老年出家人,并针对这件事制定了两条学处:一条是“不应接受”学处,一条是“携带剃刀器具”学处。接着,世尊说:“比丘们,你们在无数劫中,都只是在为寻求食物而虚度光阴。而这是你们以非法方式得来的、不应接受的食物。如果吃了它,将在无数千生中堕入恶道。放下它,不要拿。”说完,世尊便朝乞食的方向走去。连一位比丘也没有拿任何东西。巴利
Tato ‘‘jānantāpi tathāgatā pucchantī’’ti khandhake āgatanayena bhagavā pucchitvā ca sutvā ca taṃ vuḍḍhapabbajitaṃ vigarahitvā tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ akappiyasamādānasikkhāpadañca, khurabhaṇḍapariharaṇasikkhāpadañcāti dve sikkhāpadāni paññapetvā – ‘‘bhikkhave, anekakappakoṭiyo bhojanaṃ pariyesanteheva vītināmitā, idaṃ pana tumhākaṃ akappiyaṃ adhammena uppannaṃ bhojanaṃ, imaṃ paribhuttānaṃ anekāni attabhāvasahassāni apāyesveva nibbattissanti, apetha mā gaṇhathā’’ti bhikkhācārābhimukho agamāsi. Ekabhikkhunāpi na kiñci gahitaṃ.
苏跋达心里很不高兴,(心想:)这人到处游荡,自称“我什么都知道”。如果他不肯接受,就该派人去通知他。这种叫“熟食”的东西,就算放得再久,最多也只能存七天。这本来够我一辈子受用了,却全被他毁掉了,他这是对我怀有恶意。于是他对世尊心怀嗔恨,但十力尊还在世时,他什么也不敢说。据说他当时这样想:“这位是从高贵家族出家的大人物,我要是说什么,他一定会训斥我。”如今他听说“世尊已般涅槃”,像是松了一口气,满心欢喜,说出了这番话。巴利
Subhaddo anattamano hutvā ayaṃ ‘‘sabbaṃ jānāmī’’ti āhiṇḍati. Sace na gahitukāmo, pesetvā ārocetabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pakkāhāro nāma sabbaciraṃ tiṭṭhanto sattāhamattaṃ tiṭṭheyya. Idañhi mama yāvajīvaṃ pariyattaṃ assa. Sabbaṃ tena nāsitaṃ, ahitakāmo ayaṃ mayhanti bhagavati āghātaṃ bandhitvā dasabale dharante kiñci vattuṃ nāsakkhi. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ uccā kulā pabbajito mahāpuriso, sace kiñci vakkhāmi, maṃyeva santajjessatī’’ti. Svāyaṃ ajja ‘‘parinibbuto bhagavā’’ti sutvā laddhassāso viya haṭṭhatuṭṭho evamāha.
长老听了这话,感觉就像心脏被击中,又像干雷劈在头顶上,心里生起了对法的警醒:“世尊已经般涅槃七天了,他那金色的身体如今还在。世尊辛辛苦苦建立的教法里,竟然这么快就冒出了这么大的罪恶荆棘。这个恶人要是继续发展下去,再找到一些同类,就足以让教法衰败了。”于是长老心里想:巴利
Thero taṃ sutvā hadaye pahāradānaṃ viya matthake patitasukkhāsani viya maññi, dhammasaṃvego cassa uppajji – ‘‘sattāhamattaparinibbuto bhagavā, ajjāpissa suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ sarīraṃ dharatiyeva, dukkhena bhagavatā ārādhitasāsane nāma evaṃ lahu mahantaṃ pāpakasaṭaṃ kaṇṭako uppanno, alaṃ kho panesa pāpo vaḍḍhamāno aññepi evarūpe sahāye labhitvā sakkā sāsanaṃ osakkāpetu’’nti. Tato thero cintesi –
不过,如果我现在就让这位长老在这里穿上粗布衣、撒上灰,再把他赶出去,人们就会说:“沙门乔达摩的遗体还在,他的弟子们就已经吵起来了。”这样他们就会把过错推到我们头上。我还是先忍一忍吧。巴利
‘‘Sace kho panāhaṃ imaṃ mahallakaṃ idheva pilotikaṃ nivāsāpetvā chārikāya okirāpetvā nīharāpessāmi, manussā ‘samaṇassa gotamassa sarīre dharamāneyeva sāvakā vivadantī’ti amhākaṃ dosaṃ dassessanti adhivāsemi tāva.
世尊所宣说的法,就像一堆没有用线串起来的花。其中,就像被风吹散的花,随风四处飘落;同样,当这类恶人得势的时候,随着时间推移,律藏里会有一两条学处消失,经藏里会有一两个问分会消失,阿毗达摩里会有一两个地界会消失。这样逐渐地,根本一旦毁坏,我们就会变得像饿鬼一样。所以,我们要来结集法与律。这样一来,法与律就会像被线紧紧串起来的花一样,稳固不动。巴利
Bhagavatā hi desito dhammo asaṅgahitapuppharāsisadiso. Tattha yathā vātena pahaṭapupphāni yato vā tato vā gacchanti, evameva evarūpānaṃ pāpapuggalānaṃ vasena gacchante gacchante kāle vinaye ekaṃ dve sikkhāpadāni nassissanti, sutte eko dve pañhāvārā nassissanti, abhidhamme ekaṃ dve bhūmantarāni nassissanti, evaṃ anukkamena mūle naṭṭhe pisācasadisā bhavissāma; tasmā dhammavinayasaṅgahaṃ karissāma. Evañhi sati daḷhaṃ suttena saṅgahitāni pupphāni viya ayaṃ dhammavinayo niccalo bhavissati.
世尊正是为了这件事,亲自走了三俱卢舍的路来迎接我,用三次教诫为我授达上,从自己身上脱下袈裟与我交换,在空中挥手,开示以月亮为比喻的修行之道,并称我為“以身作证的人”而宣说,还三次把整个教法的继承权托付给我。只要像我这样的比丘还在世,就绝不能让这个恶人在教法中得到发展。只要非法尚未显露、法尚未被压制,非律尚未显露、律尚未被压制,说非法的人尚未得势、说法的人尚未变得弱势,说非律的人尚未得势、说律的人尚未变得弱势——我就要先把法和律结集起来。之后,比丘们各自依据自己的能力去讲说什么是可开许的、什么是不可开许的。到那时,这个恶人自然就会受到惩处,再也抬不起头来,而教法将会兴旺繁荣。巴利
Etadatthañhi bhagavā mayhaṃ tīṇi gāvutāni paccuggamanaṃ akāsi, tīhi ovādehi upasampadaṃ adāsi, kāyato apanetvā kāye cīvaraparivattanaṃ akāsi, ākāse pāṇiṃ cāletvā candūpamaṃ paṭipadaṃ kathento maṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā kathesi, tikkhattuṃ sakalasāsanadāyajjaṃ paṭicchāpesi. Mādise bhikkhumhi tiṭṭhamāne ayaṃ pāpo sāsane vuḍḍhiṃ mā alattha. Yāva adhammo na dippati, dhammo na paṭibāhiyati. Avinayo na dippati vinayo na paṭibāhiyati. Adhammavādino na balavanto honti, dhammavādino na dubbalā honti; avinayavādino na balavanto honti, vinayavādino na dubbalā honti. Tāva dhammañca vinayañca saṅgāyissāmi. Tato bhikkhū attano attano pahonakaṃ gahetvā kappiyākappiyaṃ kathessanti. Athāyaṃ pāpo sayameva niggahaṃ pāpuṇissati, puna sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkhissati, sāsanaṃ iddhañceva phītañca bhavissatī’’ti.
他这样想:“我心中生起了这样的念头。”他没有告诉任何人,就去安慰比丘僧团。因此经中说:“那时,具寿大迦叶……这种情况是不存在的。”巴利
So evaṃ nāma mayhaṃ cittaṃ uppannanti kassaci anārocetvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ samassāsesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo…pe… netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti.
233 柴堆是指两千肘高的栴檀香木柴堆。我们要点火,意思是我们要让火燃起来。他们没法点燃:就算八个人、十六个人、三十二个人,拿着成对成对的火把,用扇子扇,用风箱吹,用尽各种办法,也根本没法让火燃起来。天神的意图:这里说的那些天神,其实就是这位长老的侍从天神。原来有八万户人家,因为对八十位大弟子生起净信,做了他们的侍者,死后都生到了天界。其中有些天神,就是因为对这位长老生起净信才生到天界的。在那次集会中,这些天神没看到长老,就想:“我们的尊师长老在哪里呢?”看到长老正在路上赶来,他们就发愿:“在我们的尊师长老还没顶礼之前,愿这柴堆不要烧起来。”巴利
233.Citakanti vīsaratanasatikaṃ candanacitakaṃ. Āḷimpessāmāti aggiṃ gāhāpessāma. Na sakkonti āḷimpetunti aṭṭhapi soḷasapi dvattiṃsapi janā jālanatthāya yamakayamakaukkāyo gahetvā tālavaṇṭehi bījantā bhastāhi dhamantā tāni tāni kāraṇāni karontāpi na sakkontiyeva aggiṃ gāhāpetuṃ. Devatānaṃ adhippāyoti ettha tā kira devatā therassa upaṭṭhākadevatāva. Asītimahāsāvakesu hi cittāni pasādetvā tesaṃ upaṭṭhākāni asītikulasahassāni sagge nibbattāni. Tattha there cittaṃ pasādetvā sagge nibbattā devatā tasmiṃ samāgame theraṃ adisvā – ‘‘kuhiṃ nu kho amhākaṃ kulūpakatthero’’ti antarāmagge paṭipannaṃ disvā ‘‘amhākaṃ kulūpakattherena avandite citako mā pajjalitthā’’ti adhiṭṭhahiṃsu.
人们听了这话,纷纷说:“听说有位叫大迦叶的比丘,正带着五百位比丘一起来,要礼敬十力者的双足。据说他还没到,柴堆就不会燃烧。那位比丘长什么样?是黑是白?是高是矮?有这样一位比丘还在,十力者的般涅槃怎么能算般涅槃呢?”于是,有些人手里拿着香、花等物,上路去迎接;有些人把街道装饰得五彩缤纷,站在那里望着他来的路。巴利
Manussā taṃ sutvā – ‘‘mahākassapo kira nāma bho bhikkhu pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ ‘dasabalassa pāde vandissāmī’ti āgacchati. Tasmiṃ kira anāgate citako na pajjalissati. Kīdiso bho so bhikkhu kāḷo odāto dīgho rasso, evarūpe nāma bho bhikkhumhi ṭhite kiṃ dasabalassa parinibbānaṃ nāmā’’ti keci gandhamālādihatthā paṭipathaṃ gacchiṃsu. Keci vīthiyo vicittā katvā āgamanamaggaṃ olokayamānā aṭṭhaṃsu.
234 这时,具寿大迦叶朝着拘尸那罗的方向……以头顶礼。据说,长老右绕火葬堆后,一边观察一边辨认:“这里是头,这里是脚。”然后他站在靠近脚的位置,进入作为神通基础的第四禅,出定后发愿:“愿十力者那双以千辐轮相庄严的脚,连同五百对棉布衣,把金棺和栴檀火葬堆分作两半,安立在我的头顶上。”随着发愿的心念,那五百对棉布衣裂成两半,双脚像云层间的满月一样显现出来。长老伸出双手,如同盛开的红莲花,紧紧握住世尊金色的双脚直到脚踝,安放在自己尊贵的头顶上。因此经文说:“以头顶礼世尊双足。”巴利
234.Atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo yena kusinārā…pe… sirasā vandīti thero kira citakaṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā āvajjantova sallakkhesi – ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīsaṃ, imasmiṃ ṭhāne pādā’’ti. Tato pādānaṃ samīpe ṭhatvā abhiññāpādakaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya – ‘‘arāsahassapaṭimaṇḍitacakkalakkhaṇapatiṭṭhitā dasabalassa pādā saddhiṃ kappāsapaṭalehi pañca dussayugasatāni suvaṇṇadoṇiṃ candanacitakañca dvedhā katvā mayhaṃ uttamaṅge sirasmiṃ patiṭṭhahantū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Saha adhiṭṭhānacittena tāni pañca dussayugasatāni dvedhā katvā valāhakantarā puṇṇacando viya pādā nikkhamiṃsu. Thero vikasitarattapadumasadise hatthe pasāretvā suvaṇṇavaṇṇe satthupāde yāva gopphakā daḷhaṃ gahetvā attano siravare patiṭṭhapesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhagavato pāde sirasā vandī’’ti.
大众看到这稀有的景象,顿时齐声发出巨大的吼声,用香花等物供养后,就随各自的意愿礼拜。长老、大众和那五百位比丘这样礼敬之后,不需要再另外发愿。凭着原本的愿力,世尊的双足就从长老手中松开,丝毫没有碰动栴檀木等任何东西,回到原来的位置安住,就那样停在原位。因为世尊的双足不论是伸出还是收回,棉絮也好、灯芯也好、油滴也好、木块也好,从来不会从原位移动,一切都停在原处。可是,当如来的双足像月亮落下、太阳沉没那样消失之后,大众放声大哭。那种悲恸,比世尊刚般涅槃时还要更深。巴利
Mahājano taṃ acchariyaṃ disvā ekappahāreneva mahānādaṃ nadi, gandhamālādīhi pūjetvā yathāruci vandi. Evaṃ pana therena ca mahājanena ca tehi ca pañcahi bhikkhusatehi vanditamatte puna adhiṭṭhānakiccaṃ natthi. Pakatiadhiṭṭhānavaseneva therassa hatthato muccitvā alattakavaṇṇāni bhagavato pādatalāni candanadāruādīsu kiñci acāletvāva yathāṭhāne patiṭṭhahiṃsu, yathāṭhāne ṭhitāneva ahesuṃ. Bhagavato hi pādesu nikkhamantesu vā pavisantesu vā kappāsaaṃsu vā dasikatantaṃ vā telabindu vā dārukkhandhaṃ vā ṭhānā calitaṃ nāma nāhosi. Sabbaṃ yathāṭhāne ṭhitameva ahosi. Uṭṭhahitvā pana atthaṅgate cande viya sūriye viya ca tathāgatassa pādesu antarahitesu mahājano mahākanditaṃ kandi. Parinibbānakālato adhikataraṃ kāruññaṃ ahosi.
“世尊的柴堆自己燃烧起来”这句话,是因为没看到任何人试着去点火才这么说的。其实,那是靠天神的威力,柴堆一下子就从四面八方全都烧起来了。巴利
Sayamevabhagavato citako pajjalīti idaṃ pana kassaci pajjalāpetuṃ vāyamantassa adassanavasena vuttaṃ. Devatānubhāvena panesa samantato ekappahāreneva pajjali.
235 只剩下了身体本身。以前因为身体还是一整块,所以叫“身”;现在因为已经分散开来,所以经文说“身体们”。意思是说,像茉莉花苞、像洗净的珍珠、像黄金一样的舍利留了下来。长寿佛的遗体本来只有一整块,像一束黄金。可是世尊决意把舍利分散开来,他想:“我不会再住世很久,就要入涅槃了,而我的教法还没有在各地广泛传播。所以,即使我入了涅槃,如果大众能各自拿到我芥子那么大的舍利,在各自住的地方建塔供养,也能因此成为天界的助伴。”哪些舍利分散了,哪些没有分散呢?四颗牙齿、两根锁骨和顶髻骨,这七处舍利没有分散,其余的分散了。其中,所有细小的舍利只有芥子那么大,大的像破开的米粒那么大,最大的像破开的绿豆那么大。巴利
235.Sarīrāneva avasissiṃsūti pubbe ekagghanena ṭhitattā sarīraṃ nāma ahosi. Idāni vippakiṇṇattā sarīrānīti vuttaṃ sumanamakuḷasadisā ca dhotamuttasadisā ca suvaṇṇasadisā ca dhātuyo avasissiṃsūti attho. Dīghāyukabuddhānañhi sarīraṃ suvaṇṇakkhandhasadisaṃ ekameva hoti. Bhagavā pana – ‘‘ahaṃ na ciraṃ ṭhatvā parinibbāyāmi, mayhaṃ sāsanaṃ tāva sabbattha na vitthāritaṃ, tasmā parinibbutassāpi me sāsapamattampi dhātuṃ gahetvā attano attano vasanaṭṭhāne cetiyaṃ katvā paricaranto mahājano saggaparāyaṇo hotū’’ti dhātūnaṃ vikiraṇaṃ adhiṭṭhāsi. Kati, panassa dhātuyo vippakiṇṇā, kati na vippakiṇṇāti. Catasso dāṭhā, dve akkhakā, uṇhīsanti imā satta dhātuyo na vippakiriṃsu, sesā vippakiriṃsūti. Tattha sabbakhuddakā dhātu sāsapabījamattā ahosi, mahādhātu majjhe bhinnataṇḍulamattā, atimahatī majjhe bhinnamuggamattāti.
水流:有前臂那么高、小腿那么高、棕榈树干那么高的水流,从空中落下来,把火浇灭了。水厅:这是指那些环绕而立的娑罗树,因为从这些树的树干之间和枝叶之间也有水流涌出,把火浇灭了。世尊的荼毗堆非常巨大。水柱从四周冲破地面涌出,有犁头那么大,形状像琉璃环饰,直直地升向荼毗堆,把它包住。以香汤:指用金罐和银罐装满各种香汤运来。浇灭:就是用金制和银制的八柄洒水勺把香汤泼散开,浇灭了栴檀堆。巴利
Udakadhārāti aggabāhumattāpi jaṅghamattāpi tālakkhandhamattāpi udakadhārā ākāsato patitvā nibbāpesi. Udakasālatoti parivāretvā ṭhitasālarukkhe sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ, tesampi hi khandhantaraviṭapantarehi udakadhārā nikkhamitvā nibbāpesuṃ. Bhagavato citako mahanto. Samantā pathaviṃ bhinditvāpi naṅgalasīsamattā udakavaṭṭi phalikavaṭaṃsakasadisā uggantvā citakameva gaṇhanti. Gandhodakenāti suvaṇṇaghaṭe rajataghaṭe ca pūretvā ābhatanānāgandhodakena. Nibbāpesunti suvaṇṇamayarajatamayehi aṭṭhadaṇḍakehi vikiritvā candanacitakaṃ nibbāpesuṃ.
在这里,当火葬堆燃烧时,那些围立在周围的娑罗树,从枝干之间、树杈之间、树叶之间都冒出火焰,但没有一片叶子、一根枝条、一朵花被烧毁,连蚂蚁和蜘蛛都在火焰之间穿行。无论是从空中降下的水流、从娑罗树流出的水流,还是从裂开的地面涌出的水流,都像法谈中所说的那样。这样把火葬堆熄灭之后,末罗族的国王们在集会堂里涂上四种香料的涂层,撒下以米花为第五种的散花,在上方系起布幔,用金星星等装饰,在那里垂下香鬘、花鬘和宝鬘。从集会堂一直到叫做“顶髻系缚”的头饰吉祥堂,两侧都围起麻布帘屏障,上方也系起布幔,用金星星等装饰,那里也同样垂下香鬘、花鬘和宝鬘。他们竖起像摩尼宝珠一样颜色的竹竿和五色幢幡,四周挂上随风飘动的布旗。在打扫干净的街道上,安放芭蕉树和满水瓮,点亮灯柱。然后把盛有舍利的金槽放在装饰好的象背上,用花鬘、香料等供养,一边举行礼敬庆典一边迎入内城,安置在集会堂里的獐子脚床上,上方撑起白色伞盖。这样做了之后,应当知道:“那时,拘尸那罗的末罗族人把世尊的遗骨放在集会堂里,七天之中用矛结成围网。”巴利
Ettha ca citake jhāyamāne parivāretvā ṭhitasālarukkhānaṃ sākhantarehi viṭapantarehi pattantarehi jālā uggacchanti, pattaṃ vā sākhā vā pupphaṃ vā daḍḍhā nāma natthi, kipillikāpi makkaṭakāpi jālānaṃ antareneva vicaranti . Ākāsato patitaudakadhārāsupi sālarukkhehi nikkhantaudakadhārāsupi pathaviṃ bhinditvā nikkhantaudakadhārāsupi dhammakathāva pamāṇaṃ. Evaṃ citakaṃ nibbāpetvā pana mallarājāno santhāgāre catujjātiyagandhaparibhaṇḍaṃ kāretvā lājapañcamāni pupphāni vikiritvā upari celavitānaṃ bandhitvā suvaṇṇatārakādīhi khacitvā tattha gandhadāmamālādāmaratanadāmāni olambetvā santhāgārato yāva makuṭabandhanasaṅkhātā sīsapasādhanamaṅgalasālā, tāva ubhohi passehi sāṇikilañjaparikkhepaṃ kāretvā upari celavitānaṃ bandhāpetvā suvaṇṇatārakādīhi khacitvā tatthapi gandhadāmamālādāmaratanadāmāni olambetvā maṇidaṇḍavaṇṇehi veṇūhi ca pañcavaṇṇaddhaje ussāpetvā samantā vātapaṭākā parikkhipitvā susammaṭṭhāsu vīthīsu kadaliyo ca puṇṇaghaṭe ca ṭhapetvā daṇḍakadīpikā jāletvā alaṅkatahatthikkhandhe saha dhātūhi suvaṇṇadoṇiṃ ṭhapetvā mālāgandhādīhi pūjentā sādhukīḷitaṃ kīḷantā antonagaraṃ pavesetvā santhāgāre sarabhamayapallaṅke ṭhapetvā upari setacchattaṃ dhāresuṃ. Evaṃ katvā – ‘‘atha kho kosinārakā mallā bhagavato sarīrāni sattāhaṃ santhāgāre sattipañjaraṃ karitvā’’ti sabbaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在那里,他们让手持长矛的士兵围成一圈来守卫,这就是“设矛网作护卫”。所谓“弓墙”,是说:先让大象额顶抵着额顶,围成一圈;然后让战马颈靠着颈,围在后面;再让战车轭端抵着轭端,围在后面;再让战士手臂挽着手臂,围在后面。在他们外围,又让弓梢抵着弓梢,围成一圈。就这样,在周围方圆一由旬的地方,连续七天,像给整个地方套上一层铠甲罩子一样,布置好了严密的守卫。针对这件事,才说“令设弓墙作护卫”。巴利
Tattha sattipañjaraṃ karitvāti sattihatthehi purisehi parikkhipāpetvā. Dhanupākāranti paṭhamaṃ tāva hatthikumbhena kumbhaṃ paharante parikkhipāpesuṃ, tato asse gīvāya gīvaṃ paharante, tato rathe āṇikoṭiyā āṇikoṭiṃ paharante, tato yodhe bāhunā bāhuṃ paharante. Tesaṃ pariyante koṭiyā koṭiṃ paharamānāni dhanūni parikkhipāpesuṃ. Iti samantā yojanappamāṇaṃ ṭhānaṃ sattāhaṃ sannāhagavacchikaṃ viya katvā ārakkhaṃ saṃvidahiṃsu. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘dhanupākāraṃ parikkhipāpetvā’’ti.
他们为什么这样做呢?因为在此前的两个七日里,他们忙着为比丘僧团安排住处和座位、筹办嚼食和啖食,没有机会举行庆典。于是他们想:“这个七日我们要好好庆祝一番。不过,也有可能有人知道我们处于放逸状态,跑来拿走舍利。所以我们还是先设好守卫,再庆祝。”他们就这样做了。巴利
Kasmā panete evamakaṃsūti? Ito purimesu hi dvīsu sattāhesu te bhikkhusaṅghassa ṭhānanisajjokāsaṃ karontā khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ saṃvidahantā sādhukīḷikāya okāsaṃ na labhiṃsu. Tato nesaṃ ahosi – ‘‘imaṃ sattāhaṃ sādhukīḷitaṃ kīḷissāma, ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjati yaṃ amhākaṃ pamattabhāvaṃ ñatvā kocideva āgantvā dhātuyo gaṇheyya, tasmā ārakkhaṃ ṭhapetvā kīḷissāmā’’ti. Te tathā evamakaṃsu.
遗骨舍利分配的注释巴利
Sarīradhātuvibhajanavaṇṇanā
236 阿阇世王是怎么听说的呢?据说,大臣们一听到消息就商量起来:“被称为导师的世尊已经般涅槃了,没办法再把他请回来。说到凡夫式的信心,没有人比得上我们的大王。要是让他就这样直接听到这个消息,他的心一定会碎掉。可是大王得由我们来保护啊。”于是他们拿来三只金盆,装满四种蜜,走到国王面前,说道:“大王,我们做了一个梦。为了消除这个梦的凶兆,您应该穿上双层细麻布衣,只露出鼻孔那么大的地方,然后躺进装满四蜜的盆里才行。”国王听了这些忠心大臣的话,答应道:“好,就这样办,诸位父辈。”便照做了。巴利
236.Assosikho rājāti kathaṃ assosi? Paṭhamameva kirassa amaccā sutvā cintayiṃsu – ‘‘satthā nāma parinibbuto, na so sakkā puna āharituṃ. Pothujjanikasaddhāya pana amhākaṃ raññā sadiso natthi, sace esa imināva niyāmena suṇissati, hadayamassa phalissati. Rājā kho pana amhehi anurakkhitabbo’’ti te tisso suvaṇṇadoṇiyo āharitvā catumadhurassa pūretvā rañño santikaṃ gantvā etadavocuṃ – ‘‘deva , amhehi supinako diṭṭho, tassa paṭighātatthaṃ tumhehi dukūladupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvā yathā nāsāpuṭamattaṃ paññāyati, evaṃ catumadhuradoṇiyā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Rājā atthacarānaṃ amaccānaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘evaṃ hotu tātā’’ti sampaṭicchitvā tathā akāsi.
这时,一位大臣摘下身上的饰物,把头发披散开来,朝着导师般涅槃的方向,合掌对国王说:“大王,没有哪个众生能逃脱死亡。我们的世尊、导师,能增长我们的寿命,是值得建塔的地方,是福德之田,曾以灌顶水为我们洒净,如今已在拘尸那罗般涅槃了。”国王一听就昏了过去,倒在四蜜盆里,盆中冒起热气。于是众人把他抬起来,放进第二个盆里。他恢复知觉后问:“诸位父辈,你们说什么?”——“大王,导师般涅槃了。”国王又昏了过去,倒在四蜜盆里,盆中冒起热气。众人又把他从那里抬起来,放进第三个盆里。他再次恢复知觉后问:“诸位父辈,你们说什么?”——“大王,导师般涅槃了。”国王又一次昏了过去。于是众人把他抬出来,为他沐浴,用水罐从头顶浇下水去。巴利
Atheko amacco alaṅkāraṃ omuñcitvā kese pakiriya yāya disāya satthā parinibbuto, tadabhimukho hutvā añjaliṃ paggayha rājānaṃ āha – ‘‘deva, maraṇato muccanakasatto nāma natthi, amhākaṃ āyuvaḍḍhano cetiyaṭṭhānaṃ puññakkhettaṃ abhisekasiñcako so bhagavā satthā kusinārāya parinibbuto’’ti. Rājā sutvāva visaññījāto catumadhuradoṇiyaṃ usumaṃ muñci. Atha naṃ ukkhipitvā dutiyāya doṇiyā nipajjāpesuṃ. So puna saññaṃ labhitvā – ‘‘tātā, kiṃ vadethā’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Satthā, mahārāja, parinibbuto’’ti. Rājā punapi visaññījāto catumadhuradoṇiyā usumaṃ muñci. Atha naṃ tatopi ukkhipitvā tatiyāya doṇiyā nipajjāpesuṃ. So puna saññaṃ labhitvā ‘‘tātā, kiṃ vadethā’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Satthā, mahārāja, parinibbuto’’ti. Rājā punapi visaññījāto, atha naṃ ukkhipitvā nahāpetvā matthake ghaṭehi udakaṃ āsiñciṃsu.
国王恢复知觉后,从座位上起身,把被香料熏染过、色泽如摩尼宝珠的头发散开,披在宛如金板的背上,用手掌捶打胸膛,又用像珊瑚新芽般红润、形状美好的手指,仿佛要把那如金色频婆果般的胸膛缝合起来一般,一边悲号,一边以疯人的模样走上街道。他被盛装打扮的舞者簇拥着,从城中出来,到了吉瓦咖芒果园,望着世尊曾经坐着说法的那个地方,一再悲叹:“世尊是一切知者,您不是曾坐在这里说法,为我拔除忧箭吗?您拔除了我的忧箭,我皈依了您,可现在您连一句话都不回应我,世尊!”他又说:“世尊,我从前听说,在那样的时候,您由大比丘僧团随行,在赡部洲游行教化。可现在我却听到与您不相称、不合情理的消息。”说了诸如此类的话,又以六十来首偈颂忆念世尊的功德,然后心想:“光靠我悲叹是成不了事的,我要把十力者的舍利迎请回来。”他这样听闻后,在昏乱等事平息之后,便派出了使者。针对这件事,经文才说“那时,国王……”等等。巴利
Rājā saññaṃ labhitvā āsanā vuṭṭhāya gandhaparibhāvite maṇivaṇṇe kese vikiritvā suvaṇṇaphalakavaṇṇāya piṭṭhiyaṃ pakiritvā pāṇinā uraṃ paharitvā pavāḷaṅkuravaṇṇāhi suvaṭṭitaṅgulīhi suvaṇṇabimbisakavaṇṇaṃ uraṃ sibbanto viya gahetvā paridevamāno ummattakavesena antaravīthiṃ otiṇṇo, so alaṅkatanāṭakaparivuto nagarato nikkhamma jīvakambavanaṃ gantvā yasmiṃ ṭhāne nisinnena bhagavatā dhammo desito taṃ oloketvā – ‘‘bhagavā sabbaññu, nanu imasmiṃ ṭhāne nisīditvā dhammaṃ desayittha, sokasallaṃ me vinodayittha, tumhe mayhaṃ sokasallaṃ nīharittha, ahaṃ tumhākaṃ saraṇaṃ gato, idāni pana me paṭivacanampi na detha, bhagavā’’ti punappunaṃ paridevitvā ‘‘nanu bhagavā ahaṃ aññadā evarūpe kāle ‘tumhe mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivārā jambudīpatale cārikaṃ carathā’ti suṇomi, idāni panāhaṃ tumhākaṃ ananurūpaṃ ayuttaṃ pavattiṃ suṇomī’’ti evamādīni ca vatvā saṭṭhimattāhi gāthāhi bhagavato guṇaṃ anussaritvā cintesi – ‘‘mama parideviteneva na sijjhati, dasabalassa dhātuyo āharāpessāmī’’ti evaṃ assosi. Sutvā ca imissā visaññibhāvādipavattiyā avasāne dūtaṃ pāhesi. Taṃ sandhāya atha kho rājātiādi vuttaṃ.
这里,“派遣使者”的意思是:既派了使者,也送了书信。派出去之后,他又这样说:“如果他们肯给,那当然好;如果不肯给,我就用手段夺过来。”于是他集结了象兵、马兵、车兵、步兵四支军队,自己也亲自率军出发了。就像阿阇世王一样,离车人等其他国王也都先派了使者,随后亲自率领四支军队出发。其中,波婆人住的地方离拘尸那罗比别的城都近,中间只隔三俱卢舍。世尊也是先进入波婆城,然后才到拘尸那罗。那为什么他们没有更早到呢?因为这些国王随从众多,光是组织庞大的随行队伍就耽误了,所以落在后面。巴利
Tattha dūtaṃ pāhesīti dūtañca paṇṇañca pesesi. Pesetvā ca pana – ‘‘sace dassanti, sundaraṃ. No ce dassanti, āharaṇupāyena āharissāmī’’ti caturaṅginiṃ senaṃ sannayhitvā sayampi nikkhantoyeva. Yathā ca ajātasattu, evaṃ licchavīādayopi dūtaṃ pesetvā sayampi caturaṅginiyā senāya nikkhamiṃsuyeva. Tattha pāveyyakā sabbehi āsannatarā kusinārato tigāvutantare nagare vasanti, bhagavāpi pāvaṃ pavisitvāva kusināraṃ gato. Atha kasmā paṭhamataraṃ na āgatāti ce? Mahāparivārā panete rājāno mahāparivāraṃ karontāva pacchato jātā.
那些住在七座城里的人全都赶来,把拘尸那罗城团团围住,说:“要么分给我们舍利,要么就开战。”拘尸那罗人回答说:“这位世尊是在我们的村界内。”据说他们是这样说的:“我们并没有派使者去请导师,也没有亲自去迎请。导师是自己来的,先送来了教诫,然后把我们召来的。再说,你们在自己的村界里得到的宝物,难道会分给我们吗?在包括天神的世间里,没有什么宝物能比得上佛宝。我们得到了这样无上的宝物,绝不会让出去。难道只有你们喝过母乳吗?我们也喝过母乳。难道只有你们是男子汉吗?我们也同样是男子汉。”他们就这样彼此起了我慢,互相传递教诫和反驳,发出傲慢的吼声。不过,如果真的打起来,获胜的必定是拘尸那罗人。为什么呢?因为前来礼敬舍利的诸天神都站在他们这一边。但在巴利经典里,只说到:“世尊是在我们的村界内般涅槃的,我们不会给出世尊舍利的一份。”巴利
Te saṅghe gaṇe etadavocunti sabbepi te sattanagaravāsino āgantvā – ‘‘amhākaṃ dhātuyo vā dentu, yuddhaṃ vā’’ti kusinārānagaraṃ parivāretvā ṭhite – ‘‘etaṃ bhagavā amhākaṃ gāmakkhette’’ti paṭivacanaṃ avocuṃ. Te kira evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘na mayaṃ satthu sāsanaṃ pahiṇimha, nāpi gantvā ānayimha. Satthā pana sayameva āgantvā sāsanaṃ pesetvā amhe pakkosāpesi. Tumhepi kho pana yaṃ tumhākaṃ gāmakkhette ratanaṃ uppajjati, na taṃ amhākaṃ detha. Sadevake ca loke buddharatanasamaṃ ratanaṃ nāma natthi, evarūpaṃ uttamaratanaṃ labhitvā mayaṃ na dassāma. Na kho pana tumhehiyeva mātuthanato khīraṃ pītaṃ, amhehipi mātuthanato khīraṃ pītaṃ. Na tumheyeva purisā, amhepi purisā hotū’’ti aññamaññaṃ ahaṃkāraṃ katvā sāsanapaṭisāsanaṃ pesenti, aññamaññaṃ mānagajjitaṃ gajjanti. Yuddhe pana sati kosinārakānaṃyeva jayo abhavissa. Kasmā? Yasmā dhātupāsanatthaṃ āgatā devatā nesaṃ pakkhā ahesuṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ pana – ‘‘bhagavā amhākaṃ gāmakkhette parinibbuto, na mayaṃ dassāma bhagavato sarīrānaṃ bhāga’’nti ettakameva āgataṃ.
237 众人这样说时,多纳婆罗门听到他们这场争吵,心想:“这些国王在世尊般涅槃的地方争吵,这实在不合适。这场争吵该停下了,我要把它平息。”于是他就走过去,对那群僧众和大众说了这样的话。他说了什么呢?他站在高处,说了一段名为“多纳吼声”的话,篇幅有两个诵分那么长。其中,在第一个诵分里,众人连一句都听不懂。到第二个诵分结束时,大家纷纷说“这声音就像老师的声音!这声音就像老师的声音!”,全都安静了下来。据说,在赡部洲大地上,良家出身的人,没有几个不是他的弟子。那时,他知道众人听了自己的话后已经默然安静,便又开口说道:“请诸位听好。”接着说了这两首偈颂。巴利
237.Evaṃ vutte doṇo brāhmaṇoti doṇabrāhmaṇo imaṃ tesaṃ vivādaṃ sutvā – ‘‘ete rājāno bhagavato parinibbutaṭṭhāne vivādaṃ karonti, na kho panetaṃ patirūpaṃ, alaṃ iminā kalahena, vūpasamessāmi na’’nti so gantvā te saṅghe gaṇe etadavoca. Kimavoca? Unnatappadese ṭhatvā dvibhāṇavāraparimāṇaṃ doṇagajjitaṃ nāma avoca. Tattha paṭhamabhāṇavāre tāva ekapadampi te na jāniṃsu. Dutiyabhāṇavārapariyosāne – ‘‘ācariyassa viya bho saddo, ācariyassa viya bho saddo’’ti sabbe niravā ahesuṃ. Jambudīpatale kira kulaghare jātā yebhuyyena tassa na antevāsiko nāma natthi. Atha so te attano vacanaṃ sutvā nirave tuṇhībhūte viditvā puna etadavoca – ‘‘suṇantu bhonto’’ti etaṃ gāthādvayaṃ avoca.
在这里,“我们的佛陀”就是指我们的佛陀。“他过去是忍辱的宣说者”:意思是说,他在还没有达到佛地、还在圆满诸巴拉密的时候,不论是在做忍辱苦行者的时期、做护法王子的时期、做六牙象王的时期、做富利达多龙王的时期、做瞻波耶龙王的时期、做商波罗龙王的时期、做大猿猴的时期,还是在其他许多本生故事里,他对别人都不生嗔怒,只是修忍辱,只是赞叹忍辱。更何况现在,他已经达到了在可意和不可意境界中都如如不动的境界,所以我们的佛陀在一切方面都是宣说忍辱的人,是这样一位佛陀。对这样一位最上的人,去争夺他的身体的一部分,确实是不好的。“身体的一部分”是指为了分割身体,也就是以分配舍利为理由。“去争夺”是指用武器争斗,这句话的意思是:那确实是不应该发生的。巴利
Tattha amhākaṃ buddhoti amhākaṃ buddho. Ahu khantivādoti buddhabhūmiṃ appatvāpi pāramiyo pūrento khantivāditāpasakāle dhammapālakumārakāle chaddantahatthikāle bhūridattanāgarājakāle campeyyanāgarājakāle saṅkhapālanāgarājakāle mahākapikāle aññesu ca bahūsu jātakesu paresu kopaṃ akatvā khantimeva akāsi. Khantimeva vaṇṇayi. Kimaṅgaṃ pana etarahi iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu tādilakkhaṇaṃ patto, sabbathāpi amhākaṃ buddho khantivādo ahosi, tassa evaṃvidhassa. Na hi sādhu yaṃ uttamapuggalassa, sarīrabhāge siyā sampahāroti na hi sādhuyanti na hi sādhu ayaṃ. Sarīrabhāgeti sarīravibhāganimittaṃ, dhātukoṭṭhāsahetūti attho. Siyā sampahāroti āvudhasampahāro sādhu na siyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
诸位尊者,你们全都和合一致吧,不要分裂。要同心和合:身体和言语都聚在一起、说同样的话,和合共住。要彼此欢喜:内心也要互相欢喜和乐。我们来把世尊的舍利分成八份。具足五眼的佛陀,不只是你们对他有信心,广大民众也都信仰他。在他们当中,没有哪一个人是不该得到一份舍利的。他这样讲了许多道理,说服了他们。巴利
Sabbeva bhonto sahitāti sabbeva bhonto sahitā hotha, mā bhijjatha. Samaggāti kāyena ca vācāya ca ekasannipātā ekavacanā samaggā hotha. Sammodamānāti cittenāpi aññamaññaṃ sammodamānā hotha. Karomaṭṭhabhāgeti bhagavato sarīrāni aṭṭha bhāge karoma . Cakkhumatoti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumato buddhassa. Na kevalaṃ tumheyeva, bahujanopi pasanno, tesu ekopi laddhuṃ ayutto nāma natthīti bahuṃ kāraṇaṃ vatvā saññāpesi.
238 所谓“答应了那些僧团和集会之后”,也就是“答应了从各处各地聚集而来的那些僧团和集会之后”。把世尊的舍利平均分成八份、妥善分配妥当,这里的过程是这样的——据说,多纳答应了他们之后,就让人打开了金桶。国王们走上前来,站在桶边,看见那些金色的舍利,悲叹道:“世尊啊,一切知者啊!以前我们亲眼见过您那具足三十二大人相、交织着六色佛光、闪耀着八十种随形好、无比庄严的金色身相,如今却只剩下这些金色的舍利了。世尊,这实在不该是您留下的样子啊!”巴利
238.Tesaṃ saṅghānaṃ gaṇānaṃ paṭissutvāti tesaṃ tesaṃ tato tato samāgatasaṅghānaṃ samāgatagaṇānaṃ paṭissuṇitvā. Bhagavatosarīrāni aṭṭhadhā samaṃ suvibhattaṃ vibhajitvāti ettha ayamanukkamo – doṇo kira tesaṃ paṭissuṇitvā suvaṇṇadoṇiṃ vivarāpesi. Rājāno āgantvā doṇiyaṃyeva ṭhitā suvaṇṇavaṇṇā dhātuyo disvā – ‘‘bhagavā sabbaññu pubbe mayaṃ tumhākaṃ dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ chabbaṇṇabuddharasmikhacitaṃ asītianubyañjanasamujjalitasobhaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ sarīraṃ addasāma, idāni pana suvaṇṇavaṇṇāva dhātuyo avasiṭṭhā jātā, na yuttamidaṃ bhagavā tumhāka’’nti parideviṃsu.
婆罗门那时看出他们已松懈疏忽,就取下右边那颗牙,藏进头巾的夹层里,然后才把舍利平均分成八份,分得妥妥当当。所有舍利用寻常的量器来量,一共是十六那利,每座城市的居民各得两那利。婆罗门正在分舍利的时候,帝释天神——诸天神之主——正在观察:是谁为了断除包括诸天神在内的世间的疑惑、作为宣说四谛的因缘,把世尊的右牙取走了?他一看,发现是被婆罗门取走了,心想:婆罗门也没能力对这颗牙作相应的供养,不如我来取走。于是他从头巾夹层里把牙取出来,放进金匣,带到天界,安奉在顶髻宝珠塔中。巴利
Brāhmaṇopi tasmiṃ samaye tesaṃ pamattabhāvaṃ ñatvā dakkhiṇadāṭhaṃ gahetvā veṭhantare ṭhapesi, atha pacchā aṭṭhadhā samaṃ suvibhattaṃ vibhaji, sabbāpi dhātuyo pākatikanāḷiyā soḷasa nāḷiyo ahesuṃ, ekekanagaravāsino dve dve nāḷiyo labhiṃsu. Brāhmaṇassa pana dhātuyo vibhajantasseva sakko devānamindo – ‘‘kena nu kho sadevakassa lokassa kaṅkhacchedanatthāya catusaccakathāya paccayabhūtā bhagavato dakkhiṇadāṭhā gahitā’’ti olokento ‘‘brāhmaṇena gahitā’’ti disvā – ‘‘brāhmaṇopi dāṭhāya anucchavikaṃ sakkāraṃ kātuṃ na sakkhissati, gaṇhāmi na’’nti veṭhantarato gahetvā suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭake ṭhapetvā devalokaṃ netvā cūḷāmaṇicetiye patiṭṭhapesi.
婆罗门分完舍利后,发现不见牙骨。因为牙骨是他偷拿的,他不敢问“谁拿了我的牙骨”。他预见到若说“也分我一份”,自己会被指责:“分明是你自己分的舍利,你怎么一开始就不知道自己也有份?”于是他又想:“这个金罐也如同舍利,既然如来舍利是用它来量的,我就为它建一座塔吧。”便说道:“尊敬的诸位,请把这个罐子给我吧。”巴利
Brāhmaṇopi dhātuyo vibhajitvā dāṭhaṃ apassanto corikāya gahitattā – ‘‘kena me dāṭhā gahitā’’ti pucchitumpi nāsakkhi. ‘‘Nanu tayāva dhātuyo bhājitā, kiṃ tvaṃ paṭhamaṃyeva attano dhātuyā atthibhāvaṃ na aññāsī’’ti attani dosāropanaṃ sampassanto – ‘‘mayhampi koṭṭhāsaṃ dethā’’ti vattumpi nāsakkhi. Tato – ‘‘ayampi suvaṇṇatumbo dhātugatikova, yena tathāgatassa dhātuyo mitā, imassāhaṃ thūpaṃ karissāmī’’ti cintetvā imaṃ me bhonto tumbaṃ dadantūti āha.
毕波利瓦那的莫利耶族人也都像阿阇世王等人那样,先派出使者,然后整装待发,随即出发了。巴利
Pippalivaniyāmoriyāpi ajātasattuādayo viya dūtaṃ pesetvā yuddhasajjāva nikkhamiṃsu.
舍利塔供养的注释巴利
Dhātuthūpapūjāvaṇṇanā
239 在王舍城,他为世尊的舍利建塔并举行了盛大的供养。那是怎么做的呢?从拘尸那罗到王舍城有二十五由旬。他命人在这一段路上修了一条宽八乌沙巴的平坦大道,然后像末罗王们在摩角束堂和集会堂之间举行供养那样,在这二十五由旬的路上也一路举行供养。为了让世人不起厌烦之心,他到处搭起帐篷,把放在金棺里的舍利用矛做的栅栏围起来,并召集了自己统治范围内方圆五百由旬的人。众人捧着舍利,从拘尸那罗出发,一路玩着“善戏”前行,凡是见到金色花朵的地方,就把舍利安放在矛栏中间作供养。等那些花用完了就继续走,当车队的前部到达后部原先所在的位置时,他们又连续七天玩“善戏”。就这样捧着舍利一路走来,前后经过了七年七个月零七天。巴利
239.Rājagahe bhagavato sarīrānaṃ thūpañca mahañca akāsīti kathaṃ akāsi? Kusinārato yāva rājagahaṃ pañcavīsati yojanāni, etthantare aṭṭhausabhavitthataṃ samatalaṃ maggaṃ kāretvā yādisaṃ mallarājāno makuṭabandhanassa ca santhāgārassa ca antare pūjaṃ kāresuṃ. Tādisaṃ pañcavīsatiyojanepi magge pūjaṃ kāretvā lokassa anukkaṇṭhanatthaṃ sabbattha antarāpaṇe pasāretvā suvaṇṇadoṇiyaṃ pakkhittadhātuyo sattipañjarena parikkhipāpetvā attano vijite pañcayojanasataparimaṇḍale manusse sannipātāpesi. Te dhātuyo gahetvā kusinārato sādhukīḷitaṃ kīḷantā nikkhamitvā yattha yattha suvaṇṇavaṇṇāni pupphāni passanti, tattha tattha dhātuyo sattiantare ṭhapetvā pūjaṃ akaṃsu. Tesaṃ pupphānaṃ khīṇakāle gacchanti, rathassa dhuraṭṭhānaṃ pacchimaṭṭhāne sampatte satta divase sādhukīḷitaṃ kīḷanti. Evaṃ dhātuyo gahetvā āgacchantānaṃ satta vassāni satta māsāni satta divasāni vītivattāni.
那些持邪见的人抱怨说:“自从沙门乔达摩般涅槃以后,我们就被强行拉去参加这种礼敬庆典,受尽折腾,我们的活儿全给毁了。”他们这样怨声载道,心生怨恨,结果大约有八万六千人投生到了恶趣。诸漏尽者观察之后,看见“大批人因为心生怨恨而投生恶趣”,就商量说:“我们得让帝释天王想办法把舍利取回来。”于是他们来到帝释天王那里,把这件事告诉他,说:“大王,请想个办法把舍利取回来。”帝释天王说:“尊者,在凡夫当中,没有谁像阿阇世那样虔诚,他不会听我的话。不过,我可以示现像魔罗恐吓那样的恐怖景象,发出巨大的声响,制造夜叉抓人、摔人、让人生病之类的事。然后你们就对国王说:‘大王,非人发怒了,请赶快让人把舍利取回来!’这样他就会让人去取了。”于是帝释天王就把这一切都做了。巴利
Micchādiṭṭhikā – ‘‘samaṇassa gotamassa parinibbutakālato paṭṭhāya balakkārena sādhukīḷitāya upaddutamha sabbe no kammantā naṭṭhā’’ti ujjhāyantā manaṃ padosetvā chaḷāsītisahassamattā apāye nibbattā. Khīṇāsavā āvajjitvā ‘‘mahājano manaṃ padosetvā apāye nibbattī’’ti disvā – ‘‘sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ dhātuāharaṇūpāyaṃ kāressāmā’’ti tassa santikaṃ gantvā tamatthaṃ ārocetvā – ‘‘dhātuāharaṇūpāyaṃ karohi mahārājā’’ti āhaṃsu. Sakko āha – ‘‘bhante, puthujjano nāma ajātasattunā samo saddho natthi, na so mama vacanaṃ karissati, apica kho māravibhiṃsakasadisaṃ vibhiṃsakaṃ dassessāmi, mahāsaddaṃ sāvessāmi, yakkhagāhakakhipitakaarocake karissāmi, tumhe ‘amanussā mahārāja kupitā dhātuyo āharāpethā’ti vadeyyātha, evaṃ so āharāpessatī’’ti. Atha kho sakko taṃ sabbaṃ akāsi.
长老们也去见国王,说道:“大王,非人发怒了,请让人把舍利取回来。”国王说:“尊者,我的心还没满足,即便如此,就让他们取来吧。”到了第七天,人们把舍利取来了。取回舍利后,国王拿着舍利,在王舍城建了塔,并举行了盛大的法会。其他人也各自随自己的能力取来舍利,在各自的地方建塔,并举行了盛大的法会。巴利
Therāpi rājānaṃ upasaṅkamitvā – ‘‘mahārāja, amanussā kupitā, dhātuyo āharāpehī’’ti bhaṇiṃsu. Rājā – ‘‘na tāva, bhante, mayhaṃ cittaṃ tussati, evaṃ santepi āharantū’’ti āha. Sattamadivase dhātuyo āhariṃsu. Evaṃ āhatā dhātuyo gahetvā rājagahe thūpañca mahañca akāsi. Itarepi attano attano balānurūpena āharitvā sakasakaṭṭhānesu thūpañca mahañca akaṃsu.
240 这件事过去确实是这样发生的——后来结集经典的诸位长老这样说:在赡部洲,舍利的分配和十座塔的建造,过去确实曾经这样发生过。然而,当塔庙这样建好之后,大迦叶尊者看到舍利会有危险,就去见阿阇世王,说:“大王,应该造一个收藏舍利的地方。”国王说:“好的,尊者,收藏舍利的事先由我来做,可是其余的舍利我要怎么取来呢?”大迦叶尊者说:“不,大王,取舍利不是你的责任,是我们的责任。”国王说:“好的,尊者,你们去把舍利取来,我来做收藏舍利的事。”尊者只给那些王族留下够他们自己供养的一点点,其余舍利全都取了来。不过,在罗摩村的舍利由龙族守护着,那些舍利不会有危险。尊者想到:“将来它们会被安放在兰卡岛大寺的大塔里”,所以没有取走那些舍利,而是从其余七座城取来舍利。然后他站在王舍城东南方,立下决意:“在这个地方,凡是石头,都消失吧;泥土要变得非常清净;水不要涌出来。”巴利
240.Evametaṃ bhūtapubbanti evaṃ etaṃ dhātubhājanañceva dasathūpakaraṇañca jambudīpe bhūtapubbanti pacchā saṅgītikārakā āhaṃsu. Evaṃ patiṭṭhitesu pana thūpesu mahākassapatthero dhātūnaṃ antarāyaṃ disvā rājānaṃ ajātasattuṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘mahārāja, ekaṃ dhātunidhānaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti āha. Sādhu, bhante, nidhānakammaṃ tāva mama hotu, sesadhātuyo pana kathaṃ āharāmīti? Na, mahārāja, dhātuāharaṇaṃ tuyhaṃ bhāro, amhākaṃ bhāroti. Sādhu, bhante, tumhe dhātuyo āharatha, ahaṃ dhātunidhānaṃ karissāmīti. Thero tesaṃ tesaṃ rājakulānaṃ paricaraṇamattameva ṭhapetvā sesadhātuyo āhari. Rāmagāme pana dhātuyo nāgā pariggaṇhiṃsu, tāsaṃ antarāyo natthi. ‘‘Anāgate laṅkādīpe mahāvihāre mahācetiyamhi nidahissantī’’ti tā na āharitvā sesehi sattahi nagarehi āharitvā rājagahassa pācīnadakkhiṇadisābhāge ṭhatvā – ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne yo pāsāṇo atthi, so antaradhāyatu, paṃsu suvisuddhā hotu, udakaṃ mā uṭṭhahatū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi.
国王让人把那块地方挖开,用挖出来的泥土烧成砖,为八十位大弟子建了塔庙。即使有人问“国王在这里建什么”,他们也只是回答“是大弟子的塔庙”,没有人知道那是安放舍利的地方。当那个地方挖到八十肘深时,他让人在底下铺了一层铜板,然后按照塔园舍利殿的尺寸,用赤铜造了一座殿堂,又让人做了八组栴檀木等材质的容器和塔。接着,他把世尊的舍利放进栴檀木容器里,再把这个栴檀木容器放进另一个栴檀木容器,再放进另一个,就这样一共套了八层栴檀木容器。然后用同样的方法,把这八层栴檀木容器放进八层栴檀木塔里,把八层栴檀木塔放进八层红栴檀木容器里,把八层红栴檀木容器放进八层红栴檀木塔里,接着依次是:八层象牙容器、八层象牙塔;八层众宝容器、八层众宝塔;八层金容器、八层金塔;八层银容器、八层银塔;八层摩尼宝容器、八层摩尼宝塔;八层赤珠容器、八层赤珠塔;八层猫眼石容器、八层猫眼石塔;八层水晶容器、八层水晶塔,就这样一层套一层地放了进去。巴利
Rājā taṃ ṭhānaṃ khaṇāpetvā tato uddhatapaṃsunā iṭṭhakā kāretvā asītimahāsāvakānaṃ cetiyāni kāreti. ‘‘Idha rājā kiṃ kāretī’’ti pucchantānampi ‘‘mahāsāvakānaṃ cetiyānī’’ti vadanti, na koci dhātunidhānabhāvaṃ jānāti. Asītihatthagambhīre pana tasmiṃ padese jāte heṭṭhā lohasanthāraṃ santharāpetvā tattha thūpārāme cetiyagharappamāṇaṃ tambalohamayaṃ gehaṃ kārāpetvā aṭṭha aṭṭha haricandanādimaye karaṇḍe ca thūpe ca kārāpesi. Atha bhagavato dhātuyo haricandanakaraṇḍe pakkhipitvā taṃ haricandanakaraṇḍakampi aññasmiṃ haricandanakaraṇḍake, tampi aññasminti evaṃ aṭṭha haricandanakaraṇḍe ekato katvā eteneva upāyena te aṭṭha karaṇḍe aṭṭhasu haricandanathūpesu, aṭṭha haricandanathūpe aṭṭhasu lohitacandanakaraṇḍesu, aṭṭha lohitacandanakaraṇḍe aṭṭhasu lohitacandanathūpesu, aṭṭha lohitacandanathūpe aṭṭhasu dantakaraṇḍesu , aṭṭha dantakaraṇḍe aṭṭhasu dantathūpesu, aṭṭha dantathūpe aṭṭhasu sabbaratanakaraṇḍesu, aṭṭha sabbaratanakaraṇḍe aṭṭhasu sabbaratanathūpesu, aṭṭha sabbaratanathūpe aṭṭhasu suvaṇṇakaraṇḍesu, aṭṭha suvaṇṇakaraṇḍe, aṭṭhasu suvaṇṇathūpesu, aṭṭha suvaṇṇathūpe aṭṭhasu rajatakaraṇḍesu, aṭṭha rajatakaraṇḍe aṭṭhasu rajatathūpesu, aṭṭha rajatathūpe, aṭṭhasu maṇikaraṇḍesu, aṭṭha maṇikaraṇḍe aṭṭhasu maṇithūpesu, aṭṭha maṇithūpe aṭṭhasu lohitaṅkakaraṇḍesu, aṭṭha lohitaṅkakaraṇḍe aṭṭhasu lohitaṅkathūpesu, aṭṭha lohitaṅkathūpe aṭṭhasu masāragallakaraṇḍesu, aṭṭha masāragallakaraṇḍe aṭṭhasu masāragallathūpesu, aṭṭha masāragallathūpe aṭṭhasu phalikakaraṇḍesu, aṭṭha phalikakaraṇḍe aṭṭhasu phalikamayathūpesu pakkhipi.
所有这些建筑的最上面是一座水晶塔,大小跟塔园舍利殿一样。在它上面,他让人建了一座众宝所成的殿堂;再上面是一座黄金所成的殿堂,再上面是一座白银所成的殿堂,再上面是一座赤铜所成的殿堂。在那里,他撒下各种宝石做的沙,又散下成千上万的水生和陆生鲜花,还让人用黄金塑造了五百五十个本生故事、八十位大长老、苏托达那大王、摩诃摩耶以及七位同日出生者的所有形象。他让人安放了五百五十个金银所成的满瓶,竖起了五百面金幢。又让人做了五百盏金灯和五百盏银灯,灌满香精油,并在灯里放上细布灯芯。巴利
Sabbesaṃ uparimaṃ phalikacetiyaṃ thūpārāmacetiyappamāṇaṃ ahosi, tassa upari sabbaratanamayaṃ gehaṃ kāresi, tassa upari suvaṇṇamayaṃ, tassa upari rajatamayaṃ, tassa upari tambalohamayaṃ gehaṃ. Tattha sabbaratanamayaṃ vālikaṃ okiritvā jalajathalajapupphānaṃ sahassāni vippakiritvā aḍḍhachaṭṭhāni jātakasatāni asītimahāthere suddhodanamahārājānaṃ mahāmāyādeviṃ satta sahajāteti sabbānetāni suvaṇṇamayāneva kāresi. Pañcapañcasate suvaṇṇarajatamaye puṇṇaghaṭe ṭhapāpesi, pañca suvaṇṇaddhajasate ussāpesi. Pañcasate suvaṇṇadīpe, pañcasate rajatadīpe kārāpetvā sugandhatelassa pūretvā tesu dukūlavaṭṭiyo ṭhapesi.
这时,大迦叶尊者下定决心:“愿花环不枯萎,愿香气不消散,愿灯不熄灭。”然后命人在金片上刻下文字:巴利
Athāyasmā mahākassapo – ‘‘mālā mā milāyantu, gandhā mā vinassantu, dīpā mā vijjhāyantū’’ti adhiṭṭhahitvā suvaṇṇapaṭṭe akkharāni chindāpesi –
未来会有一位叫喜见的王子,他举起伞盖登位,成为无忧法王。他会让这些舍利广泛流传。巴利
‘‘Anāgate piyadāso nāma kumāro chattaṃ ussāpetvā asoko dhammarājā bhavissati. So imā dhātuyo vitthārikā karissatī’’ti.
国王用各种装饰把塔供养了一遍,然后从最里面的门开始,一扇一扇地把门关上,走了出来。他关上红铜门,把钥匙和印章系在门闩绳上,又就地放了一大堆宝石,并让人刻下文字:“将来如果有穷困的国王,可以取走这颗宝石,用来供养舍利。”巴利
Rājā sabbapasādhanehi pūjetvā ādito paṭṭhāya dvāraṃ pidahanto nikkhami, so tambalohadvāraṃ pidahitvā āviñchanarajjuyaṃ kuñcikamuddikaṃ bandhitvā tattheva mahantaṃ maṇikkhandhaṃ ṭhapetvā – ‘‘anāgate daliddarājā imaṃ maṇiṃ gahetvā dhātūnaṃ sakkāraṃ karotū’’ti akkharaṃ chindāpesi.
帝释天王把毗首羯磨叫来,派他去说:孩子,阿阇世王已经安置好了舍利函,你去那里设好守护吧。毗首羯磨来了以后,装了一套猛兽合击的机关。他在舍利室里让一些木制人像手持水晶色的剑,又装了一个像风一样飞速旋转的机关,用一根楔子固定住。然后他在四周砌起像砖房一样的石墙,上面用一块石板盖住,填上土,把地面整平,在它上面建起了一座石塔。舍利函就这样安置完成了。大长老住世直到寿命尽时,也般涅槃了;国王也随业而去;那些人也都在那时去世了。巴利
Sakko devarājā vissakammaṃ āmantetvā – ‘‘tāta, ajātasattunā dhātunidhānaṃ kataṃ, ettha ārakkhaṃ paṭṭhapehī’’ti pahiṇi. So āgantvā vāḷasaṅghāṭayantaṃ yojesi, kaṭṭharūpakāni tasmiṃ dhātugabbhe phalikavaṇṇakhagge gāhetvā vātasadisena vegena anupariyāyantaṃ yantaṃ yojetvā ekāya eva āṇiyā bandhitvā samantato giñjakāvasathākārena silāparikkhepaṃ katvā upari ekāya pidahitvā paṃsuṃ pakkhipitvā bhūmiṃ samaṃ katvā tassa upari pāsāṇathūpaṃ patiṭṭhapesi. Evaṃ niṭṭhite dhātunidhāne yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā theropi parinibbuto, rājāpi yathākammaṃ gato, tepi manussā kālaṅkatā.
后来,名叫喜见的王子举起伞盖,成为无忧法王。他取出那些舍利,在赡部洲广泛分布。他是怎么做的呢?他依靠尼拘律沙弥,在教法中获得了净信,建造了八万四千座寺院,然后问比丘僧团:“尊者,我建了八万四千座寺院,该从哪里得到舍利呢?”僧团说:“大王,我们听说有舍利函,但不知道在哪个地方。”国王派人拆开王舍城的塔庙,没找到舍利,就把它修复如初。然后他带领比丘、比丘尼、近事男、近事女这四众,前往毗舍离。在那里也没找到,又去迦毗罗卫。在那里也没找到,又去了罗摩村。在罗摩村,龙族不让拆塔,锄头一落到塔上就碎成片片。这样在那里也没得到,他又去了阿罗迦、毗提诃岛、波婆、拘尸那罗,到处都拆了塔庙,还是得不到舍利,只好一一修复如初。然后他回到王舍城,召集四众问道:“有谁曾经听说过‘某个地方有舍利函’吗?”巴利
Aparabhāge piyadāso nāma kumāro chattaṃ ussāpetvā asoko nāma dhammarājā hutvā tā dhātuyo gahetvā jambudīpe vitthārikā akāsi. Kathaṃ? So nigrodhasāmaṇeraṃ nissāya sāsane laddhappasādo caturāsīti vihārasahassāni kāretvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pucchi – ‘‘bhante, mayā caturāsīti vihārasahassāni kāritāni, dhātuyo kuto labhissāmī’’ti? Mahārāja, – ‘‘dhātunidhānaṃ nāma atthī’’ti suṇoma, na pana paññāyati – ‘‘asukasmiṃ ṭhāne’’ti. Rājā rājagahe cetiyaṃ bhindāpetvā dhātuṃ apassanto paṭipākatikaṃ kāretvā bhikkhubhikkhuniyo upāsakaupāsikāyoti catasso parisā gahetvā vesāliṃ gato. Tatrāpi alabhitvā kapilavatthuṃ. Tatrāpi alabhitvā rāmagāmaṃ gato. Rāmagāme nāgā cetiyaṃ bhindituṃ na adaṃsu, cetiye nipatitakudālo khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Evaṃ tatrāpi alabhitvā allakappaṃ veṭhadīpaṃ pāvaṃ kusināranti sabbattha cetiyāni bhinditvā dhātuṃ alabhitvāva paṭipākatikāni katvā puna rājagahaṃ gantvā catasso parisā sannipātāpetvā – ‘‘atthi kenaci sutapubbaṃ ‘asukaṭṭhāne nāma dhātunidhāna’nti’’ pucchi.
这时,有一位一百二十岁的长老说:“我不知道‘某处有舍利函’这件事。不过,我的父亲是一位大长老。我七岁那年,他让我拿着花篮,对我说:‘来,沙弥,某处灌木丛中有一座石塔,我们去那里吧。’我们到了那里,供养之后,他说:‘沙弥,你应当记住这个地方。’我就只知道这么多,大王。”国王说:“就是这个地方!”于是让人移开树丛,清除石塔和泥土,看到了下面的石灰地面。接着又搬开石灰和砖块,一层层下到院落里,看见了七宝沙,还有那些手持刀剑、不停旋转的木制人像。他召来夜叉仆从,做了祭祀供养,却仍然看不到尽头和边际,于是向天神们致敬,说道:“我取出这些舍利后,会安置在八万四千座寺院中供养,请天神们不要阻碍我。”巴利
Tatreko vīsavassasatiko thero – ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne dhātunidhāna’’nti na jānāmi, mayhaṃ pana pitā mahāthero maṃ sattavassakāle mālācaṅkoṭakaṃ gāhāpetvā – ‘‘ehi sāmaṇera, asukagacchantare pāsāṇathūpo atthi, tattha gacchāmā’’ti gantvā pūjetvā – ‘‘imaṃ ṭhānaṃ upadhāretuṃ vaṭṭati sāmaṇerā’’ti āha. Ahaṃ ettakaṃ jānāmi mahārājāti āha. Rājā ‘‘etadeva ṭhāna’’nti vatvā gacche hāretvā pāsāṇathūpañca paṃsuñca apanetvā heṭṭhā sudhābhūmiṃ addasa. Tato sudhañca iṭṭhakāyo ca hāretvā anupubbena pariveṇaṃ oruyha sattaratanavālukaṃ asihatthāni ca kaṭṭharūpakāni samparivattakāni addasa. So yakkhadāsake pakkosāpetvā balikammaṃ kāretvāpi neva antaṃ na koṭiṃ passanto devatānaṃ namassamāno – ‘‘ahaṃ imā dhātuyo gahetvā caturāsītiyā vihārasahassesu nidahitvā sakkāraṃ karomi, mā me devatā antarāyaṃ karontū’’ti āha.
帝释天王正在巡游,看见这情形,就吩咐毗首羯磨:“孩子,无忧法王下到院落里了,说要取出舍利,你去把那些木制人像搬走。”毗首羯磨就变成五个发髻的村童模样,走到国王面前,手持弓箭站定,说:“大王,我来搬。”国王说:“搬吧,孩子。”他拿起箭,直接射向接合处,所有木像全都散开了。国王随即抓住系在门闩绳上的钥匙和印章,看见了那堆宝石。他读到上面刻的字:“未来会有一个贫穷的国王拿到这颗宝石,供养舍利。”他又看到那些字,生气起来:“把我这样的国王叫作贫穷的国王,这太不像话了。”他一次又一次地用力,终于让人打开门,走进了内室。巴利
Sakko devarājā cārikaṃ caranto taṃ disvā vissakammaṃ āmantesi – ‘‘tāta, asoko dhammarājā ‘dhātuyo nīharissāmī’ti pariveṇaṃ otiṇṇo, gantvā kaṭṭharūpakāni hārehī’’ti. So pañcacūḷagāmadārakavesena gantvā rañño purato dhanuhattho ṭhatvā – ‘‘harāmi mahārājā’’ti āha. ‘‘Hara, tātā’’ti saraṃ gahetvā sandhimhiyeva vijjhi, sabbaṃ vippakiriyittha. Atha rājā āviñchane bandhaṃ kuñcikamuddikaṃ gaṇhi, maṇikkhandhaṃ passi. ‘‘Anāgate daliddarājā imaṃ maṇiṃ gahetvā dhātūnaṃ sakkāraṃ karotū’’ti puna akkharāni disvā kujjhitvā – ‘‘mādisaṃ nāma rājānaṃ daliddarājāti vattuṃ ayutta’’nti punappunaṃ ghaṭetvā dvāraṃ vivarāpetvā antogehaṃ paviṭṭho.
那些安放在两百一十八年以上的灯,依然那样燃烧着。青莲花仿佛刚刚才采来放上去,花垫仿佛刚刚才铺好,香料仿佛刚刚才研磨后摆在那里。国王拿起金箔,念道:“未来会有一位名叫喜见的王子,他将会举起伞盖,成为名叫阿育的法王,他会把这些舍利广泛分布。”念完之后,他说:“尊者,我被大迦叶长老见到了。”说完,他弯起左臂,用右手弹指。他只在那个地方留下需要就地供养的那一份舍利,把其余的舍利取走,按照先前封闭舍利室的方法把舍利室重新封好,一切都恢复原样,然后在上面建起石塔,把舍利安奉到八万四千座精舍中。接着他顶礼大长老们,问道:“尊者,我是佛陀教法的继承人吗?”大长老们说:“大王,你哪里是继承人?你是教法之外的人。”国王说:“尊者,我布施了九十六俱胝的财富,建了八万四千座精舍,如果我还不是继承人,那还有谁是呢?”大长老们说:“大王,你是资具的布施者。如果有人让自己的儿子和女儿出家,那才是教法中的继承人。”于是国王就让自己的儿子和女儿出家了。这时长老们对他说:“大王,现在你是教法中的继承人了。”巴利
Aṭṭhārasavassādhikānaṃ dvinnaṃ vassasatānaṃ upari āropitadīpā tatheva pajjalanti. Nīluppalapupphāni taṅkhaṇaṃ āharitvā āropitāni viya, pupphasanthāro taṅkhaṇaṃ santhato viya, gandhā taṃ muhuttaṃ pisitvā ṭhapitā viya rājā suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ gahetvā – ‘‘anāgate piyadāso nāma kumāro chattaṃ ussāpetvā asoko nāma dhammarājā bhavissati so imā dhātuyo vitthārikā karissatī’’ti vācetvā – ‘‘diṭṭho bho, ahaṃ ayyena mahākassapattherenā’’ti vatvā vāmahatthaṃ ābhujitvā dakkhiṇena hatthena apphoṭesi. So tasmiṃ ṭhāne paricaraṇadhātumattameva ṭhapetvā sesā dhātuyo gahetvā dhātugehaṃ pubbe pihitanayeneva pidahitvā sabbaṃ yathāpakatiyāva katvā upari pāsāṇacetiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā caturāsītiyā vihārasahassesu dhātuyo patiṭṭhāpetvā mahāthere vanditvā pucchi – ‘‘dāyādomhi, bhante, buddhasāsane’’ti. Kissa dāyādo tvaṃ, mahārāja, bāhirako tvaṃ sāsanassāti. Bhante, channavutikoṭidhanaṃ vissajjetvā caturāsīti vihārasahassāni kāretvā ahaṃ na dāyādo, añño ko dāyādoti? Paccayadāyako nāma tvaṃ mahārāja, yo pana attano puttañca dhītarañca pabbājeti, ayaṃ sāsane dāyādo nāmāti. So puttañca dhītarañca pabbājesi. Atha naṃ therā āhaṃsu – ‘‘idāni, mahārāja, sāsane dāyādosī’’ti.
“往昔之事如此”这句话的意思是:在过去,赡部洲确实也曾有过这样的舍利安置。第三次结集的编集者们也把这一句收了进去。巴利
Evametaṃbhūtapubbanti evaṃ etaṃ atīte dhātunidhānampi jambudīpatale bhūtapubbanti. Tatiyasaṅgītikārāpi imaṃ padaṃ ṭhapayiṃsu.
至于“具眼者八斛之身”等偈颂,则是锡兰岛的长老们所说的。巴利
Aṭṭhadoṇaṃ cakkhumato sarīrantiādigāthāyo pana tambapaṇṇidīpe therehi vuttāti.